JP2020081472A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: When game balls enter an operation hole provided in a game area, variable display of a pattern is executed by a drum device 920F of a variable display unit 900F, and a pattern combination corresponding to a lottery result based on entry of game balls into the operation hole is stopped on the drum device 920F. In the drum device 920F, a left drum unit 923LF for a left pattern row, a middle drum unit 923MF for a middle pattern row, and a right drum unit 923RF for a left pattern row are disposed side by side, and a display mode of the drum unit 920F is switched from a first mode to a second mode when the middle drum unit 923F retreats to a rear position from a front position. When the drum unit 920F is switched to the second mode, a performance space by a movable block 951F of a performance device 950F is formed in front of the middle drum unit 923MF and between the left and right drum units 923LF, 923RF.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 115

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are provided with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating opening provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, is generated. At the same time, the variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-074175, A

In recent years, various contrivances have been made to raise the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately improving the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention is
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage unit capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information,
A pattern display device having a display unit capable of variably displaying a pattern,
The variable display of the design is started on the display unit, and the variable display is ended so that the design corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed, which is one of the game times, and the acquired information is obtained. A gaming machine comprising: game time control means for controlling the pattern display device so that a variable display of a pattern for each game time is performed according to special information stored in the storage means,
Position changing means for moving the display unit to a first position and a second position,
A movable effect device that has a movable body that can be moved to a standby position and an effect position, and that executes a special effect in a state in which the movable object is arranged at the effect position;
When the special effect is executed, the movable effect device is configured to use a void formed by moving the display unit from the first position to the second position as an operation area of the movable body. And
The position changing means,
Moving means for moving the display unit from the first position to the second position when the special effect is executed by the movable effect device,
The display unit moved to the second position by the moving means is played over a plurality of game times including a game time moved to the second position and another game time executed after the game time. And a stopping means for stopping at the second position.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back side. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. (A) It is a front view of a variable display unit and (b) is a perspective view of a variable display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable display unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a variable display unit. It is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit. It is the schematic which shows the mode of light emission. It is a schematic diagram showing a mounting structure of a light guide plate. It is a schematic diagram showing the relation between a light-emitting part and a light guide plate. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing various counters. It is a schematic diagram showing composition concerning a symbol display. It is a schematic diagram showing a symbol displayed on a variable display unit. It is the schematic which shows the arrangement|sequence of the symbol displayed on a variable display unit. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of a display in a variable display unit. It is a schematic diagram showing arrangement of a side LED. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing performed by MPU of the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows change display control processing performed by MPU of an information and production control device. It is a flow chart which shows processing for fluctuation start. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a variable display mode and a jackpot expectation. It is the schematic which shows the flow of production in the normal reach which does not support special modification. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the production in the normal reach which corresponds to special change. It is a flow chart which shows processing for change. It is a flow chart which shows light emission and drive control processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special variation display. It is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in normal reach that does not support special changes. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the production in the normal reach corresponding to a special change. It is a schematic diagram showing a relation between a visible range and a boundary portion. It is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the side LED and boundary part which are (a) light emission control processing and (b) control object. It is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit in the second embodiment. (A) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between each light guide plate and the background, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the background. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a variable display unit. It is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement of symbols and the like displayed on the inner reel. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the symbol combination displayed on the inner reel and the jackpot type. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows control processing for upper operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for upper working ports. It is a flow chart which shows control processing for lower operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for lower working ports. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between (a) gaming state and the kind of lottery mode, and support mode, and (b) the schematic diagram which shows the relationship between gaming state and fluctuation display time. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a game state and lighting/extinguishing of each display unit. (A) A schematic view showing a display mainly on an outer reel, and (b) a schematic view showing a display mainly on an inner reel. It is a flowchart which shows the display process for upper operation ports performed by MPU of a notification/effect control device. It is a flow chart which shows main control processing for upper operation ports. It is a flow chart which shows special control processing for upper operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the display process for lower operation ports. It is a flow chart which shows main control processing for lower operation ports. It is a flow chart which shows special control processing for lower operation ports. It is the schematic which shows the game device in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the distribution destination of the game ball which reached the distribution mechanism. (A) Schematic view of the distribution mechanism in the non-regulated state, (b) Schematic view of the distribution device in the regulated state. (A) It is the perspective view which looked at a ball receiving mechanism from the upper part, and (b) is a longitudinal section of the ball receiving mechanism. It is a schematic diagram of the game device in a non-assisted state. It is a schematic diagram of the game device in the auxiliary state. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a game device. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a game device. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a game device. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a game device. It is a perspective view showing a back block of a game board unit in a fifth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a back block. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable display unit from the front. It is a front view of a variable display unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a change of a display form in a drum device. It is a front view of the drum apparatus used as the 2nd form. It is the schematic which shows the movement of the production device. It is the schematic which shows the mode of cooperation of the drum device and the production device. It is a front view showing a variable display unit during execution of special effects. It is the schematic which shows the operation territory for the production device which occurs by the change from 1st form to 2nd form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for change which is performed by MPU of an information and production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for variable display units. It is a flowchart which shows a display form switching process. It is the flowchart which shows the production device processing. It is a flow chart which shows a change end processing performed by MPU of an information and production control device. It is a timing chart showing a flow of special effects. It is the schematic which shows the flow of special production. It is the schematic which shows the flow of special production. It is the schematic which shows the flow of special production. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a drum device. It is a schematic diagram showing a drum device in a 6th embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable display unit in a 7th embodiment from the game machine front. It is a front view of a variable display unit. (A1) A schematic view of the variable display unit in the first display form seen from the side, (a2) A schematic view of the variable display unit in the first display form seen from the front of the gaming machine, (b1) It is the schematic which looked at the variable display unit which has the 2nd display form from the side, and (b2) is the schematic which looked at the variable display unit which has the 2nd display form from the front of the gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a reach line. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a reach line and a jackpot expectation degree, and the schematic view which shows the relationship between a variation display mode and a jackpot expectation degree. It is a flow chart which shows change display control processing performed by MPU of an information and production control device. It is a flow chart which shows processing for change. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd display modes. It is the schematic which illustrated the flow of (a) complete disengagement, and the schematic view which illustrated the flow of (b) reach display of non-special production. It is the schematic which illustrated the flow of the reach display corresponding to special production. It is the schematic which illustrated the flow of the reach display corresponding to special production. It is a timing chart showing a flow of a third special effect. It is the schematic which shows the variable display unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a relation of a change display mode, a change display time, and a jackpot expectation. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the confirmation processing for reservation notice. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of a reservation command. It is a flowchart showing a special effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows special setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change end processing. It is the schematic which shows a special display. It is a timing chart showing a flow of special effects.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. Note that, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting long frame members to four sides, and is formed to have a rectangular frame shape as a whole. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility or the like of the game hall.

The gaming machine main portion 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable and closable state. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and is further connected to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. A support mechanism is constituted by the upper support metal fitting 17 and the lower support metal fitting 18, and the main body 12 of the gaming machine rotates the left side in a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 by the support mechanism. The right side of the pachinko machine can be turned forward with respect to the right side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main portion 12 is provided with an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear side of the inner frame 13. And a back pack unit 15 for The inner frame 13 of the main body 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in a game machine front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in a game machine front view. There is.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center portion of the frame body 20 so that almost all of a game area PE described later can be visually recognized, and the window portion 21 is formed by a glass unit 22. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition part that partitions the holding region of the glass panel 23 into front and rear parts, and both glass panels 23 face each other with the partition part in between. That is, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming areas PE are doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

In addition, both glass panels 23 do not necessarily need to be unitized using the glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached to the frame body 20 individually. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the respective glass panels face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

Around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21), light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. For example, an annular illumination portion 26 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window portion 21. In the annular illumination portion 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, at the center of the annular illumination portion 26 and at the uppermost portion of the pachinko machine 10, there is provided an error display lamp portion 27 which is turned on when a defect such as an error occurs, and further to the left and right thereof during the payout of prize balls. A prize ball lamp unit 28 that lights up is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28, which outputs a sound effect, BGM and the like according to the gaming state (see FIG. 3).

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 which bulge toward the front side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that is open upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that is also open upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2 ). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to a game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the excess game balls in the upper plate 33 and a game ball that has not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) of the game balls emitted by the game ball firing mechanism. It has a function as a tray for storing the discharged game balls when the balls are returned to the player.

On the right side of the lower bulging portion 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided so as to project to the front side. By operating the game ball launching handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launching mechanism described later. It should be noted that the firing speed of the game ball becomes faster as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball firing handle 41 increases, and when the operation amount is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount, the game ball is played. The area PE is reached. Further, by adjusting the operation amount by the player, it is possible to separately strike the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is made of synthetic resin, and has a front door-side upper tray passage communicating with the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage communicating with the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed in an upper corner portion thereof, and the receiving portion is partitioned into left and right by a partition wall, so that an entrance of the front door side upper plate passage is formed. The portion and the entrance portion of the lower door passage on the front door side are partitioned and formed. The front door side upper plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are connected to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls that enter the front door side upper plate passage are guided to the upper plate 33 to lower the front door side. The game ball that has entered the dish passage is guided to the lower dish 34.

Protruding shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side on the back surface. These projection shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, in FIG. 5 as well, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. Will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Supporting fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the front surface of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5). Although not shown, the support fittings 71, 72 have shaft portions, and the bearing portions provided in the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shaft portions, so that the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged on the front end side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the front door hook members 76 are arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) thereof. have. The inner frame base body 50 has a hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 and a slit for projecting to the front side of the inner frame 13 corresponds to each front door hook member 76. Is formed in this way. The front door hook member 76 protruding through the slits is locked to the front door hook member 76 provided in the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, The front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. By hooking these inner frame hook members 77 on the hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, the main machine portion 12 of the gaming machine is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77, interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the locking of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). The lock of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

An accommodation recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The accommodation recess 51 is recessed to the rear of the game machine in accordance with the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed in the accommodation recess 51 from the front of the game machine by a manual lock mechanism. .. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the accommodation recess 51, and a rear surface configuration of the game board unit 80 (a rear block 80b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. .. Note that the window hole 52 is in a state in which almost the entire area is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the gaming board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the front block 80a formed mainly of a plate material made of a synthetic resin material, and on the back side of the front block 80a, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable effect) described later. (A mechanism or the like) is integrated with a back block 80b which is mounted on the base body 251.

The front surface block 80a has a game area forming body 310 formed of a transparent resin, and the above-mentioned game area PE in which a game ball flows down is formed on the front surface of the game area forming body 310. As described above, the game area PE is covered by the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 310 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE has the same game area PE. Are arranged so that they are not lined up in front and back at the same location. Thereby, the ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. The game area forming body 310 is not limited to being made of synthetic resin, and can be made of wood.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 310) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the rear.

The game area forming body 310 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-back direction). As shown in FIG. 6, a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, working opening units 83 (working openings 83a and 83b), a through gate 84, etc. are arranged in each opening. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation openings 83a and 83b, these gaming balls are detected by the detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective ball entering portions, and the detection results are obtained. Based on, a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the bottom of the game area forming body 310, and game balls that have not entered the various ball-in portions or the like are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the out port 89, the game ball entering the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b is also referred to as a "winning". Express.

The game area forming body 310 is provided with various game parts such as a large number of game nails 93 and a windmill 94 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls. The flow paths of the game balls are differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 93 and the windmill 94, and the above-described general winning openings 81 and the like are adjusted so that the winning is generated with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the front block 80a (game area forming body 310), and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening. Behind the central opening 85, the variable display unit 500 and the like belonging to the back block 80b are located, and the variable display unit 500 and the like can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover 86). .. Note that, in FIG. 6, for convenience of description, the opening cover 86 is shown by a chain double-dashed line, and the variable display unit 500 is visible.

The operation port unit 83, the through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating port unit 83 is provided with an upper operating port 83a disposed below the variable display unit 500 and a lower operating port 83b disposed below the upper operating port 83a. The lower working opening 83b of the two working openings 83a and 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 serving as an opening/closing type ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive portion that drives the movable piece, and has the same open state (auxiliary state) that allows or facilitates ball entry into the lower working opening 83b. It is possible to switch to a closed state (non-assisted state) where ball entry is impossible or difficult.

The through gate 84 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower working port 83b (specifically, the side of the variable display unit 500: the right route), and the lottery is won by the lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84. In such a case, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper working port 83a, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 83b, four game balls are paid out. However, the payout number of gaming balls is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 82 is formed with a special winning opening through which a game ball can pass, and is also opened/closed as an opening/closing member (opening/closing means) for opening/closing the special winning opening. The body is provided. The openable and closable body can be switched between an open state (allowable state) where a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (blocked state) where the same ball cannot be entered or difficult. In addition, the opening and closing body is connected to a variable winning a prize drive section (more specifically, a solenoid or the like) provided on the back side of the game board unit 80, and the opening and closing door is normally maintained in the closed state during the internal lottery. In the case of winning the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state), the jackpot can be switched to the open state (when winning the transition to the special gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state). Is becoming

Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when the jackpot is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the opening/closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) are set as an upper limit. The opening/closing door is set to be repeatedly opened.

Here, the variable display unit 500 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 500 constitutes a symbol display device that variably displays (variable display) the symbols triggered by winning in the operation openings 83a and 83b, and the display contents by the notification/effect control device and the display control device described later. Is controlled. In the variable display unit 500, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, left, center, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed by scrolling vertically, for example. When the jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset activated line, and the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered.

The game area forming body 310 is provided with a center frame 95 so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 310 from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 95 stands up from the front surface of the game area forming body 310 and the center frame 95. The gap between the glass unit 22 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the variable display unit 500, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 500 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from and the above left route that detours from the left.

The variable winning device 82 and the through gate 84 described above are arranged on the right route, and the gaming balls flowing down the left route are prevented from winning the variable winning device 82 and the through gate. On the other hand, the gaming ball flowing down the right route is prevented from winning the upper working opening 83a. Therefore, when the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation port 83b is in the high frequency support mode or in the open/close execution mode, the game ball is shot to the right route to advance the game favorably. In the low frequency support mode, the game can be advantageously advanced by shooting a game ball to the left route. In other words, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by selecting the right route/left route as the flow down route of the game ball according to the game situation.

On the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower part of the center frame 95, a stage portion 96 on which a game ball can roll to the left and right is formed. The game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 95 is discharged onto the stage portion 96 through the warp passage 97 also formed in the center frame 95. As for the stage portion 96, in order that the game ball reaching the stage portion 96 relatively easily flows into the upper operating port 83a, specifically, the upper operating port is compared with the game ball not passing through the stage portion 96. It is configured so as to easily flow into the 83a, which contributes to the improvement of the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion 96.

Here, in the present embodiment, the central opening 85 is covered by the transparent opening cover 86 as described above, and the game ball that has reached the stage portion 96 does not move to the back block 80b (variable display unit 500) side. Is regulated.

Further, a first holding lamp portion 98a and a second holding lamp portion 98b are provided on the front surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower portion of the center frame 95. The first holding lamp section 98a on the left side corresponds to the upper working opening 83a, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the upper working opening 83a is held up to four times and the number of holdings is increased by turning on the first holding lamp section 98a. It is supposed to be displayed. The second holding lamp section 98b on the right side corresponds to the lower working opening 83b, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the lower working opening 83b is held up to a maximum of four times. Is displayed.

The operation ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 500). Since the player can shift to the special game state by using the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operating ports 83a and 83b and grasps whether to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that the variable display unit 500 is focused on. Providing the operation ports 83a and 83b near the variable display unit 500 is a device for concentrating the places the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 500.

At the right end of the game area forming body 310, a game area partitioning member 99 that partitions and forms a game area PE together with a guide rail 100 described later is arranged. The game area partitioning member 99 is provided with a stopper member and a main display unit 87 against which a game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down in the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the game ball that collides.

Here, the main display unit 87 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partitioning member 99, and a part of the main display unit 87 is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display portion for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit is for the lower working port, which displays a lottery result based on the winning on the upper working port 83a, and the lower working port, which is for displaying the lottery result based on the winning on the lower working port 83b. And a display section. In the lower working port display unit, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working port 83a as a trigger. As a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 83a is performed. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 83a is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the lower working opening display unit, and the predetermined result is set as the stop result. After the picture is displayed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the lower working port display unit, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower working port 83b as a trigger. As a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 83b is performed. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower working opening 83b is the winning result corresponding to the jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the lower working opening display unit, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is entered according to the result.

Here, based on the winning in any one of the operating ports 83a, 83b, the variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display unit, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped until the game. It is equivalent to one time. However, one game play is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning is generated in any one of the operation openings 83a and 83b, the single play area is generated. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the variable display is stopped once with a predetermined stop result being displayed once in the game. It is also possible to

In addition to the above display units, the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through gate display unit for displaying a lottery result based on a winning of the through gate 84. In the display section for the through gate, the variable display of the pattern is performed by the winning of the through gate 84 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is clearly shown as the stop result of the variable display. To be done. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric power open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is displayed. After it is stopped, it shifts to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower operation port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the held display number is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 87. An on-hold number display is provided.

The main display unit described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, the visibility is secured.

The structure of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 5. Below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is launched into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball launch mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 is a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying spheres and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. A groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed on the launch rail 112, and the front and rear position of the game ball is defined by fitting the game ball into the groove.

A ball stopper that keeps the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described shooting standby position is provided at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply/firing control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion/contraction direction based on the output of an electric signal from the power supply/launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is on the game board unit 80 side, specifically, It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100 forms the game area PE together with the game area partitioning member 99 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the plate body) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. .. In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and one guide passage 103 is formed by the two rails 101, 102. Has been done. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion 104 opened to the tip side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an outlet portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112→the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104→the exit portion 105). In the gaming board unit 80, on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a reversion preventing member 106 for preventing reversal of the game ball reaching the game area PE into the guide passage 103. It is attached and suppresses that the launch of the following game ball is hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE in advance.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 that form the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is easily moved (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while being in contact with the outer rail 102 by the centrifugal force generated in itself. That is, when the game ball is delivered to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide path 103 constitutes a passage area (passage path) through which the game ball substantially passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is substantially an area where the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower end edge of the game board unit 80. It is arranged. That is, the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally displaced near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. As a result, both rails 100, 112 are brought close to the lower end edge of the game board unit 80, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return in the guide passage 103 as foul balls, those foul balls enter the foul ball passage through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower dish 34 shown in FIG. As a result, interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be subsequently launched is suppressed.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 310 so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled as a single unit during manufacturing or maintenance work, and the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like at this time. The rail cover 107 is a member mounted in view of such a situation, and is provided with a protection function for preventing the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above factors.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole that penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14). The passage forming member 121 is disposed in the. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper tray passage is disposed below the main body side upper tray passage 122. A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a front position that closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening/closing member 124 is biased by this biasing force. By being in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game balls from dropping off from the passages 122 and 123. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, a rear surface configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described based on FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8). A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be vertically separated from each other, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the housing recess (game board housing portion) 51 of the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51 from the front side of the inner frame 13. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As described above, the back surface block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game board unit 80. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 opened to the front block 80a side, and by fixing the base body 251 to the back surface of the game board unit 80, the front block 80a and the back block 80b is integrated.

The front surface side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for the movable effect mechanism and the like, and the rear surface side is an arrangement area for the control device for controlling these various configurations and the variable display unit 500.

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 projects to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the variable display unit 500 (see FIG. 6) described above with respect to the projected part and the variable display unit thereof. A notification/effect control device 140 for driving the 500 is attached. The variable display unit 500 and the notification/effect control device 140 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-back direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the variable display unit 500 is on the front side and the notification/effect control device 140 is on the rear side. Has been done.

The notification/effect control device 140 includes an notification/effect control board that controls the output of a voice, a lamp display, and the variable display unit 500 in accordance with an instruction from a main controller described later. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

Below the notification/effect control device 140, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 251 from the rear side. The main control device unit 160 has a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main controller 162 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 composed of, for example.

The board box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a box sealing portion 164 serving as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing parts 164 are provided on the short side part of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for the sealing process.

The box sealing portion 164 may have any configuration as long as it can connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner. However, by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion that constitutes the box sealing portion 164. The base and the box cover are designed so that they cannot be opened. The sealing processing by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after opening. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing parts 164. When the board box 163 is unsealed, for example, when the stored main control board is defective or when the main control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box sealing portion in which the locking pin is inserted and the board box 163 main body. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 163 that an illegal opening has been made.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by a base sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin similarly to the box sealing portion 164, and by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole portion, the base box 163 and The mounting base 161 is inseparably coupled. This makes it easier to understand the fact that the board box 163 has been removed illegally.

In the portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game board unit 80, the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, the operation openings 83a, 83b corresponding to the opening of the game board and the downstream side. A recovery passage (not shown) is formed at one location. As a result, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 81 and the like are all collected under the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have won the various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. The outlet 89 also leads to the discharge passage in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are led out into the discharge passage through the outlet 89.

In addition, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b, as a detection sensor for each of the above-described ball winning portion, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting a game ball winning the general winning opening 81, and an operating opening 83a. , 83b and a detection sensor for the operation opening for detecting the game ball that has entered the 83b are mounted, and these various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and the detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, as shown in FIG. 9, and a protective cover portion protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And 212. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 500 (see FIG. 10 ).

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower engaging pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the engaging pins 214 are provided on the bearings provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted into the portion 133. The base part 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion parts through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted. The fixing levers 134 contact the base part 211 from the rear side while being inserted into the insertion parts. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by coming into contact with each other.

A payout mechanism section 202 is arranged in the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opening upward, and the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 221. It A tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided on the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so as to communicate with the upper tray 33 through the side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening portion communicates with the lower tray 34 through the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage. Has been done.

At the lower end of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and the control device assembly unit 204 are attached so that the lower end is sandwiched in the front and rear. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on a surface facing the control device gathering unit 204, and an opening portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device gathering unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned recovery passage and the like pass to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. Is discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the dispensing control device 242 and the power/firing control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects outside the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing device 224 occurs, the ball clogging can be eliminated.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply/launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs a predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like, and further controls the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 by the player. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 that form the game ball launching mechanism 110 are executed.

Further, the power/launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between the on state (on state) and the shut off state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and storing various data, and holds the state at the time of power failure even if a power failure should occur, and returns to the state at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main body 12 of the gaming machine (inner frame 13) and exposing the back surface of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the gaming machine main portion 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. That is, it is difficult to operate the above-mentioned various switches when the main part 12 of the gaming machine is closed, and an operation from the front side of the gaming machine by a person who does not own the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheating person). Is difficult.

(Variable display unit 500)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the lottery based on the entry into the working opening unit 83 is notified by the variable display unit 500 mounted on the game board unit 80. The configuration related to the variable display unit 500 is characteristic. The variable display unit 500 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. 11A is a front view of the variable display unit 500, FIG. 11B is a perspective view of the variable display unit 500, FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the variable display unit 500, and FIG. 13 is a vertical cross section of the variable display unit 500. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit. Note that, in FIG. 12, a part of the drum unit is shown in a state in which a light guide portion described later is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the variable display unit 500 includes a substantially box-shaped housing 521 opened to the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality (specifically, three) drum units 523 accommodated in the housing 521 so as to be arranged side by side. The housing 521 is integrated with the game area forming body 310 by being fixed to the game area forming body 310 from the back side thereof. It should be noted that the housing 521 is colored and opaque, and shields light from the outside of the housing 521 so as not to be radiated to the inside through the meat portion of the housing 521.

A part of the drum unit 523 projects forward through the opening 522 of the housing 521. Part of this protruding portion is visible from the front of the game machine through the central opening 85 formed in the game board unit (see the double-dotted line in FIG. 11A). That is, the central opening 85 functions as a defining portion or a window portion that defines a region in which the variable display unit 500 is visible.

As shown in FIG. 12, the drum unit 523 includes a plate-shaped base body 524 that constitutes a mounting portion to the housing 521, and a rotating body (drum) 525 held by the base body 524. In the state where the base body 524 is fixed to the housing 521, the base body 524 divides the inner region of the housing 521 into three equal parts to the left and right in accordance with each drum unit 523.

The rotating body 525 is mounted on the base body 524 via a motor 526. Specifically, the motor 526 is fixed to the base body 524, and the rotating body 525 is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 526. The output shaft of the motor 526 extends in the juxtaposed direction (horizontal direction) of the drum unit 523, and the rotating body 525 rotates around the axis of the output shaft (rotation center axis CL). The motor 526 is connected to the notification/production control device 140, and the drive control is performed by the notification/production control device 140. The motor 526 is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotating body 525 can be adjusted by the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

A position detection sensor 527 that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 525 is mounted on the base body 524. The position detection sensor 527 is connected to the notification/production control device 140, and the notification/production control device 140 grasps the rotational position of the rotating body 525 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 527. When the rotational position of the rotating body 525 is deviated due to the influence of external force or the occurrence of malfunction, the rotational position of the rotating body 525 is corrected (corrected) based on the grasped position information.

The rotating body 525 is composed of a circular frame 531 that constitutes the skeleton of the rotating body 525, and a light guide portion 532 that covers the outer peripheral portion of the frame 531 and has a substantially cylindrical shape and a constant thickness. As shown in FIG. 12, the frame 531 includes a hub 535 as a central portion to which the output shaft of the motor 526 is fixed, an annular rim 536 as the outer peripheral portion to which the light guide portion 532 is fixed, a hub 535, and It is composed of spokes 537 connecting the rims 536.

Specifically, the rim 536 has a pair of left and right annular portions 541 centering on the rotation center axis line CL, and an elongated connecting portion 542 that connects the annular portion 541. The light guide portion 532 is fixed to the connecting portion 542 by using a fixing unit in a state of being overlapped with the connecting portion 542 from the outside of the frame 531. The frame 531 shown in this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent adhesive is used as the fixing means. This is a device for making the frame 531 and a fixed portion (fixing means) to the frame 531 less noticeable when the light guide section 532 is viewed.

As shown in FIG. 13, a background display device 529 is arranged inside the light guide section 532. The background display device 529 includes a decoration sheet 581 provided with a design imitating a seaside, a backlight 582 located behind the decoration sheet 581 for irradiating the decoration sheet 581 with light, and the decoration sheet 581 and the backlight 582. The holder 583 is mounted and the holder 583 is integrated with the base body 524 by being fixed to the base body 524. The decorative sheet 581 is arranged such that the sheet surface with the pattern is directed to the front of the gaming machine (the central opening 85 side), and the inner surface portion 552 of the light guide portion 532 is separated from the inside of the frame 531 by a gap. Facing each other. Thus, the background drawn on the decorative sheet 581 can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine through the light guide portion 532. Note that the decoration sheet 581 is light-transmitting but colored and opaque, and is configured so that the backlight 582 and the like located on the back side through the decoration sheet 581 cannot be viewed.

The backlight 582 is connected to the notification/production control device 140, and is switched on/off by the notification/production control device 140. When the backlight 582 is turned on, the light from the backlight 582 passes through the decoration sheet 581 and the decoration sheet 581 emits bright light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a configuration relating to light emission of the light guide section 532 will be described. The rim 536 of the frame 531 is formed with a contact portion 543 that contacts the light guide portion 532 from the side opposite to the base body 524 side. The abutting portion 543 defines the lateral position of the light guide portion 532. An end portion of the light guide portion 532 opposite to the contact portion 543 (on the side of the base body 524) extends laterally from the rim 536. The base body 524 is formed with an insertion portion 561 into which the extended portion (end portion) is inserted.

The insertion portion 561 has a groove shape opened to the light guide portion 532 side, and an end portion of the light guide portion 532 is inserted into the insertion portion 561 through the open portion (hereinafter, referred to as a first open portion 564). There is. A light emitting substrate 571 on which a plurality of light emitting bodies 572 (specifically, LEDs) are mounted is arranged on the side opposite to the light guide portion 532 with the bottom portion 562 of the insertion portion 561 interposed therebetween. The light emitting board 571 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the notification/effect control device 140 controls the light emission of the light emitting board 571.

A plurality of through holes 563 are formed in the bottom portion 562 of the insertion portion 561 in accordance with each light emitting body 572, and the light emitting body 572 mounted on the light emitting substrate 571 is connected to the end surface 554 of the light guide portion 532 through the through hole 563. They are facing each other. The optical axis of each light emitting body 572 is oriented in the same direction as the rotation center axis line CL of the rotating body 525, and the light from these light emitting bodies 572 is applied to the end surface 554 of the light guide portion 532. The base body 524 (including the insertion portion 561) is made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, and has a function of absorbing light. Thereby, light leakage from the insertion portion 561 is suppressed. In the present embodiment, the end surface 554 of the light guide 532 is located on a virtual plane orthogonal to the rotation center axis line CL, and the distance between the light emitting body 572 and the end surface 554 is any rotation position. It is configured to be constant even in.

As shown in the schematic view of FIG. 15, the light from the light emitting body 572 is repeatedly reflected by the outer surface portion 551 and the inner surface portion 552 of the light guide portion 532, and goes to the opposite end surface of the light guide portion 532. Here, on the outer surface portion 551 of the light guide portion 532, a light emitting portion 553 having fine irregularities is formed. The light supplied to the light guide section 532 reaches the light emitting section 553 and is emitted to the front of the game machine. The light emitting portion 553 corresponds to various symbols to be described later, and the light emitting portion 553 emits light so that the symbols are displayed on the outer surface portion 551 of the light guide portion 532. In other words, when the light emitting unit 553 does not emit light, the design is hidden. Since the light emitting portion 553 is formed by minute unevenness, environmental light such as the illumination of the game hall moves into the light guide portion 532, which makes it substantially invisible or extremely difficult under normal circumstances. A certain light emitting portion 553 may be visible. Although details will be described later, the variable display unit 500 shown in the present embodiment is devised to suppress the occurrence of such an inconvenience.

In the rotating body 525 shown in this embodiment, a light guide portion 532 having a substantially cylindrical shape as a whole is constructed by combining a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 provided separately in the rotation direction. Hereinafter, a specific configuration of the light guide unit 532 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 16.

The light guide panels 555 to 557 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and each has a plate shape with a constant thickness and a constant curvature. Further, the length dimension of the rotating body 525 in the rotation direction and the width dimension in the rotation center axis line CL direction are also the same, and the appearance is the same except for the light emitting portion 553 (displayed pattern). Is formed. The light guide panels 555 to 557 are fixed to the rim 536 (specifically, the connecting portion 542) of the frame 531 using the transparent adhesive which is the fixing means, but the light guide panels 555 to 557 are mutually fixed. It is not fixed.

As described above, in the configuration in which one end of the light guide section 532 is inserted into the insertion section 561, in order to improve the light supply efficiency and the like, the inner surface of the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 are arranged as much as possible. It is preferable to make them close to each other. However, in such a structure, it is necessary to add a certain amount of allowance to the gap between the light guide panels 555 to 557 in consideration of distortions caused by manufacturing errors and changes over time. Here, in the present embodiment, the light guide panels 555 to 557 are not fixed to each other, so that it is possible to avoid distortion that may occur when the light guide panels 555 to 557 are fixed. This makes it possible to minimize the above margin.

When the rotating body 525 is constructed using the light guide section 532, while the expressive power of the variable display unit 500 can be improved, the weight of the rotating body 525 tends to increase. It is feared that this may cause a decrease in responsiveness when rotating/stopping the rotating body 525. In this respect, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16B, the light guide panels 555 to 557 are prevented from overlapping in the thickness direction. This suppresses an increase in weight of the light guide section 532 and suppresses a decrease in responsiveness.

In the boundary portion BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557, the adjacent light guide panels 555 to 557 are opposed to each other with a gap. This is a device for avoiding strong interference between the light guide panels 555 to 557 at the boundary portion BP1 when the sizes of the light guide panels 555 to 557 vary due to manufacturing errors or the like. By avoiding the strong interference of the light guide panels 555 to 557, it is possible to prevent the light guide panels 555 to 557 from being deformed such as the above-described distortion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the boundary portion BP1 is displaced in the rotational direction with respect to the connecting portion 542 of the frame 531, and the light guide panels 555 to 557 have both ends in the rotational direction. It is not fixed (free end). This is a device to separate the fixed portion by the adhesive from the boundary portion BP1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a supplementary description of the insertion portion 561 will be given. The insertion portion 561 extends along a portion of the light guide portion 532 that extends from the opening 522 toward the front of the gaming machine. The open portions on the upper and lower sides of the insertion portion 561 (hereinafter referred to as the second open portions 565) are expanded so that the width gradually increases toward the ends. This suppresses catching when the boundary portion BP1 passes through the second opening portion 565.

When the second opening 565 is expanded, light leakage from the sidelight 528 is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both of the second opening portions 565 are formed so as to face rearward, and more specifically, they are formed so as to face obliquely rearward and rearward. This is a device for making it difficult for the player to see the light when the light leaks from the second opening 565.

It is also possible to form the bottom portion 562 of the insertion portion 561 so that the distance from the light guide portion 532 increases toward the upper and lower ends of the insertion portion 561. With such a configuration, it is possible to more favorably prevent the boundary portion BP1 from being caught when the boundary portion BP1 passes through the insertion portion 561.
(Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 602 is mounted on the main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. The RAM 604 is an element including an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 or the function of the RAM 604 may be provided as another element.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 602, the power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control device 162, the payout control device 242, various detection sensors 611a to 611e, etc. are connected. In this case, the power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 611a to 611e, various winning-corresponding ball portions such as a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening unit 83 (upper operating opening 83a, lower operating opening 83b), and a through gate 84. The detection sensors provided in the (payout correspondence ball entry section) are connected to each other, and the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 determines the winning of each ball entry section based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors. Ball entry determination) is performed. In addition, the MPU 602 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery based on the winning of the upper operating opening 83a and the lower operating opening 83b, and also executes the support generating lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 242, and a notification/effect control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. To the payout control device 242, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the prize determination on the prize-corresponding prize winning portion such as the above-described operation ports 83a and 83b. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to. Then, when the winning of the general winning opening 81 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is output, and when the winning of the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 gaming balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning to the upper working opening 83a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and the winning to the lower working opening 83b is performed. If specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command (also called a fluctuation command), a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140. When outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 602, a variable prize winning drive unit 82c that opens and closes the opening/closing door of the variable winning device 82, an electric auditors product driving unit 91c that opens and closes the electric auditors product 91 of the lower working opening 83b, and a main display unit. 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 82c is executed in the MPU 602 so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. When the support lottery of the electric accessory 91 is won, the MPU 602 controls the driving of the electric accessory driving unit 91c so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 602.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602, and through this external output terminal board 213, information about entering balls into various ball entering sections is given to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. Information about lottery results such as jackpots and jackpots is output. This allows the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control apparatus 243, and the power failure/monitoring board 605 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control apparatus 243. The function to monitor is added. The payout control device 242 controls the payout device 224 to pay out prize balls or loan balls based on a prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power necessary for each of the main control board 601 and the payout control device 242 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply/launch control device 243 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The notification/production control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the display lamps 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the speaker 29, and the variable display provided on the game board unit 80. It controls the unit 500. In particular, in the notification/effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, an effect mode in each game time, for example, an outline of a variable display mode of the symbols in the variable display unit 500 (for example, whether or not reach is generated and It has a function of determining the content of the reach effect) and the stop display mode of the symbol (the kind of the combination of symbols finally displayed for stop (confirmed display) at the end of the variable display).

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 87, setting of symbol display of the variable display unit 500, etc. Specifically, the schematic diagram of FIG. As shown in, the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the regular jackpot result, and the variable display unit 500 deviate and fluctuate When the reach random number is selected, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable display time in the main display unit 87 and the variable display unit 500 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b is in the electric opening state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 631, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as acquisition information storage means when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. Stored in the reserved ball storage area 632.

The holding ball storage area 632 includes a holding area RE including an upper working opening holding area Ra and a lower working opening holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb include first areas Ra1 and Rb1, second areas Ra2 and Rb2, third areas Ra3 and Rb3, and fourth areas Ra4 and Rb4, and are connected to the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 according to the winning history, are used as pending information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4. Stored in. The pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 to the fourth areas Ra4 and Rb4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b are consecutively generated a plurality of times, the first areas Ra1, Rb1 → Numerical information is sequentially stored in the order of 2 areas Ra2, Rb2→third area Ra3, Rb3→fourth area Ra4, Rb4. In this way, the four areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4 are respectively provided, so that the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b can be stored up to four, respectively. Is becoming Further, a total reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 632, and the total reserved number storage area specifies the number in which the winning history for the upper operation opening 83a or the lower operation opening 83b is reserved and stored. The information for doing is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 87, and at the start of one game time. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, the judgment of win/fail is made.

Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 299) and then returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b.

The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area 621 as the win/win information group storage unit in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the win/loss table will be described.

Address information including binary number information and jackpot numerical value information also including binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence in the hit/miss table. Specifically, the address information is represented by a decimal number and 10 types of "1" to "10" are set, and the jackpot numerical value information is represented by a decimal number "7", "36", "67". , “100”, “131”, “164”, “195”, “223”, “241”, “272” are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical value information are one-to-one. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in “0” to “299” which is the numerical value range of the random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low-probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high-probability mode are different, and the former is a smaller number than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical value information whose address information is “1” is referred to in the win/win lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical value information corresponding to all the address information is used in the win/win lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information that is a big hit, and in the high-probability mode, there are ten pieces of numerical information, which is more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability mode is 1/30. The chances of winning will increase. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, (1) a win/loss lottery mode in the win/loss lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 91 of the lower working opening 83b after the end of the open/close execution mode are used. Different types of jackpot results are set by setting different conditions. As the winning/winning lottery mode, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as described above.

As a support mode, the frequency at which the electric accessory 91 of the lower working opening 83b is opened per unit time when compared in a situation in which the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area PE. The low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 91 is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric power open state is won, and in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected as the securing time that is ensured in performing the next electric auditors' item open lottery after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode. It is set to be done.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the lower working opening 83b is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working opening 83a is higher than in the lower working opening 83b, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working opening 83b is more likely to win than the upper working opening 83a. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is given to the lower working opening 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of being in the electric power open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a secured time that is secured when one electric lottery opening lottery is performed and the next electric ones open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through-gate 84, In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening one variation display time in the accessory result display unit), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or a condition of any combination is applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set.

The normal jackpot result is high frequency support until the win/loss lottery mode becomes a low probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode is changed. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference number of times has elapsed, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted accordingly.

In the distribution table, “0 to 19” corresponds to the normal jackpot result and “20 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary. Further, the jackpot result allocation destination is not limited to the above two types, and for example, in the opening/closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball becomes high and low, and the opening/closing execution is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the types of jackpot results are increased from the above two types by providing a difference in the mode of the mode transition destination.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. More specifically, the game balls are stored in the reserve area RE of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. Then, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in the game game that shifts to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be individually set according to the game state. For example, in the case where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a variable display unit 500 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a pattern (design), and stops after the variable display in the game times in the opening/closing execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the display result is the special display result, the special display result is obtained before the variable display unit (variable display) of the variable display unit 500 is started and the stop display result is derived and displayed. It is a display state for making the player think that the display is a variable display state that is likely to be

In other words, by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol columns displayed on the variable display unit 500, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode may be established. It is a display state in which a certain combination of reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns.

More specifically, as a pre-stage to end the variable display of the symbols, a reach symbol combination that may form a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on the preset effective line. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying, and the variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, a configuration relating to variable display of symbols at each game time and an outline of the variable display will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of display on the variable display unit 500. In the following description, the left drum has a suffix "L" for the configuration, the middle drum has a suffix "M" for the configuration, and the right drum has a suffix "M". "" is added to the end of the identification code to properly distinguish.

In the variable display unit 500, three symbol columns of left, middle and right are set, and a left variable display area DL, a medium variable display area DM and a right variable display area DR are provided corresponding to each of these symbol rows. Has been. In the variable display unit 500, the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity. In each of the variable display areas DL, DM, and DR, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 3×3 nine symbols are stopped and displayed. ing.

As shown in (a) to (j) of FIG. 21, as the above-mentioned symbols, there are nine kinds of main symbols which are numbers “1” to “9” and sub-patterns which are pictorial symbols simulating shells. Has been done. The main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is equivalent to the "high probability symbol", and when the high probability symbols are aligned, a special gaming state, a jackpot state, is entered, and then, Transition to a high probability state. In addition, the even number (2,4,6,8) is attached to the main symbol corresponds to the "low probability symbol", the low probability symbol is aligned to move to the jackpot state, but in such a case high probability It does not shift to the state of time.

As shown in FIG. 22 (schematic diagram showing the light guide portion 532 of each drum in plan view), in the left symbol row and the middle symbol row, nine main symbols are arranged in descending order with the sub symbol sandwiched therebetween. .. On the other hand, in the right symbol row, nine main symbols are arranged in ascending order with the sub symbol sandwiched therebetween. Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the light emitting portion 553 provided in the light guide portion 532 emits light for convenience of description.

Returning to the description of FIG. 20, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a leftward rising line L4, and a rightward rising line L5 are set in the variable display unit 500. Then, in each game, the variable display of the symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol column → the right symbol column → the middle symbol column, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, the same number is attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5). When the variable display of all the symbol rows is completed in the state where the (combination of the symbols that have been formed) is formed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

When the reach display described above is performed, first, the variable display of the symbol is ended in the left variable display area DL, and the variable display of the symbol is further ended in the right variable display area DR. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the symbol with the same number attached to at least one of the symbols, and the variable display of the symbol is performed in the middle variable display area DM under the situation where the reach line is formed. That is the reach display. Then, when the open/close execution mode occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, the variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), returns to 0. The fluctuation type counter CS is used in determining the fluctuation display time in the main display unit 87 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the variable display unit 500 in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the variable display unit 500 at the start of fluctuation of the symbol.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and reach 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 in the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU 602, the variable display time in the variable display unit 500 is determined using at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is used in the determination. Be done. Further, in the MPU 602, the stop result in the main display unit 87 is determined using the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result table stored in the result table storage area 624 is referred to.

Here, the symbol display in the variable display unit 500 will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As described above, the rotating body 525 shown in this embodiment has the light guide portion 532, and the light is supplied from the side light 528 to the light guide portion 532, whereby the design is displayed. The light guide portion 532 is transparent, and the background display device 529 can be viewed through the light guide portion 532. Therefore, when the variable display unit 500 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, it looks as if the design is floating in front of the background. Particularly in the present embodiment, the background display device and the outer surface portion 551 which is the display surface of the light guide portion 532 are separated from each other, and the separation between the design and the background is coordinated.

Next, with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 24, the relationship between the light emitting body 572 forming the sidelight 528 and the symbol display position will be described. In the present embodiment, the light emitters 572 are arranged in a line along the end of the light guide 532 (see FIG. 17). Regarding these light emitters 572, among the light emitting units 553 formed in the light guide unit 532, the light emitter 572a for the upper stage that supplies light to the light emitting unit 553 located on the effective line L1 (upper stage), and the effective line A light emitter 572b for the middle stage that supplies light to the light emitter located at L2 (middle stage), a light emitter 572c for the lower stage that supplies light to the light emitter located at effective line L3 (lower stage), and an upper stage Upper limit light emitter 572d in the central opening 85 disposed above the light emitter 572a, and intermediate light emitter 572e disposed between the upper light emitter 572a and the middle light emitter 572b. , An intermediate light emitter 572f arranged between the middle light emitter 572b and the lower light emitter 572c, and a lower limit of the central opening 85 arranged below the lower light emitter 572c. It is roughly divided into a light emitting body 572g.

When the light emitter 572a for the upper stage is turned on, light is emitted from the light emitting portion 553 located in the upper stage, and the symbol is displayed (displayed) on the upper stage. When the light emitter 572b for the middle stage is turned on, light is emitted from the light emitting portion 553 located in the middle stage, and the symbol is raised (displayed) in the middle stage. When the light emitter 572c for the lower stage is turned on, light is emitted from the light emitting portion 553 located in the lower stage, and the design is highlighted on the lower stage.

In the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating body 525 may cause the light emitting portion 553 to move across the light supply range for the upper stage and the light supply range for the middle stage. These light supply ranges are continuous through the light supply range by the intermediate light emitting body 572e. The supply of light from the intermediate light emitting body 572e prevents the pattern from becoming difficult to see when moving from the upper stage to the middle stage. Further, the rotation of the rotating body 525 may cause the light emitting portion 553 to move across the light supply range for the middle stage and the light supply range for the lower stage. These light supply ranges are connected through the light supply range of the intermediate light emitting body 572f. The supply of light from the intermediate light-emitting body 572f prevents the pattern from becoming difficult to see when moving from the middle stage to the lower stage.

When the light emitting portion 553 moves from the outside of the central opening 85 onto the effective line L1, the light emitting portion 553 passes through the supply range of the light from the upper limit light emitting body 572d, so that the light emitting portion 553 moves to the effective line L1. The display of the symbols will be started before the arrival. Further, when the light emitting portion 553 moves from above the effective line L3 to the outside of the central opening 85, the light emitting portion 553 passes through the supply range of the light from the lower limit light emitting body 572g, so that the light emitting portion 553 moves from the effective line L3. The display of the design is continued even after the removal.

(Regarding various processes executed by main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed by the MPU 602 in the main controller 162 to advance the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 602 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is activated by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 are read, the states of the winning detection sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In a succeeding step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when they reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 604.

In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning in the through gate 84 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the same flag is stored, it is stored in the electric power holding area. On condition that the number of stored accessory holdings is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area. In addition, the notification/effect control device 140 executes a process for turning on the holding lamp unit 98 corresponding to the number of holding memories. Then, when the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is erased and the through gate winning process is ended.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port associated with the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and the timer interrupt process is ended. To do.

(Prize processing for working ports)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 and 27.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winning) the upper working opening 83a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper working opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and the payout control device 242 sets a prize ball command for paying out three game balls.

In a succeeding step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the upper working opening 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the fact that the ball has entered the upper working opening 83a is recognized by the hall computer HC. After that, in step S204, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the like is performed, and the main winning process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (lowered) the lower working opening 83b. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower working opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S206, and the payout control device 242 sets a prize ball command for paying out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in an external output process (step S701) of a normal process described later.

In a succeeding step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower working opening 83b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the fact that the ball has entered the lower working opening 83b is recognized by the hall computer HC. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S204, and the main winning process is ended.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in each of the processes of steps S201 and S205, that is, when there is no ball in either the upper operation opening 83a or the lower operation opening 83b, the main winning process is ended.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition processing, first, in step S301, the number N of starting reserved balls stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, more specifically, the information acquisition processing of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b is performed. It is determined whether or not the number N of start-up holding balls related to the ball-entering portion that has become the trigger is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number N of start-up pending storages is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is ended as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the number N of start-up pending storages of the corresponding ball entry portion is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as the common number of reservations CRN) stored in the number-of-reservations storage area FE in step S303 is incremented by one.

In the following step S304, the respective values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are set to the first storage area in the free storage area area of the holding area RE. That is, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In a succeeding step S305, a setting process of a hold command is executed so that the notification/production control device 140, which is the sub-side (sub-side) control device, recognizes that the winning of the winning opening 83a, 83b has occurred, and the present information is executed. The acquisition process ends. The hold command set in the hold command setting process of step S305 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in an external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process started when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, when various commands such as effect commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, a hold command, and a shift command to be described later are set, they are sent to the notification/effect control device 140. To do.

Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In a succeeding step S403, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game time control processing, jackpot determination, variable display of symbols by the variable display unit 500, display control of the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game number control process of step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. By this game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like.

In a succeeding step S405, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 91 provided in the operation port unit 83 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release of whether or not the electric role 91 is opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 633 of the RAM 604. The lottery is performed, and when the electric power open state wins, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 91 is executed. Further, the display control of the above-mentioned display for through gate is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric power combination opening lottery.

As described above, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 91, and a transition to any one of the support modes is performed in the game state transition processing. Through this process, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set to be larger when the electric role is released, than in the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, when the power combination open state is elected and the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs a plurality of times, one open state ends and the next open state starts. The closing time up to is set to be shorter than the opening time for one time.

Incidentally, when the open/close execution mode is entered, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply/launch control device 243. To do. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604. In step S409, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604.

The execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and in the same manner. The fluctuation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game time control processing)
Next, the game number control process of step S501 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S501, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. When in the open/close execution mode, the process of step S502 and thereafter, that is, the process of starting the game time of steps S503 to S505 and the process of advancing game times of steps S506 to S508 are not executed, and this game time is executed. The control process ends.

If it is not in the open/close execution mode, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the operating port display unit of the main display unit 87 is being variably displayed. If the operating port display unit is not displaying the variation, the process proceeds to the game number starting process of steps S503 to S505. In the game game starting process, first in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of starting hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is “0”, it means that hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 632. Therefore, this game time control processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 632 for variable display is executed in step S504, Further, in step S505, the variation start process for starting the variable display on the main display unit 87 and the variable display on the variable display unit 500 is executed, and then the present game number control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process of step S504 and the fluctuation start process of step S505 will be described in detail.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, of the number N of starting hold balls stored in the number-of-holdings storage area FE, which is the target of the current setting process and the common number of reserves CRN are decremented by 1. Then, when the target of the setting process this time is based on the ball entering the upper working opening 83a, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1 and also to the second area Ra2→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3→the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4→the third area Ra3.

When the target of the setting process this time is based on the ball entering the lower operation opening 83b, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1 and also to the second area Rb2→ The data in each area is shifted such that the first area Rb1, the third area Rb3→the second area Rb2, the fourth area Rb4→the third area Rb3.

Then, a shift command, which is information for causing the notification/effect control device 140 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted, is set. After that, this data setting process ends. The set shift command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 recognizes that the shift of the hold information has occurred by receiving the shift command.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S601, a win/loss determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot win. Specifically, of the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. When the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the above-described information is converted into information corresponding to the jackpot win. If the win/loss lottery mode is a high probability mode, the win/loss table for high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the information obtained above is a big hit. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

In the following step S602, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process in step S601 corresponds to the jackpot win. If the result corresponds to the jackpot, a type determination process is executed in step S603.

In the type determination process, the information for type determination of the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the above-mentioned grasped type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the upper working opening 83a, the sorting table for the upper working opening 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to entering the lower working opening 83b. If so, the type determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the lower working port 83b.

In a succeeding step S604, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot winning this time is the probability varying jackpot result, based on the information identified in the type determining process in the step S603. If it is the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S606. If it is determined in step S602 that the jackpot is not a big hit, a stop result setting process for out-of-coupling is executed in step S607.

In each of the stop result setting processes of steps S605 to S607, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to for the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In addition, in step S605 and step S606, the MPU 602 stores in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 the information for specifying that the MPU 602 determines that the hit determination result of the game time this time is the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S605, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S606.

After executing any one of steps S605 to S607, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S608. In the setting process of the variable display time, first, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned win/win lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If the result of the win/no win lottery is a miss result, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated on the variable display unit 500W in the current game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, the reach display is generated. When the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is specified using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to.

If the jackpot result or the outlier result corresponds to the reach occurrence, the reach display variable display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referred to for this time. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area (fluctuation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Then, this setting process is completed.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win result or if the result of the win/win lottery is a miss result and the lottery for reach generation is won, the reach display is executed. ing.

Although the details will be described later, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display which are different in variable display mode. In the reach display variable display time table, the variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set by referring to the table. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, there is provided a table in which the type of reach display and the value of the variation type counter CS correspond to each other, and by referring to the table, the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

On the other hand, when it is not the jackpot result and the outlier result and the reach is not generated, the fluctuation display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 is referred to and the current fluctuation is referred. The variable display time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Then, this setting process is completed.

The variable display time information when the reach is not generated is set such that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of common hold numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of common pending numbers CRN may be used, and the smaller the number of common pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time may be set. .. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared with the case where the support frequency is the low-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of holding information is the same, a short variable display time is selected so that the reach Although the variable display time table for generation is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is out. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for the probability variable big hit, the variable display time table for the normal big hit, the variable display time table for the out-reach, and the variable display time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

As described above, the variable display time of each game time is determined using the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the type of the reach display, the number of hold information, the value of the variation type counter, etc. as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time, the parameter of the content of other holding information, specifically, the information for jackpot determination, the information for type determination and the information for reach determination included in the other holding information. It is decided without doing.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process, after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S608, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set in step S609. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, deviation result information, and the like as game result information.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S609 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game time based on the received variation start command and type command, and the determined effect The display lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that the contents are executed. In addition, the notification/effect control device 140 determines a variation display pattern on the variable display unit 500 in the game time based on the received variation start command and type command, and the determined variation display pattern is executed. Then, the variable display unit 500 is controlled. After that, in step S610, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display portion of the main display unit 87, and then the variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control process (FIG. 29 ), when the main display unit 87 is being variably displayed, the game time progression process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game time progression process, first in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 has become “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process as described above. Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented (decreased) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 87 is changed. Then, this game time control processing is ended.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S508. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any of the processes of steps S505 to S507 is specified, and the main display unit 87 is stopped so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed. Control 87.

In a succeeding step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. Then, this game time control processing is ended. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). In the notification/production control device 140, by receiving the variation end command, the final stop symbol combination in the game time is fixedly displayed (final stop display).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols in the variable display unit 500 is specified by the notification/effect control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specification result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the notification/effect control device 140. Specifically, in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140, the variable display control process is executed as a part of the regular process started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variable display control process causes the variable display of the symbol. The outline of the aspect and the like are specified. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the game is being performed, that is, whether or not the variable display unit 500 is performing variable display of symbols for one game. When it is determined that the game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 is received. When a negative determination is made in step S702, the present variable display control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S702, then the fluctuation start control processing is terminated after execution of fluctuation start processing in step S703.

Returning to the description of step S701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether the fluctuation end command transmitted from main controller 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the changing display process is ended after the changing process is executed in step S705. The changing process is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game time started by the changing start process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706, and after the fluctuation ending process is executed in step S706, the fluctuation display control process is ended. In the fluctuation ending process, the variable display of the symbols and the effect being executed are ended so as to correspond to the lottery result related to the game time (determined stop). Specifically, the variable display unit 500 controls to stop the symbol. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are drive-controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. After that, the process for ending the fluctuation ends.

(Process for fluctuation start)
Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 32, the variation start process of step S703 will be supplementarily described. The variation start process is a process for starting the game game effect based on the receipt of the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the variation start process, a variation display mode such as reach display or a symbol combination to be confirmed and displayed is determined as an effect for game play.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S801, the fluctuation start command received this time is read out, and the information regarding the presence or absence of the reach occurrence and the fluctuation display time information are specified from the command. Further, as already described, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1201, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read out, and game result information such as probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or deviation result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S2101, from the specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot is won, information on a jackpot type if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not a reach is generated if the jackpot is not hit, and a variable display time. Information is grasped and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 652.

In a succeeding step S802, based on the information grasped in the step S801, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in a succeeding step S803, a jackpot effect setting process is executed.

In the effect setting process for the big hit, the stop result of the symbol for the big hit is determined (the stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, when the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5, Determined as a stop result. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is set as a stop result of this game time. decide.

The types of main symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 653 stores valid lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is the final stop line provided in the RAM 654. The address information is stored in the line address storage area. At this time, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processing is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 654.

In the big hit production setting process, the variable display mode of the big hit symbols is determined (variable display mode determination process (production pattern determination process) is performed). As described above, when the jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game in the type command The effect pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654 is executed. In the variable display mode determination process described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

When it is determined in step S802 that the result is not the big hit result, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether or not reach is generated in the current game. When a reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S805, and a reach setting effect setting process is executed. In the production setting process for reach generation, the outline of the production and the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since the former is the same as the processing in step S803, the description will be cited. Since this process corresponds to the out-reach, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach patterns is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of the out-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the symbol in the middle symbol row which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is placed before the reach line. Alternatively, the stop result on the effective line is determined so as to make a final stop at a stop position deviated later. Then, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is determined in step S804 that the reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, a combination of the outline of the normal removal effect and the symbol to be finally stopped is determined. Since this processing corresponds to complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

After performing the processing of any of step S803, step S805, and step S806, the process proceeds to step S807. In step S807, display control (variable display control) of the variable display unit 500 is performed to execute the effect in the current game. As a result, each drum unit 523 starts rotating. In addition, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in steps S803, S805, and S806, and the effect for game play is started.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35, a supplementary description will be given of the variable display mode of the symbols in the variable display unit 500. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the jackpot expectation degree, FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of normal reach that does not support special changes, which will be described later, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 33, the variable display modes of the symbols in the present embodiment are roughly classified into three types: complete detachment, normal reach, and super reach. For normal reach and super reach, the variable display mode of the symbols until the transition to the reach display is shared, and at least until the transition to the reach display, the variable display mode of the symbols until then becomes either normal reach or super reach. It is unclear whether to move.

When normal reach and super reach are compared, there is a difference in the scroll speed of the middle symbols after the reach display transition. Specifically, in the case of normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle symbol is set to be lower than that in the case of super reach. Compared with normal reach, super reach is more likely to result in a big hit and transition to a special game state. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who expects the transition to the special game state pays attention to the variable display of symbols in the expectation of transition to the super reach.

(Normal reach without special changes)
FIG. 34 illustrates the flow of normal reach corresponding to the disconnection result. As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the game time is started based on the ball entering the operation openings 83a and 83b, the variable display areas DL, DM, and DR are displayed in a variable manner. The scroll display is started so that the display areas DL, DM, DR are vertically cut from the upper side to the lower side.

After that, it is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column → the right symbol column, and in the example shown in FIG. 34(b), the "7" symbol stopped and displayed on the effective line L4 and the stopped symbol displayed on the effective line L5 Two reach lines are formed by the 6" pattern.

At a predetermined timing immediately after the reach line is formed, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the scroll speed of the middle symbol row becomes the first steady speed (low speed) and in accordance with this, the left symbol row and the right symbol row Other symbols that have not formed reach lines are hidden. Specifically, by turning off the light emitter 572bL for the middle stage of the left variation display area DL and the light emitter 572bR for the middle stage of the right variation display area DR, the sub-symbol displayed in the middle stage is hidden. ..

In the variable display unit 500 shown in this embodiment, the light guide portion 532 and the side light 528 are used together for the display of the symbol, and the supply of light from the side light 528 is stopped, so that the symbol is not displayed. Becomes With respect to the light emitting portion 553 formed in the light guide portion 532, it is not impossible to identify the pattern of the pattern if the eyes are carefully focused, but it is difficult to identify the pattern because other patterns and the like are emitting light in the periphery. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34(d)→FIG. 34(e), the scroll display of the middle symbol row is continued in the middle fluctuation display region DM, and finally the “4” symbol is displayed in the middle stage of the middle fluctuation display region DM. When is displayed in a stopped state, it is clearly shown to the player that the result is a disconnection result.

In the present embodiment, in a part of the game times related to normal reach and super reach, the middle symbol row is displayed again after being stopped, and the middle symbols may be replaced (hereinafter referred to as a special change). When such a special change occurs, the jackpot expectation is high in both normal reach and super reach. Here, the flow of the special change will be described with reference to FIG.

(Normal reach for special changes)
When the game time is started based on the ball entering the operation ports 83a, 83b, the variable display areas DL, DM, DR are displayed in a variable manner, specifically, the variable display areas DL, DM, DR are displayed from the upper side. Scrolling display that starts vertically is started. After that, the left symbol column → the right symbol column are stopped and displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 35(a), one reach line is formed by the "7" symbols that are stopped and displayed on the activated line L2.

At a predetermined timing immediately after the reach line is formed, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the scroll speed of the middle symbol row becomes the first steady speed (low speed) and in accordance with this, the left symbol row and the right symbol row Other symbols that have not formed reach lines are hidden. Specifically, the light emitter 572aL for the upper stage and the light emitter 572cL for the lower stage of the left variable display region DL, and the light emitter 572aR for the upper stage and the light emitter 572cR for the lower stage of the right variable display region DR are turned off. Then, the sub-symbols displayed in the upper and middle rows are hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35(c), the middle symbol row continues scrolling, and as shown in FIG. 35(d), symbols other than the "7" symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed on the activated line L2. At a timing when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the middle symbol row is once stopped and displayed, the middle symbol row is hidden as shown in FIG. 35(e). Specifically, by turning off all the light emitters 572 for the medium variation display area DM, the middle symbol row is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35(f), when the middle symbol row is re-displayed, the symbol located on the activated line L2 is replaced from the sub symbol to the "8" symbol, and the result of the game time is lost. Is clearly stated. After that, as the fixed display period elapses, the other symbols that have not been displayed are re-displayed, and a total of 3×3 9 symbols are displayed.

Here, the mid-fluctuation process in the variable display control process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 to 38.

(Processing during fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 36, in the during-variation process, it is determined in step S901 whether the sidelight 528 and the backlight 582 are turned on or off, and in step S902, a target whose light emission is forcibly restricted is determined. In step S903, the emission control of the sidelight 528 and the backlight 582 and the drive control of the motor 526 are performed based on the setting items in steps S901 and S902.

(Light emission/drive setting process)
As shown in FIG. 37, in the light emission/drive setting process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the special variation display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. This special variation display transition flag is a flag that is stored when the above-described special change of the symbol is made and is erased when the corresponding game time is finished. When a negative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the reach display shift flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. The reach display shift flag is a flag that is stored when the reach display is parallel to the reach display and is erased when the special change is made or when the corresponding game time is finished. If a negative decision is made in step S1002, the operation proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether it is time to stop and display the left symbol row in the left variable display area DL. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1003, the operation proceeds to step S1004, and processing for stopping the left drum (rotating body 525L) is executed. Specifically, a flag for stopping the output of the drive signal to the motor 526L for the left drum is set. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, stop control is performed so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variable display area DL based on this flag and the stop symbol determined at the time of start of variation. Become.

If a negative decision is made in step S1003, the operation proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, it is determined whether it is time to stop and display the right symbol row in the right variation display area DR. When a negative determination is made in step S1005, the main light emission/drive control process is ended as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1005, the operation proceeds to step S1006, and processing for stopping the right drum (rotating body 525R) is executed. Specifically, a flag for stopping the output of the drive signal to the motor 526R for the right drum is set. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, stop control is performed based on this flag and the stop symbol determined at the start of fluctuation so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display region DR. Become.

After executing the stopping process in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the reach display. When a negative determination is made in step S1007, the main light emission/drive setting process is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1007, the operation proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, a process for partially turning off the sidelight is executed. In the process for partially extinguishing the lights, for the sidelight 528L of the left drum and the sidelight 528R of the right drum, a part of the light emitting body 572 is extinguished in order to hide the symbols on which the reach line is not formed. Set the flag. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, light emission control is performed so as to turn off a part of the light emitters 572, based on this flag and the stop position (effective line) of the symbol determined at the time of start of fluctuation. ..

In a succeeding step S1009, processing for lighting the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is performed. Specifically, a flag for turning on the backlight 582 is set. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, the light emission control is performed based on this flag so as to turn on the backlight 582.

In the present embodiment, the background is lit and displayed along with the shift to the reach display, which suggests that a big hit may occur. Although details will be described later, by turning on the backlight 582, the light emitting portion 553 corresponding to the non-displayed pattern is made inconspicuous.

After that, in step S1010, the reach display shift flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and the main light emission/drive setting process ends.

Returning to the description of step S1002, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, that is, if the reach display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the special variation display. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the special change as shown in FIG. If a negative decision is made in step S1011, the operation proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to change the variable display speed (scroll speed) of the middle symbol row. When a negative determination is made in step S1012, the main light emission/drive setting process is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1021, the variable display speed changing process is executed in step S1013, and then the main light emission/drive setting process ends.

In the variable display speed changing process, a flag for changing the variable display speed of the middle symbol is set. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, the drive control of the motor 526 of the middle drum is performed based on this flag so that the variable display speed of the middle symbol row becomes a predetermined speed. Specifically, when the reach display this time is the normal reach, the rotation speed of the rotating body 525M is controlled so that the variable display speed of the middle symbol row becomes the first predetermined speed (low speed), and the reach is super reach. In this case, the rotation speed of the rotating body 525M is controlled so that the variable display speed becomes the second predetermined speed (high speed).

Returning to the description of step S1011, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1011, that is, if it is the transition timing to the special variation display, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, a process for temporarily stopping the middle drum (rotating body 525M) is executed. Specifically, a flag for temporarily stopping the middle drum is set. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, the output of the drive signal to the middle drum motor 526M is stopped based on this flag. As a result, the three symbols set at the start of variation are stopped and displayed in the medium variation display area DM. In addition, about the middle symbols which are temporarily stopped on the reach line at this time, the symbol combination on the reach line is set to be the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result.

Subsequently, in step S1015, the reach display shift flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 is erased, and in step S1016, the special variable display shift flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and then the main light emission. The drive setting process ends.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if a positive determination is made in step S1001, that is, if the special variable display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, the special variable display processing in step S1016. After executing, the main light emission/drive setting process ends. The special variation display process will be described below with reference to FIG. 38.

(Special variation display processing)
In the special variation display process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the special change, that is, the symbol replacement display. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1101, the operation proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, processing for turning off the sidelight for the middle drum is executed. Specifically, a flag for turning off the sidelight is set. In the light emission/drive control processing in step S903, processing for turning off the middle drum sidelight is performed based on this flag. As a result, the symbols forming the middle symbol row are hidden, and the symbols that have been temporarily displayed in the middle variation display area DM are hidden.

In a succeeding step S1103, processing for driving the medium drum is executed. Specifically, the flag for re-driving the middle drum is set. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, the middle drum is rotated based on this flag. That is, the middle drum rotates under the condition that the light from the sidelight 528M is not supplied. As for the middle drum, the light emitting portion 553 corresponding to the symbol (final stop symbol) forming the symbol combination (final stop symbol combination) corresponding to the game result of this time is positioned on the reach line. Rotate.

Regarding the rotation direction of the middle drum at the time of special change, (1) the number of times the boundary portion BP1 passes through the middle fluctuation display area DM is minimized, and (2) the rotation amount is minimized. It is regulated based on one condition. For example, when the middle drum is rotated in the forward direction, one boundary portion BP1 passes through the middle fluctuation display area DM, and when the middle drum is rotated in the opposite direction, the two boundary portions BP1 are middle. When passing through the variable display area DM, the positive direction is set as the rotation direction. Regarding each of these conditions (1) to (2), (1) is prioritized over (2), and the boundary part BP1 is set in the middle variation display area DM in a situation where the symbol is not displayed. The movement makes it difficult for the player to understand the fact that the middle drum is rotating.

Returning to the description of step S1101, when a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not it is the timing of ending the symbol replacement (special change). If a negative determination is made in step S1104, this special variation display processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1104, the operation proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a process for partially turning on the sidelight for the middle drum is executed. Specifically, the flag for partial lighting is set.

In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, the partial lighting process of the middle drum sidelight is executed based on this flag. Specifically, the supply of light is started to the upper, middle, and lower parts of the middle fluctuation display area DM located on the reach line, and the supply of light to the other parts is stopped. To do. For example, when the reach line formed this time crosses over the middle stage, the light emitting body 572b corresponding to the middle stage is turned on, and the other light emitting bodies 572a, 572c to 572g are kept off. As a result, the middle symbols are suddenly replaced and the impact on the display of the game result can be strengthened.

The flow of reach display will be supplementarily described below with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of reach display not corresponding to special change, and FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of reach display not supporting special change.

(Reach display that does not support special changes)
As shown in FIG. 39, at the timing of ta1 when the game time relating to the reach display not corresponding to the special change starts, all the side lights 528L, 528M, 528R of the respective drums are turned on, and the background display device 529 is backed up. The light 582 is off. In this state, a drive signal is output to each of the motors 526L, 526M, 526R, so that scroll display of the symbol row is started in each of the variable display areas DL, DM, DR.

The output of the drive signal to the motor 526L for the left drum is stopped at the timing ta2 after the start of fluctuation, and the left drum stops at the preset rotation position. As a result, the three preset symbols are stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display area DL. At the subsequent timing ta3, the output of the drive signal to the motor 526R for the right drum is stopped, and the right drum is stopped at the preset rotation position. As a result, the three preset symbols are stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display area DR.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, a reach line is formed by stopping the same symbol on a preset activated line, and the reach display is entered. At the timing of ta3, the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is turned on, and the shift to the reach display is emphasized. Further, at the timing of ta3, a part of the light emitting body 572L constituting the sidelight 528L is hidden so that the symbols which are not displayed in the left variable display area DL and which do not form the reach line are hidden. Turned off. In addition, a part of the light emitting body 572R that constitutes the sidelight 528R is turned off so that the symbols that do not form the reach line among the symbols stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display region DR are also hidden. Even in this situation, all of the light emitters 572M that form the sidelight 528M for the middle drum are maintained in the lighted state.

At the timing of ta4 after the shift to the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area DM, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is formed. As a result, the game result is clearly shown to the player. After that, at the timing ta5 when the symbol fixed display period has passed, all the light emitting bodies 572 forming the respective side lights 528 are turned on and the backlight 582 is turned off.

(Reach display for special changes)
As shown in FIG. 40, at the timing of tb1 when the game times related to the reach display corresponding to the special change start, all the side lights 528L, 528M, 528R of the respective drums are turned on, and the backlight of the background display device 529. The light 582 is off. In this state, a drive signal is output to each of the motors 526L, 526M, 526R, so that scroll display of the symbol row is started in each of the variable display areas DL, DM, DR.

The output of the drive signal to the motor 526L for the left drum is stopped at the timing of tb2 after the start of the fluctuation, and the left drum stops at the preset rotation position. As a result, the three preset symbols are stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display area DL. At the subsequent timing of tb3, the output of the drive signal to the right drum motor 526R is stopped, and the right drum is stopped at the preset rotation position. As a result, the three preset symbols are stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display area DR.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, a reach line is formed by stopping the same symbol on a preset activated line, and the reach display is entered. At the timing of tb3, the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is turned on, and the shift to the reach display is emphasized. Further, at the timing of tb3, a part of the light emitting body 572L that constitutes the side light 528L is hidden so that the symbols that do not form the reach line among the symbols stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display region DL are hidden. Turned off. In addition, a part of the light emitting body 572R that constitutes the sidelight 528R is turned off so that the symbols that do not form the reach line among the symbols stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display region DR are also hidden. Even in this situation, all of the light emitters 572M that form the sidelight 528M for the middle drum are maintained in the lighted state.

At the timing of tb4 after the shift to the reach display, the symbols are temporarily displayed in the middle variation display area DM, and a symbol combination corresponding to the result of deviation is formed. After the timing of tb4, the special change (special change display) is performed. Note that the series of flow up to the timing of tb4 is the same as the flow up to the timing of ta4 in the reach display not supporting the special change shown in FIG.

The sidelight 528M for the middle drum is configured at the timing of tb5 when a predetermined waiting period (a period slightly shorter than the fixed display period) has elapsed from the timing of tb4 at which the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is temporarily displayed. All of the light emitters 572M are turned off, and the symbols stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM are temporarily hidden. Regarding the replacement of the symbols due to the special change, the replacement may be repeated up to three times, but the example shown in FIG. 40 illustrates the case where this replacement occurs twice.

Immediately after the light emitter 572M disappears at the timing of tb5, a drive signal is output to the middle drum motor 526M, and the light emitting portion 553M located on the reach line is replaced. At the timing of tb6 after the replacement is completed, one of the light emitters 572M corresponding to the reach line is turned on, and the other lights are kept turned off. As a result, the middle pattern on the reach line can be made to appear as if it was suddenly replaced with another pattern.

The symbol combination displayed at the timing of tb6 also corresponds to the deviation result, and then the second special change is started. Specifically, at a timing of tb7 after a lapse of a predetermined waiting period (a period slightly shorter than the fixed display period) from the timing of tb6 at which the symbol combination is displayed, the light emitter constituting the sidelight 528M for the middle drum. All of 572M are turned off, and the symbols stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM are temporarily hidden.

Immediately after the light emitter 572M disappears at the timing of tb7, a drive signal is output to the middle drum motor 526M, and the light emitting portion 553M located on the reach line is replaced. At the timing of tb8 after the replacement is completed, one of the light emitters 572M corresponding to the reach line is turned on, and the other lights are kept turned off. As a result, the middle pattern on the reach line can be made to appear as if it was suddenly replaced with another pattern. Since the game times shown in FIG. 40 correspond to the deviation result, the symbol combination finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) also corresponds to the deviation result.

The backlight 582 is maintained in a lighting state during the special change described in detail above, and the light from the backlight 582 is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through each drum (light guide unit 532). This is a device for suppressing the appearance of the pattern of the light emitting portion 553 when the ambient light from the illumination of the game hall or the like moves into the light guide portion 532.

Each of the drums (specifically, the light guide portion 532) of the variable display unit 500 described in detail above is formed by combining a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 that are divided in the rotation direction, and the light guide panels 555 to 557 are provided. A boundary portion BP1 is generated at the boundary. Increasing the chances of these boundary parts BP1 being located in the variable display area hinders the appearance of the variable display unit 500 from being lowered, and the various display effects described above to improve the degree of attention to the game. I'm worried. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting portions 553 formed in the light guide portion 532, the position of the boundary portion BP1, and the variation display area are devised in order to suppress such an inconvenience. That is one of the features. The device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 22 and 41. Although the left drum is illustrated in FIG. 41, the relationship between the boundary portion BP1 and the variable display area is the same for the middle drum and the right drum. Note that FIG. 41 shows a state in which the light emitting portion 553 is emitting light for convenience of description.

As shown in FIG. 22, the light guide section 532 of each drum is provided with a plurality of light emitting sections 553 arranged in the rotating direction. These light emitting portions 553 correspond to the main symbol and the sub symbol, and the light supplied from the sidelight 528 is emitted from the light emitting portion 553 so that each of the main symbols “1” to “9” and “ A sub-pattern imitating "shell" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the size of the main symbol in the rotating direction is larger than the size of the sub symbol. After disposing the boundary portion BP1 between the main symbol and the sub symbol, a blank portion formed between the boundary region BP1 and the main symbol is formed between the boundary region BP1 and the sub symbol. It is biased toward the main design side so that it is smaller than the blank part.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, a boundary portion BP1 is provided between the “6” symbol (specifically, the light emitting part 553 for the “6” symbol) and the sub-pattern (specifically, the light emitting part 553 for the sub-pattern). ing. In the state where the "6" symbol is stopped at the upper stage in the variable display area, the boundary part BP1 is located above the upper limit position of the variable display area, that is, in the range invisible from the front of the gaming machine (FIG. 41(b). )reference). On the other hand, in the state where the "6" symbol is stopped immediately below the variable display area (outside the frame), the boundary part BP1 is below the lower limit position of the variable display area, that is, in the range invisible from the front of the gaming machine. It is located (see FIG. 41(c)).

In general, in order to facilitate manufacturing, etc., it is assumed that the boundary portion is set so that the distance from the light emitting portion for the sub-pattern and the distance from the light emitting portion for the main symbol are the same. It However, with such a configuration, it is feared that it is difficult to increase the chances of stopping the boundary portion at a position outside the variable display area. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even when the symbol closest to the boundary part is stopped at the upper or lower part of the variable display area, the boundary part BP1 is visible to the player. By reducing the opportunities, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience. As described above, the position of the boundary portion BP1 shown in the present embodiment has a clear technical significance of making the boundary portion BP1 inconspicuous.

In addition, one feature of the present embodiment is that the boundary portion BP1 is prevented from being conspicuous during the scroll display of symbols by rotating each drum. The device will be described below with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the light emission control process, and FIG. 42(b) is a schematic diagram showing the state of shifting of the regulation target.

As described with reference to FIG. 36, the change-in-progress processing executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 includes the above-described light emission/drive setting processing, light emission restriction processing, and light emission/drive control processing. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the light emission regulation process, first, the position of the boundary portion BP1 is specified in step S1201. Next, of the respective light emitting bodies 572 forming the sidelight 528, ones to be regulated in step S1202 are specified. Specifically, the luminous body located on the side of the boundary portion BP1 specified in step S1201 is specified. In the following step S1203, the light-emitting body specified in step S1202 is set as a light emission restriction target. In the light emission/drive control process, the process of turning off the target set in step S1203 is performed regardless of the contents set in the light emission/drive setting process.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), when the boundary portion BP1 moves along with the rotation of the symbol row, the light emitting body 572 located on the side of the boundary portion BP1 is switched to the off state so as to follow the movement. .. That is, the supply of light to the boundary portion BP1 is suppressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the boundary portion BP1 from being conspicuous such as emitting light.

According to the first embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the variable display unit 500, light is emitted from the side light 528 to be emitted from the light emitting portion 553 formed in the light guide portion 532 to display a symbol. The pattern can be switched to display/non-display by turning on/off the side light 528, and the color of the pattern can be changed by changing the emission color. In this way, constructing a variable display unit (corresponding to "pattern display means") by using the light guide section 532 and the sidelight 528 together makes it possible to diversify the display mode of the symbols and improve the degree of attention to the game. Is preferred.

The design becomes invisible or difficult to view (non-display) by changing from the supply state in which the light from the sidelight 528 is supplied to the non-supply state. In this way, by allowing the symbols to be displayed/hidden, the information provided to the player by the variable display unit 500 can be limited according to the game situation. In addition, it is possible to contribute to diversification of display modes when performing variable display of symbols.

With the configuration in which the light from the sidelight 528 is applied to the end surface 554 of the light guide portion 532, it is possible to prevent the light source from being noticeable when visually confirming the design.

When changing the symbol displayed in the variable display area, the rotating body 525 (light guide portion 532) rotates in the above-mentioned supply state to make the symbol appear to move in the direction of the operation. You can In this way, if the light guide unit 532 is moved instead of the light source, it is possible to preferably avoid that the pattern change mode is limited by the length of the wiring or the like. Further, since the position of the light source can be fixed, it is possible to replace the symbols displayed at the same position, and even when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the points to be noticed by the player are unified. be able to. This is a preferable configuration in order to prevent the symbol display from being overlooked and to reduce the fatigue of the player.

The operation direction of the light guide unit 532 is set to be a direction orthogonal to the light irradiation direction of the sidelight 528 (specifically, the light emitter 572). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the light emitting unit 572 and the light irradiation target (the end surface 554) in the light guide unit 532 according to the operation of the light guide unit 532. This is preferable in order to prevent insufficient supply of light to the light emitting portion 553 due to light emitted from the light emitting body 572 being diffused before being irradiated on the end surface 554.

The light emitting units 553 are provided side by side in the operation direction of the light guide unit 532, and the light emitting bodies 572 forming the sidelights 528 are also provided side by side in the operation direction of the light guide unit 532. The number of pictures displayed in the variable display area can be changed by individually controlling the light emission of the light emitting bodies 572. In this way, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of symbols displayed by using a plurality of light emitting bodies 572 that can be individually controlled in light emission, according to the game situation, etc., and thus the expression power in the variable display unit 500 can be increased. It can be dramatically improved.

When the light emitting portion 553 is formed by minute irregularities, environmental light such as illumination of a game hall is diffused at the light emitting portion, so that the position and shape of the light emitting portion 553 can be completely identified by visual inspection. It becomes difficult to make it impossible. That is, there is a possibility that the shape and position of the light emitting portion 553 can be grasped by carefully focusing. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment mode, when the backlight 582 irradiates light to the light guide portion 532, the light from the backlight 582 scatters ambient light and the like, and the shape of the light emission portion 553 is obtained. It may be difficult to grasp the position and position. This is preferable in order to strengthen the impact when the design suddenly appears by switching the supply state/non-supply state of the sidelight 528.

When operating the light guide section 532, it is undeniable that the light guide section 532 may be specified to be in operation by carefully focusing on the light emitting section 553. This is a factor that reduces the impact when the light guide 532 is operated and the symbols are suddenly changed while the sidelight 528 is not supplied. Therefore, when the symbols are replaced, as shown in the above embodiment, the light supply to the light guide portion 532 by the side light 528 is stopped and the light is emitted to the light guide portion 532 by the backlight 582. If the light guide section 532 is configured to operate under the existing conditions, the ambient light or the like can be diffused by the light from the backlight 582. This makes it difficult to understand that the light guide section 532 is in operation, and suppresses the occurrence of the inconvenience. In addition, since the light from the backlight 582 is applied to the entire variable display area, it is possible to suitably exert the effect of making it difficult to identify the shape of the light emitting portion 553, the operating state of the light guide body, and the like.

By rotating the light guide portion 532 having a substantially annular shape, the light supply location in the light guide portion 532 (end surface 554) is changed. As a result, the symbols are variably displayed on the light guide section 532. Since the light guide 532 has a substantially annular shape, it is possible to continue the variable display of symbols without reversing the rotation direction of the light guide 532. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guide section 532 from becoming excessively large in order to enhance the expressive power and the like by performing dynamic display using the light guide section 532. This is a preferable structure in order to improve the attention of the player.

The distance from the side light 528 to the end surface 554 of the light guide portion 532 is constant at any rotation position. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the position or direction of the sidelight 528 according to the change of the light supply location (for example, to secure an operation gap). Therefore, the structure related to the light supply in the variable display unit 500 can be simplified.

The sidelight 528 is configured such that the light emitting direction of the light emitting body 572 (LED) is the same as the rotation center axis line CL, and the light emitting direction and the arrangement direction of the light emitting units 553 (rotation direction). ) And will intersect. That is, when the plurality of light emitting portions 553 are used together, the light emitting portions 553 are prevented from being arranged in the light irradiation direction. Therefore, when switching the symbols to be displayed according to the rotation position, it is possible to suppress the light from being supplied to the symbols that are not the display target, and the symbols that should not be originally displayed radiate lightly. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of inconvenience.

In the configuration in which the light guide section 532 has a substantially annular shape, the insertion section 561 into which the portion (end section) of the light guide section 532 extending from the frame 531 (rim 536) is inserted is provided. The following effects can be expected by disposing the side light 528 in the portion 561. That is, even when the movement of the light guide section 532 becomes unstable, the positional deviation of the light guide section 532 can be suppressed at a position (insertion section) close to the light irradiation position. Thereby, the light supply function can be stably exhibited.

Further, since the insertion portion 561 is provided in the base body 524 holding the rotating body 525, the gap with the light guide portion 532 can be minimized. This is preferable for suppressing strong interference between the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 and suppressing light leakage from the insertion section 561.

In the configuration in which the light guide portion 532 is movable, if the light guide portion 532 and the insertion portion 561 contact each other and the light guide portion 532 is damaged, light leakage or the like is likely to occur at that portion. I'm worried. This becomes a factor that reduces the efficiency of light supply to the light emitting portion 553. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, a gap is formed between the insertion portion 561 and the outer surface portion 551 and the inner surface portion 552 of the light guide portion 532 to avoid contact between the insertion portion 561 and the light guide portion 532. By doing so, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The light guide section 532 described above can be contributed to facilitation of manufacture and reduction of manufacturing cost by dividing into a plurality of pieces (light guide panels 555 to 557) in the rotating direction. However, in such a configuration, if the boundary (edge) portion of each piece is caught in the open portion (entrance portion) of the insertion portion, it is assumed that the behavior of the light guide portion 532 is disturbed. Therefore, as described in the present embodiment, the gap is formed so as to increase toward the open portion and the catching between the edge and the insertion portion 561 is suppressed, whereby the occurrence of the inconvenience can be preferably suppressed. In the configuration in which the open portion (entrance portion) is expanded, light is likely to leak from this portion. Therefore, by directing the open portion toward the rear side of the gaming machine, even if light leaks, it can be made inconspicuous.

By configuring the light guide section 532 by the plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 arranged side by side in the rotation direction as shown in the above embodiment, the shape of the light guide section 532 can be made substantially annular. it can. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to facilitation of manufacturing the drum unit 523 and reduction of manufacturing cost, as compared with a case where one light guide plate is formed in an annular shape, for example. Here, when a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 arranged in parallel are mutually coupled, distortion due to manufacturing variations or the like may occur. In the configuration in which light is supplied to the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532, there is a concern that the pattern display function may not be performed well because the positional relationship between the sidelight 528 and the end surface 554 varies due to the influence of such distortion. .. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, by mounting the light guide panels 555 to 557 on the frame 531 in a state where they are not fixed to each other, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience. This is preferable in order to suppress the deterioration of the appearance when the variable display of the symbols is performed using the light guide section 532 and to improve the attention of the player.

When the plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 are combined to form one light guide section 532 as described above, the boundary portion BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557 is conspicuous, so that the light guide section 532 looks good. Is reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the attention of the player. Further, in the configuration in which the light guide portion 532 is fixed to the frame 531, the fixed portion of the light guide portion 532 to the frame 531 may differ in appearance from the non-fixed portion. Here, in the present embodiment, the ends of the light guide panels 555 to 557 on both sides in the rotation direction are free ends, and the fixed part is kept away from the boundary part BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557. There is. Thereby, when the player's field of view includes a fixed portion, the line of sight is prevented from being guided to the boundary portion BP1, and one light guide portion 532 is configured by combining a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated.

When the light guide section 532 is configured by the plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557, it is preferable to make the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557 as inconspicuous as possible. Here, the light emitting body 572 (LED) forming the sidelight 528 is configured to emit light in a predetermined direction, and the end surfaces on both sides in the rotation direction of the light guide panels 555 to 557 extend in the predetermined direction. With such a configuration, that is, a configuration in which the irradiation direction of light and the extending direction of the boundary portion BP1 coincide with each other, it is possible to suppress light emission from the boundary portion BP1. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance. Although the boundary portion BP1 is located in the non-arranged area (blank area) of the symbol, the boundary portion BP1 extends in the direction of the rotation center axis CL, so that the boundary portion BP1 is taken into consideration. It is possible to prevent the non-arranged region from becoming excessively large.

If the number of light guide panels (the number of divisions) is excessively increased, there are more opportunities to stop the boundary portion between the light guide panels in the variable display area (effective line). It is feared that this may cause a deterioration in the appearance of the variable display unit. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the division number is specified such that the number of symbols arranged on each light guide panel 555 to 557 is larger than the upper limit number of symbols that can be stopped in the variable display area. Then, it is possible to reduce the chance that the boundary portion BP1 stops in the variable display area. This can alleviate the harmful effects of using a plurality of light guide panels together.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, the side light 528 as the “light emitting portion” is arranged on the base body 524 that rotatably holds the rotating body 525 (drum), but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. It is also possible to mount the structure corresponding to the side light 528 on the rotating body 525. However, in the case of such a configuration, it is assumed that the weight of the drum is further increased and the responsiveness at the time of turning/stopping is deteriorated. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the side light 528 on the base body 524 as shown in the first embodiment to reduce the weight of the rotating body 525.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, by turning off a part of the light emitting body 572 (which serves as a light source of the light to the boundary portion BP1) in accordance with the rotation position of the boundary portion BP1, the boundary portion BP1 is moved to the boundary portion BP1. The light supply is regulated. A specific configuration for restricting the light supply to the boundary portion BP1 is arbitrary, and for example, a shielding means such as a sealing material that covers the boundary portion BP1 from the side may be provided.

However, considering that the end of the light guide portion 532 is inserted into the insertion portion 561, there is no possibility that the shielding means may contact the wall surface of the insertion portion 561 due to the influence of manufacturing variations or deterioration over time. Can not. If the gaming machine continues to operate under such a possibility of contact, the shielding means may be worn and the shielding function may deteriorate. As a measure against this, for example, by increasing the gap between the light guide portion 532 and the insertion portion 561, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such an inconvenience, but the increase in the gap functions to prevent light leakage from the insertion portion 561. It is not preferable for improving the light supply efficiency. In consideration of such a situation, as shown in the first embodiment, it is possible to suitably improve the durability of the gaming machine by restricting the light supply to the boundary portion BP1 by the light emission control. There is a technical significance of being able to do it.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the light guide panels 555 to 557 that form the light guide unit 532 are not coupled to each other, but the invention is not limited to this, and the light guide panels 555 to 557 are coupled to each other. Good. However, considering that deformation such as distortion may occur in the light guide panels 555 to 557 during or after manufacturing, the light guide panels 555 to 557 are not coupled to each other and such deformation or the like is allowed (boundary region BP1. It is preferable to have a structure in which the above is absorbed).

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment described above, the gap is provided at the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557, but the configuration in which the light guide panels 555 to 557 contact each other at the boundary portion BP1 is not denied.

<Modification 5>
Although the inner surface of the insertion portion 561 and the light guide portion 532 are not in contact with each other in the first embodiment, the invention is not limited to this. For example, a guide roller for guiding the light guide section 532 may be provided on the insertion section 561 side. However, with respect to the light guide section 532, the surface of the light guide section 532 may be scratched and the optical path may be changed to reduce the efficiency of supply to the light emitting section 553. In consideration of such a situation, it is preferable to dispose a protection member or the like at a portion of the light guide portion 532 that contacts the guide roller.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the rotating body 525 is attached to the base body 524 via the motor 526. However, in view of the fact that the rotating body 525 has the light guide portion 532, the weight increases. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rotating body 525 is rotatably held by 524 and the rotating body 525 is operated by the motor 526.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described first embodiment, the light guide section 532 is configured by the combination of the three light guide panels 555 to 557, but the number of light guide panels configured for the light guide section 532 is arbitrary. However, even in such a case, it is preferable that the number of light emitting portions (that is, the number of symbols) formed in one light guide panel is larger than the upper limit number of symbols that can be stopped in the variable display area. ..

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the light guide 532 is rotatably held, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices that the pattern that can be visually recognized from the central opening 85 can be changed by moving the light guide portion, and for example, the light guide portion may be slidably held.

<Modification 9>
Although the light guide 532 is formed in a cylindrical shape in the first embodiment, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the light guide portion 532 may be formed in a disk shape and the plate surface thereof may be arranged so as to face the front of the game machine. In this case, the direction of the rotation center axis of the rotating body may be changed to the front-back direction.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment described above, the backlight 582 is turned on when the reach display is entered, but the backlight 582 is turned on at least when a special change (special variation display) is executed. Is sufficient, it is optional whether or not the backlight 582 is turned on during the other period.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, when the special change (special change) is executed, the sidelight 528 is turned off after the operation of the rotating body 525 is stopped, and the re-operation of the rotating body 525 is completed. Although the sidelight 528 is turned on later, the specific configuration for operating the rotating body 525 by utilizing the turn-off period of the sidelight 528 is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, the sidelight 528 may be turned off during the operation of the rotating body 525, and then the sidelight 528 may be turned on after the operation of the rotating body 525 is completed. is there.

In addition, when a symbol is inserted or displayed by a special change, the rotation speed of the rotating body 525M of the middle drum is a relatively slow variation display mode (eg, normal reach) and a relatively fast variation display mode (eg, super reach). ) And are set, it is possible to change the light supply/stop timing according to the rotation speed. For example, when a symbol is temporarily stopped on the reach line, the margin for confirming the symbol is increased by lengthening the temporary stop period. However, if the suspension period is simply lengthened, the restriction on the number of re-variations at the time of special change may become stronger. Therefore, if the light supply is restarted immediately before the temporary stop, the margin for confirming the symbol can be increased. However, in such a configuration, the allowance margin substantially changes depending on the rotation speed of the rotating body. Therefore, when the rotation speed is relatively high, the start timing of light supply is set earlier than when the rotation speed is relatively slow, or the light supply range is set to a part of the upstream side of the reach line. It is good to

<Modification 12>
In the above-described first embodiment, the sidelight 528 as the “light emitting portion” is fixed and the light guide portion 532 as the “light guide” is movable, but this relationship can be reversed. Is. That is, it is possible to display the symbols in a variable manner by moving the light emitting unit with respect to the fixed light guide unit. Even in this case, it is preferable that the arrangement direction of the light emitting portions formed in the light guide portion and the moving direction of the light emitting portion are aligned.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the light guide section 532 is formed in a substantially annular shape, but it is sufficient if the symbol displayed in the variable display area can be changed by the operation in the 1 direction. The portion 532 is not limited to the annular shape (for example, it does not deny that a recess or the like is partially formed).

<Modification 14>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to make the symbols virtually indistinguishable, for example, by displaying the symbols in a variable manner at high speed. However, such movement hinders improvement in durability of the symbol display means. In particular, as shown in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the rotating body includes the light guide section, the weight is heavier than that in the case where the rotating body is provided with, for example, paper, and thus such an inconvenience may occur. It

Therefore, by stopping the supply of the light from the side light 528 during the rotation of the rotating body 525, it is possible to suddenly erase the symbol displayed on the light guide portion 532. With such a configuration in which the appearance is greatly changed (the distinguishability is changed) by controlling the light emission of the sidelight 528, it is possible to diversify the display mode and suitably suppress the deterioration of the durability due to the diversification of the display mode.

For example, a display mode that clearly shows the process of changing the symbol and a display mode that does not explicitly show the process of changing the symbol may be used together. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably diversify the manner of variable motion display of symbols.

<Modification 15>
In order to make it difficult to understand the movement of the light guide portion 532 when the symbol is changed specially, the operation of the light guide portion 532 may be started at the same time as the side light 528 is turned off, or the operation of the light guide portion 532 may be started after the side light 528 is turned off. The operation may be started. The sidelight 528 may be turned on after the operation of the light guide unit 532 is completed, or the sidelight 528 may be turned on at the same time as the operation of the light guide unit 532 is completed.

<Modification 16>
The stop display period (temporary stop period) of the middle symbol in the case of making a special change may or may not match the finalized display period (final stop period). For example, the temporary stop period may be changed depending on the number of times the patterns are replaced in the special change. Specifically, it is possible to provide a difference such that each suspension period becomes longer in the order of the replacement occurring three times, the replacement occurring twice, and the replacement occurring once. In this case, when the suspension period is short, it is preferable to secure a period in which the pattern can be visually recognized by advancing the timing of starting the supply of the spectrum. Specifically, the temporary stop period when the pattern is replaced once corresponds to the final stop period, and the temporary stop period when the pattern is replaced twice is shorter than the final stop period by 0.2 sec. When the temporary stop period in the case of three times is shorter than the final stop period by 0.4 seconds, the supply of light is restarted by the shortened period (the supply is restarted while the light guide unit 532 is operating). Configuration) is recommended.

<Modification 17>
A configuration in which light is supplied to the light emitting unit 553 only during a period when the light emitting unit 553 is located on the effective line, and when the light emitting unit 553 is out of the effective line, the light supply is stopped to perform frame-by-frame display of the pattern ( The second special change) may be made. In this case, when comparing the normal reach for low-speed fluctuation display and the super reach for high-speed fluctuation display, the latter may be less visible than the former, so in the latter case, from the effective line It is preferable that the visibility is ensured by supplying light even if it is slightly off. For example, the timing of stopping the light supply may be delayed as compared with the former, or the timing of restarting the light supply may be advanced as compared with the former.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, when the special change is performed, the light guide 532 is not stopped (the operation is continued) in the process, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light guide unit 532 may be temporarily stopped in the process of special modification.

<Modification 19>
In order to prevent the player from previously specifying the symbols to be replaced at the time of special change, increase the ratio of the former in the operation period of the light guide section 532 and the waiting period from the operation stop to the light supply restart. It is preferable to reduce the ratio of the latter.

<Modification 20>
Although the frame 531 is made of synthetic resin in the first embodiment, the invention is not limited to this. The frame 531 can be made of metal.

<Modification 21>
It is also possible to integrally mold the frame 531 and the light guide panels 555 to 557 shown in the first embodiment. With such a structure, a fixing means for fixing the frame and the light guide panel and a structure associated therewith (for example, a portion corresponding to the rim 536) are unnecessary. This is preferable for improving the appearance of the variable display unit.

It should be noted that each frame portion formed by dividing the frame 531 into three parts in the rotation direction corresponding to each light guide panel 555 to 557 is integrally molded with the corresponding light guide panel 555 to 557, and these three pieces are fixed by a fixing means or the like. It is also possible to construct a rotating body by fixing them to each other. With such a divided structure, it is possible to suppress difficulty in molding.

<Second Embodiment>
The variable display unit 500X shown in the present embodiment is the same as the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment with respect to the main configuration for variably displaying symbols, but is displayed by the background display device 529X. The configuration is different from the variable display unit 500 in that the background can be switched according to the game situation. The variable display unit 500X according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit 500X. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, although the code|symbol is diverted and "X" is added to the end of a code|symbol, what is not explained about a difference etc. is basically 1st. The configuration is the same as the various configurations shown in the embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 43, the background display device 529X according to the present embodiment has a basic configuration, although there are differences in size and the like, the drum unit 523 shown in the first embodiment, more specifically, the base body 524 and the rotation. It is the same as the body 525, the motor 526, the position detection sensor 527, and the sidelight 528. Specifically, the background display device 529X includes a plate-shaped base body 724X that constitutes an attachment portion to the housing 521, and a rotating body 725X held by the base body 724X.

The rotating body 725X is mounted on the base body 724X via the motor 726X. Specifically, the motor 726X is fixed to the base body 724X, and the rotating body 725X is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 726X. The output shaft of the motor 726X extends in the juxtaposed direction (left-right direction) of the drum unit 723X, and the rotating body 725X rotates around the axis of the output shaft. The rotation center axis line of the rotating body 725X shown in the present embodiment coincides with (is coaxial with) the rotation center axis line CL of the rotating body 525X. In this way, by aligning the rotation center axis lines, the operation gap of each of the rotating bodies 525X and 725X is reduced. In addition, in the following description, the rotation center axis line of the rotating body 725X is also referred to as a "rotation center axis line CL".

The motor 526 is connected to the notification/production control device 140, and the drive control is performed by the notification/production control device 140. The motor 726X is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotating body 725X can be adjusted by the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

The base body 724X is equipped with a position detection sensor that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 725X. The position detection sensor is connected to the notification/production control device 140, and the notification/production control device 140 grasps the rotational position of the rotating body 725X based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor. When the rotational position of the rotating body 725X is deviated due to the influence of external force or the occurrence of malfunction, the rotational position of the rotating body 725X is corrected (corrected) based on the grasped position information.

The rotating body 725X includes a circular frame 731X that constructs a skeleton of the rotating body 725X, a substantially cylindrical light guide portion 732X (light guide panels 755X to 757X) that covers an outer peripheral portion of the frame 731X, and a light guide portion 732X. It is composed of decorative sheets 781X to 783X attached to the outer surface. The frame 731X includes a hub 735X as a central portion to which the output shaft of the motor 726X is fixed, an annular rim 736X as the outer peripheral portion to which the light guide 732X is fixed, and spokes 737X connecting the hub 735X and the rim 736X. It is composed by.

Specifically, the rim 736X has a pair of left and right annular portions centering on the rotation center axis line CL and an elongated connecting portion that connects the annular portions. The light guide portion 732X is fixed to the connecting portion using a fixing means (adhesive) while being overlapped with the connecting portion from the outside of the frame 731X.

The rim 736X of the frame 731X is formed with a contact portion 743X that contacts the light guide portion 532 from the side opposite to the base body 524 side. The left and right positions of the light guide portion 732X are defined by the contact portion 743X. The end portion of the light guide portion 732X on the side opposite to the contact portion 743X (on the side of the base body 724X) extends laterally from the rim 736X. The base body 724X is formed with an insertion portion 761X into which the extending portion (end portion) is inserted.

The insertion portion 761X has a groove shape opened to the light guide portion 732X side, and the end portion of the light guide portion 732X is inserted into the insertion portion 761X through this open portion. A light emitting substrate 771X on which a plurality of light emitting bodies 772X (specifically, LEDs) are mounted is disposed on the side opposite to the light guide portion 732X with the bottom portion 762X of the insertion portion 761X interposed therebetween. The light emitting board 771X is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the notification/effect control device 140 controls the light emission of the light emitting board 771X.

A plurality of through holes are formed in the bottom of the insertion portion 761X in accordance with each light emitting body 772X, and the light emitting body 772X mounted on the light emitting substrate 771X faces the end surface 754X of the light guide portion 732X through the through holes. There is. The optical axis of each light emitting body 772X faces the same direction as the rotation center axis line CL of the rotating body 725X, and the light from these light emitting bodies 772X is applied to the end surface 754X of the light guide portion 732X. The base body 724X (including the insertion portion 761X) is made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, and has a function of absorbing light. Thereby, light leakage from the insertion portion 761X is suppressed.

The light from the light emitting body 772X is repeatedly reflected by the outer surface portion and the inner surface portion of the light guide portion 732X, and goes to the opposite end surface of the light guide portion 732X. Here, a light emitting portion having fine irregularities is formed on almost the entire outer surface of the light guide 732X. In the light guiding portion 532X for symbol display, the formation range of the light emitting portion is limited to a part, whereas the formation range of the light emitting portion in the light guiding portion 732X is not limited to such a range. .. That is, the light guide portion 732X in the present embodiment has a function as the illumination unit (backlight 582) shown in the first embodiment.

The light supplied to the light guide portion 732X reaches the light emitting portion of the light guide portion 732X, is emitted to the front of the gaming machine, and the light passes through any one of the decorative sheets 781X to 783X. The decorative sheets 781X to 783X emit light brightly.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body 525X forming the drum and the rotating body 725X forming the background display device 529 face each other, and the rotating body 725X is larger than the rotating body 725X. Mostly housed. Since both the rotating body 525X and the rotating body 725X are movable objects, a corresponding operation gap is required between them. However, if such an operation gap becomes too large, it is feared that the background display will not be performed well. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the operation gap is devised in consideration of such a situation.

As shown in FIG. 43, the base body 524X is formed with an engagement recess 591X that engages with the hub 535X of the frame 531X, and the hub 535X engages with the engagement recess 591X to rotate the base body 524X. It is assembled to the frame 531X in a movable state. The motor 526X is arranged on the opposite side of the frame 531X (outside the drum unit) with the base body 524X interposed therebetween, and is fixed to the frame 531X. With such a configuration, the weight load applied to the output shaft of the motor 526X is reduced, and the shake when rotating the rotating body 525X is suppressed.

On the other hand, the base body 724X is formed with an engagement recess 791X that engages with the hub 735X of the frame 731X, and the hub 735X engages with the engagement recess 791X to allow the base body 724X to rotate. Is attached to the frame 731X. The motor 726X is arranged on the side opposite to the frame 731X (outside the drum unit) with the base body 724X interposed therebetween, and is fixed to the frame 731X. With such a configuration, the weight load applied to the output shaft of the motor 726X is reduced, and the shake when rotating the rotating body 725X is suppressed.

With such a configuration, by suppressing the shake of the rotating bodies 525X, 725X, when the rotating bodies 525X, 725X are arranged in double inside and outside, the operation gap between the rotating bodies 525X, 725X can be reduced. ..

As shown in the schematic view of FIG. 44A, also for the rotating body 725X described in the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide panels 755X to 757X provided separately in the rotation direction are combined like the rotating body 525X. Thus, the light guide portion 732X having a substantially cylindrical shape as a whole is constructed. The light guide panels 755X to 757X are made of transparent synthetic resin, and each has a plate shape with a constant thickness and a constant curvature. In addition, the length dimension of the rotating body 725X in the rotation direction and the width dimension in the rotation center axis line CL direction are also the same, and they are formed to have the same appearance. Although the light guide panels 755X to 757X are fixed to the rim 736X (specifically, the connecting portion) of the frame 731X by using a transparent adhesive that is a fixing means, the light guide panels 755X to 757X are not fixed to each other. Has become.

As described above, in the configuration in which one end of the light guide portion 732X is inserted into the insertion portion 761X, the inner surface of the insertion portion 761X and the light guide portion 732X are maximized in order to improve the light supply efficiency. It is preferable to make them close to each other. However, in such a structure, it is necessary to add a certain amount of allowance to the gap between the light guide panels 755X to 757X in consideration of the fact that the light guide panels 755X to 757X are distorted due to manufacturing errors or changes over time. Here, in the present embodiment, the light guide panels 755X to 757X are not fixed to each other, so that it is possible to avoid distortion that may occur when the light guide panels 755X to 757X are fixed. This makes it possible to minimize the above margin.

When the rotating body 725X is constructed by using the light guide portion 732X, the expressive power of the variable display unit can be improved, but the weight of the rotating body 725X tends to increase. This may cause a decrease in responsiveness when rotating/stopping the rotating body 725X. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the light guide panels 755X to 757X are prevented from overlapping in the thickness direction. As a result, an increase in the weight of the light guide portion 732X is suppressed, and a decrease in responsiveness is suppressed.

In the boundary portion BP2 between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, adjacent light guide panels 755X to 757X face each other with a gap. This is a device for avoiding strong interference between the light guide panels 755X to 757X at the boundary portion BP2 when the sizes of the light guide panels 755X to 757X vary due to manufacturing errors or the like. By avoiding the strong interference of the light guide panels 755X to 757X, it is possible to prevent the light guide panels 755X to 757X from being deformed such as the above-mentioned distortion.

Note that the insertion portion 761X described in this embodiment also extends along the portion of the light guide portion 732X that extends from the opening 522 (see FIG. 13) of the housing 521 to the front of the gaming machine. The open portions on both the upper and lower sides of the insertion portion 761X are expanded so that the width gradually increases toward the ends. This suppresses catching when the boundary portion BP2 passes through the open portion. By the way, when the opening is expanded, light leakage from the sidelight 728X is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both of the open portions are formed so as to face rearward, and more specifically, they are formed so as to face rearward and obliquely rearward. This is a device for making it difficult for the player to see the light when the light leaks from the opening.

Decorative sheets 781X to 783X are attached to the light guide panels 755X to 757X, respectively. The decorative sheets 781X to 783X are common in that they have the same size as the outer surface portions of the light guide panels 755X to 757X and are light transmissive, but the drawn patterns are different. Specifically, the decorative sheet 781X attached to the light guide panel 755X is given a pattern simulating a sandy beach in the daytime, and the decorative sheet 782X attached to the light guide panel 756X imitates an evening sandy beach. The design is provided, and the decorative sheet 783X attached to the light guide panel 757X is provided with a design imitating a sandy beach at night.

By rotating the rotating body 725X, the background visible from the front of the game machine is switched. Here, with reference to FIG. 44(b), a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the game state and the background. In the first normal game state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the sandy beach in the daytime is displayed as the background. In the second normal game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the third normal game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high-probability mode is the background of the evening. The beach is displayed. In the special game state (opening/closing execution mode), which shifts when the jackpot result is reached, in the background, the beach at night is displayed as the background. In this way, the game state is suggested to the player by switching the display of the background according to the game state.

In the present embodiment, the background and the design are displayed by using the inner and outer double rotating bodies. In such a configuration, it becomes difficult to incorporate the illumination means in the inner rotating body in order to secure the power supply path to the illumination means. In this regard, by constructing the rotating body 725X by using the light guide portion 732X that functions as an illumination unit, the above-mentioned problem is preferably solved.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the motor 526X for the rotating body 525X and the motor 726X for the rotating body 725X are configured to project to the outside of the drum unit. In the case of such a configuration, the gap between the drum units arranged side by side becomes large, and the separation of each symbol row becomes large. Hereinafter, a modified example in consideration of such a situation will be described.

As shown in the schematic view of FIG. 45, the hubs 535Y and 735Y of the frames 531Y and 731Y are formed so as to be convex inward of the drum unit, and the hubs 535Y and 735Y are formed on the base body 524Y from the rotation center axis CL side. , 724Y engaging protrusions 591Y and 791Y engage with each other. By making the engagement protrusions 591Y and 791Y hollow and disposing (accommodating) the motors 526Y and 726Y in the hollow portions, the protrusion of the motors 526Y and 726Y can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the gap and suppress the separation of each symbol row.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the light guide 732X is the illumination means for the decorative sheets 781X to 783X, but the illumination means is not limited to this. The light guide portion 732X can also be configured to display a predetermined pattern as in the light guide portion 532X. For example, the light emitting section of the light guide section 732X may be formed so as to be able to display a pattern similar to the pattern described on the decorative sheets 781X to 783X. In the case of such a configuration, it is not preferable that the back side is visible through the light guide portion 732X. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a plain sheet material or the like on the inner surface side of the light guide portion 732X and regulate the back side so that it cannot be viewed.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the decorative sheets 781X to 783X are individually attached to the light guide panels 755X to 757X, but one decorative sheet is provided so as to straddle the three light guide panels 755X to 757X. It is also possible to adopt a configuration of mounting. With such a configuration, by covering the boundary portion BP2 between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, the boundary portion BP2 can be made inconspicuous.

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment described above, four game states are suggested by three backgrounds, but it is also possible to make the number of backgrounds match the number of game states.

<Modification 5>
It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each modification of the first embodiment to the variable display unit shown in the present embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the basic structure of the variable display unit is the same as that of the second embodiment, but the variable display unit is used to perform a different display effect for each gaming state. The configuration is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the variable display unit in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit.

Each drum unit 723Z constituting the variable display unit includes a first display unit including a base body 524Z, a rotating body 525Z, a motor 526Z, a sidelight 528Z, and a base body 724Z, a rotating body 725Z, a motor 726Z, a sidelight 728Z, and the like. It is roughly divided into a second display unit. The first display unit has a function of notifying a lottery result based on a ball entering the upper working opening 83a (see FIG. 6), and if the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the lottery, the above-mentioned effective line is obtained. The symbol combination corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on at least one of L1 to L5, and when the regular jackpot result is obtained in the lottery, the regular jackpot result is associated with at least one of the activated lines L1 to L5. It is configured to stop and display the symbol combination. The base body 524Z, the rotating body 525Z, the motor 526Z, and the sidelight 528Z are the same as the base body 524Y, the rotating body 525Y, the motor 526Y, and the sidelight 528Y described in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The description is omitted.

The rotating body 725Z has a light guide portion 732Z and a frame 731Z on which the light guide portion 732Z is mounted, and the light guide portion 732Z is a combination of a plurality of light guide panels 755Z to 758Z. The configuration is the same as that of the light guide portion 732Y shown in the second embodiment. However, while the decorative sheets 781Y to 783Y are attached to the outer surface of the light guide portion 732Y, the sheet members 781Z to 783Z are formed on the inner surface of the light guide portion 732Z in the light guide portion 732Z described in the present embodiment. Is attached, which is different from the second embodiment.

Since the sheet materials 781Z to 783Z are not provided with the light transmission property, the back side of the sheet materials 781Z to 783Z cannot be visually recognized. The sheet materials 781Z to 783Z are all plain and do not have information such as a background or the like, that is, information that serves as a foothold for identifying the rotational position of the rotating body 725Z. On the other hand, with respect to the light emitting portion 753Z (see FIG. 47) formed on the outer surface portion 751Z of the light guiding portion 732Z, light is emitted from the light emitting portion 753Z similarly to the light guiding portion 532Z, so that the light emitting portion 753Z has a predetermined length. The design and the like are displayed. That is, while the light guide portion 732Y shown in the second embodiment functions as an illumination means, the light guide portion 732Z shown in this embodiment functions as a pattern display means. Note that, in a situation where light is not emitted from the light emitting portion 753Z, the above-described symbols and the like are hidden, and it is substantially impossible or difficult to visually identify the light emitting portion 753Z.

Here, with reference to FIG. 47, a light emitting portion 753Z formed in the light guide portion 732Z, that is, a pattern or the like displayed by the light emitting portion 753Z will be described. For convenience of description, FIG. 47 shows a state in which each light emitting portion 753Z emits light and a design or the like is displayed.

On the light guide panel 755Z forming the light guide portion 732Z, one pattern is described so as to extend over the left and right three light guide panels 755Z. Specifically, a pattern showing a beach is described. By supplying light from the side light 728Z with the light guide panel 755Z facing the front of the gaming machine, the background of the beach is displayed.

On the light guide panels 756Z to 757Z, "boy" symbols, "bell" symbols, "replay" symbols, "7" symbols, and "BAR" symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of effective lines are set for the second display unit as well as the first display unit, and when the probability variation jackpot result corresponding to 16R is obtained, at least one of the effective lines is set. The symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7" is stopped and displayed, and when the result of the normal jackpot for 4R is displayed, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "BAR" is stopped and displayed, and the result is out of alignment. In this case, the symbol combinations other than these symbol combinations are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48).

In the present embodiment, depending on the game situation, the light guide panel 755Z displays the background of the beach, and the light guide panels 756Z to 757Z display patterns. The background and the pattern are not simultaneously stopped and displayed in the variable display area.

The effective line in the second display unit is configured so as to match each of the effective lines L1 to L5 (effective line of the first display unit) shown in FIG. 20 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the effective line By overlapping with before and after, the player's understanding is facilitated. Hereinafter, the effective lines of the second display unit are also described as effective lines L1 to L5.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game times related to the upper operation port 83a and the game times related to the lower operation port 83b are executed in a predetermined order, and the game times do not overlap each other. However, the present embodiment is different in that the game times related to the upper operation port 83a and the game times related to the lower operation port 83b are performed in parallel. Hereinafter, various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 and the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 in order to realize such a flow of games will be described focusing on the differences from the second embodiment. To do. First, with reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 53, a game number control process executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 in the present embodiment will be described.

(Game time control processing)
In the game time control process in the present embodiment, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag (open/close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open/close execution mode flag storage area (open/close execution state information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. To do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is changed to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is also ended in the game state transition process.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1301, the present game time control processing is ended as it is. When a negative determination is made in step S1301, in step S1302, a game time control process for a game time related to winning in the upper operation port 83a (upper operation port corresponding game time control process, upper operation port control process) And after executing the game time control process for the game time relating to the winning in the lower operation port 83b (the lower operation port corresponding game time control process, the lower operation port control process) in step S1303, The control process ends. The basic flow is common to these two control processes. Hereinafter, the upper working opening control process will be described first with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, and thereafter, the lower working opening control process will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The control process will be described.

(Control process for upper working port)
As shown in FIG. 50, in the control process for the upper working opening, first in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the game is being played for the upper working opening 83a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper working port display portion of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. Note that, in this determination, the game-in-progress flag for the upper working port (game-in-progress information) is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. It is carried out by determining whether or not The game operating flag for the upper working opening is stored when the variable display is started on the upper working opening display unit, and is erased when the design is stopped and the final display is finished.

If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S1401 and the flow proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the game operation related to the lower operation port 83b is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower working port display portion of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. Note that, in this determination, the game-in-progress flag for the lower working port (variation display-in-progress information) is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variation display-in-progress information storage means) in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. It is carried out by determining whether or not The game operating flag for the lower working opening is stored when the variable display is started on the lower working opening display section, and the design corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and displayed, and the finalized display ends. If erased.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1402, the operation proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the game times associated with the lower operating opening 83b correspond to the jackpot results. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the main working port control processing is ended as it is. When a negative determination is made in step S1403 or step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the total holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the upper working opening holding storage number CRN (specifically, the holding information related to the upper working opening 83a) is the number of holding information pieces that are held and stored. It is determined whether the number) is "0". If the upper working port reserved storage number CRN is "0", the game time control processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the upper operation port reserved storage number CRN is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the upper working opening 83a, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the upper working opening is decremented by one. Then, the data stored in the first area of the upper working port holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1, and the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the upper working port holding area Ra is executed. ..

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area→the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of third area→second area, fourth area→third area, and so on. Then, one of the LEDs that are lit on the hold number display section for the upper working port is turned off. In this turning-off process, contrary to the turning-on process executed when the holding information is added, the LEDs of the holding number display section for the upper working port are turned off sequentially from the right side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S1406, the fluctuation start process for the upper working port for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the upper working port and the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit. After performing (variation start process for upper working port), this game time control process is ended. Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the variation start processing for upper working port of step S1406 will be described.

(Variation start process for upper working port)
In the upper operation opening variation start process, first, a win/fail judgment process is executed in step S1501. In the win/loss determination process, the win/loss table for the upper working opening is referred to, and information for win/loss determination among the information stored in the first execution area, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is the above-mentioned jackpot numerical information. It is determined whether or not When the determination result in step S1501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 and the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination of the information stored in the first execution area, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the above-mentioned grasped type determination information is the information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the information group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Specify which one is included.

In step S1504, a jackpot result stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the ROM 603, the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (upper operation port display portion) of the main display unit 87 in the game time. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, a plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion D are set, and in step S1504, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In addition, in step S1504, the MPU 602 stores information for specifying in the flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 whether the current game result is a normal jackpot result or a probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, the normal jackpot flag is stored when the result is a normal jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot flag is stored when the result is a probability varying jackpot.

After executing the setting process of step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the game time related to the lower operation opening 83b is being executed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1505, the operation proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game time (variation display of the pattern) related to the lower operation port 83b is being executed, the game time (variation display of the pattern) related to the lower operation port 83b is forcibly halfway based on this forced end flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times associated with the upper working opening 83a correspond to the jackpot result, and the game times associated with the lower working opening 83b can be executed beyond the timing at which the confirmation display is performed in the game times. In this case, the game times associated with the lower operating port 83b are shortened, and the game times associated with the lower operating port 83b are also terminated when the game times associated with the upper operating port 83a are completed. In such a case, the pattern stopped and displayed at the game time related to the lower operation port 83b corresponds to the disengagement result.

Returning to the description of step S1502, if the determination result in step S1501 is a deviation result, a negative determination is made in step S1502, and the flow proceeds to step S1507. In step S1507, a stop result setting process for the disconnection result is executed.

Specifically, in the game time related to the start of the variation this time, the result of the final stop display on the main display portion D (upper operation port display portion) of the main display unit 87 being stored in the ROM 603 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After performing the processes of steps S1506 and S1507, or if a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, a variable display time (display continuation time) setting process is executed.

After the variable display time setting process in step S1508 is executed, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set in step S1509. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. As described above, the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach occurrence variable display time table. Even if the start command does not include the information about the presence/absence of the reach occurrence, the notification/production control device 140, which is the sub-side control device, can identify the presence/absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the variable display time. .. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

After the setting process of step S1509 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1510, and after the fluctuation display of the upper working port display section of the main display unit 87 is started, the upper working port fluctuation starting process is ended. In the process of step S1510, the game in-progress flag for the upper working opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, the variable display) related to the upper operating opening 83a are being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 50 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that the game operation related to the upper operation opening 83a is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to the lower operation opening 83b and the start time of the game time corresponding to the jackpot result. If a negative decision is made in step S1407, the operation proceeds to step S1408.

In step S1408, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S1508 has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S1408, the variable display process is executed in step S1409, and then the upper working port control process is ended. In the variable display process of step S1409, the pattern is variably displayed by performing a process of turning on/off the various LEDs configuring the upper operation port display unit.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1408, the operation proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, fluctuation end processing is executed. In the variation ending process, the display control of the main display unit 87 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the upper operation port display unit in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, the fixed display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the game-in-progress flag for the upper working port, which is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, is erased when the finalized display ends.

After setting the variation end command in the subsequent step S1412, the present game time control processing is ended. The fluctuation end command set in step S1412 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 executes processing for ending the effect in the game time, based on the reception of the variation end command. Specifically, by receiving the variation end command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the game result of the game times is fixedly displayed (final stop display) on the first display unit of the variable display unit. It should be noted that the notification/effect control device 140 may be configured to end the effect for game use independently without transmitting the fluctuation end command.

After executing the processing of step S1412, the process proceeds to step S1413, and the updating processing of the game number counter is executed. The number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the number of games to continue the high-frequency support mode in the second normal game state, and is decremented by "1" each time the game is executed. When the number-of-games counter has become “0”, an affirmative decision is made in step S1414 and the operation proceeds to step S1415. In step S1415, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 604 is deleted. After the high-frequency support mode end command is set in subsequent step S1416, the upper working port control process is ended. The high-frequency support mode end command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 switches the display effect mode based on the reception of this command.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S1410, and after the processes of steps S1411 to S1416 are executed, the upper working port control process is ended. In the rewriting process of the stop result, the stop result is rewritten so that the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed.

Next, the lower operation port control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

(Control process for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the lower operation port control process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the game related to the lower operation port 83b is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower working port display portion of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. Note that, in this determination, the game-in-progress flag for the lower working port (variation display-in-progress information) is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variation display-in-progress information storage means) in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. It is carried out by determining whether or not The game operating flag for the lower working opening is stored when the variable display is started on the lower working opening display unit, and is erased when the design is stopped and the final display is completed.

If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S1601 and the flow proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the game operation related to the upper operation opening 83a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper working port display portion of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1602, the operation proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether the game times associated with the upper operating opening 83a correspond to the jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the control process for the lower working port is ended as it is. If a negative decision is made in step S1603, or if a negative decision is made in step S1602, the operation proceeds to step S1604. In step S1604, the total holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the lower working port holding storage number CRN (specifically, the holding information related to the lower working port 83b) is the number of holding information pieces that are held and stored. It is determined whether the number) is "0". When the number CRN of reserved memory for lower operating port is "0", the game number control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the lower operation port reserved storage number CRN is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the lower working port 83b, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the lower working port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the lower working port holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area, and the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the lower working port holding area Rb is executed.

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area→the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of third area→second area, fourth area→third area, and so on. Then, one of the LEDs that are turned on is turned off in the reserved number display section for the lower working port. In this turning-off process, contrary to the turning-on process executed when the holding information is added, the LEDs of the holding lamp unit for the lower working opening are turned off sequentially from the right side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S1606, the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 87 (main display portion D) and the variable display of the symbol on the variable display unit (specifically, the second display unit) are displayed. After performing the variation start process for the lower working port to start (variation start process for the lower working port), this game time control process is ended.

Now, with reference to FIG. 53, the variation start processing for the lower working port of step S1606 will be described.

(Variation start process for lower working port)
In the variation start process for the lower working port, first, a win/fail judgment process is executed in step S1701. In the win/loss determination process, the win/loss table for the lower operation opening is referred to, and information for win/loss determination among various information stored in the second execution area, that is, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 is the jackpot numerical information described above. It is determined whether or not When the determination result in step S1701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702 and the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination of various information stored in the second execution area, that is, numerical value information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to, it is specified which of the information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the information group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result the identified type determination information is included in.

In step S1704, a big hit result stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (the lower operation opening display portion) of the main display unit 87 in the game time. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S1704, information indicating a pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In step S1704, the MPU 602 stores information in the flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 for specifying whether the current game result is the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, the normal jackpot flag is stored when the result is a normal jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot flag is stored when the result is a probability varying jackpot.

After executing the setting process of step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the game time related to the upper operation opening 83a is being executed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1705, the operation proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game time (variation display of the pattern) related to the upper operation port 83a is executed, the game time (variation display of the pattern) related to the upper operation port 83a is compulsorily performed on the way based on the forced end flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, when the game time associated with the lower working opening 83b corresponds to the jackpot result, and the game time associated with the upper working opening 83a is exceeded beyond the timing at which the confirmation display in the game operation is performed (disappearance result correspondence). ) Can be executed, the game time associated with the upper operation port 83a is shortened, and the game time associated with the lower operation port 83a is also ended with the end of the game time associated with the lower operation port 83b. In such a case, the pattern stopped and displayed at the game time related to the upper operating opening 83a corresponds to the result of the disengagement.

Returning to the description of step S1702, if the determination result in step S1701 is a deviation result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1707, a stop result setting process for the disconnection result is executed. Specifically, in the game time related to the start of the variation this time, the result of the removal of the design finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (the lower operation opening display portion) of the main display unit 87 is stored in the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the processing of step S1706 or step S1707, or if a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, variable display time (display continuation time) setting processing is executed.

After the variable display time setting process in step S1708 is executed, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S1709. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. As described above, the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach occurrence variable display time table. Even if the start command does not include the information about the presence/absence of the reach occurrence, the notification/production control device 140, which is the sub-side control device, can identify the presence/absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the variable display time. .. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

After the setting process of step S1709 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1710, and after the fluctuation display of the lower working port display section of the main display unit 87 is started, the lower working port fluctuation starting process is ended. In the process of step S1710, the game in-progress flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game time (for example, variable display) related to the lower working opening 83b is being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 52 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if it is determined that the game operation related to the lower operation port 83b is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined whether or not it is the game time related to the upper operation opening 83a and the start time of the game time corresponding to the jackpot result. If a negative decision is made in step S1608, the operation proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S1609, the variable display process is executed in step S1610, and then the main working port control process is ended. In the variable display process of step S1610, the pattern is variably displayed by performing a process of turning on/off the various LEDs forming the lower operation port display unit.

If the result of step S1609 is positive and stable, the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, a fluctuation ending process is executed. In the fluctuation ending process, the display control of the main display unit 87 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower operation port display unit in a predetermined manner.

In a succeeding step S1613, a fluctuation end command is set. The variation end command set in step S1613 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 executes processing for ending the effect in the game time, based on the reception of the variation end command. In addition, the notification/effect control device 140 receives the variation end command, so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the game result of the game times and the like is finally displayed on the second display unit of the variable display unit 500Z (final stop display). Let It should be noted that the notification/effect control device 140 may be configured to end the effect for game use independently without transmitting the fluctuation end command.

After executing the processing of step S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614, and the updating processing of the game number counter is executed. The number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the number of games to continue the high-frequency support mode in the second normal game state, and is decremented by "1" each time the game is executed. If the number-of-games counter has reached "0", an affirmative decision is made in step S1615 and the operation proceeds to step S1616. In step S1616, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 604 is deleted. After the high-frequency support mode end command is set in step S1617, the lower working port control process is ended. The high-frequency support mode end command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 switches the display effect mode based on the reception of this command.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S1611, and after the processes of steps S1612 to S1617 are executed, the upper working port control process is ended. In the rewriting process of the stop result, the stop result is rewritten so that the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed.

As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the game times related to the upper operation port 83a and the game times related to the lower operation port 83b are simultaneously advanced. However, there is a difference in the variable display time set in each game depending on the game state, and the main target of game progress is switched depending on the game state. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 54, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the game state and the variation display time.

In the first normal game state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the variable display time set for the game times executed based on the ball entering the upper working opening 83a is 1 to 1. It will be 20 seconds. Regarding the game times corresponding to the disengagement result, in particular, the difference is provided such that the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper working opening 83a increases, and while the game progresses quickly, the upper working opening 83a It is possible to reduce the chance that the pending information is not acquired despite the occurrence of a ball. On the other hand, the variable display time set in the game time executed based on the ball entering the lower operation opening 83b is uniformly 600 sec. In other words, the variable display time is 600 seconds regardless of whether the lottery result is the jackpot result or the miss result. Thus, in the first normal game state, the game times related to the upper operating port 83a will proceed preferentially.

On the other hand, in the second normal game state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode, in the third normal game state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, , The relationship of the set variable display time is opposite to the first normal game state. That is, the variable display time set for the game times executed based on the ball entering the upper working opening 83a is uniformly 600 sec. In other words, the variable display time is 600 seconds regardless of whether the lottery result is the jackpot result or the miss result. On the other hand, the variable display time set in the game game executed based on the ball entering the lower working opening 83b is 1 to 10 seconds. Regarding the game times corresponding to the disengagement result, in particular, the difference is provided so that the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower working opening 83b increases, and while the game progresses quickly, the lower working opening 83b It is possible to reduce the chance that the pending information is not acquired despite the occurrence of a ball. In this way, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game times related to the lower operating port 83b will proceed preferentially.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result is informed by the symbol displayed by the first display unit, and the lottery result is informed by the symbol displayed by the second display unit, depending on each gaming state. In accordance with the switching of the main game progress target, the side light of each display unit is switched on/off. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the relationship between the game state and the light emitting mode will be described.

In the first normal game state in which the game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the upper working opening 83a, the sidelight 528Z of the first display unit and the sidelight 728Z of the second display unit are basically maintained in the lit state. (See FIG. 55). In the first normal game state, the rotating body 725Z of the second display unit is maintained in a state where the background of the beach described above is facing the front of the game machine, and a symbol corresponding to the upper working opening 83a in front of the background of the beach. It is variably displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the design of the first display unit and the background of the second display unit can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state in which the game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the lower working opening 83b, the sidelight 528Z of the first display unit is basically in the off state. The sidelight 728Z of the second display unit is maintained in the lighting state (see FIG. 55). In these gaming states, with some exceptions, the symbols on the first display unit are hidden, and the symbols displayed by the second display unit are not hindered from being visually recognized. That is, basically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), only the design of the second display unit is visible.

In the special game state, the display of the symbol combination that triggered the transition to the special game state is continued. That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the first display unit, the background is hidden and the display of the symbol combination is continued, and the jackpot result corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed on the second display unit. When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the display of the symbol combination is continued.

Here, in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140, a control process for game turn is executed as a part of the regular process. The control processing for the game round is for the upper working slot display processing corresponding to the game round based on the ball entering the upper working slot 83a and the lower working slot corresponding to the game round based on the ball entering the lower working slot 83b. Display processing is included. The display process for the upper working port will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59.

In the first normal gaming state, the sidelight 528Z for the first display unit is basically kept lit and the sidelight 728Z for the second display unit is kept lit, and the second normal gaming state and the third normal state are maintained. In the gaming state, the sidelight 528Z for the first display unit is basically kept off and the sidelight 728Z for the second display unit is kept on.

(Display processing for upper working port)
As shown in FIG. 57, in the upper operation port control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is being performed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the upper operating port main control process is executed in step S1802, and when a negative determination is made in step S1801, the upper operating port special control process is executed in step S1803. To do.

(Main control processing for upper working port)
As shown in FIG. 58, in the main control process for the upper operating port, first, at step S1901, at the timing of finalizing the final display of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the lower operating port 83b. Determine if there is. If a negative decision is made in step S1901, the operation proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the game operation related to the upper operation opening 83a is being performed. If a negative decision is made in step S1902, the operation proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round related to the upper operation opening 83a. When a negative determination is made in step S1903, the main working port main processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1903, the operation proceeds to step S1904.

In step S1904, drive control start processing for the first display unit is executed. As a result, a drive signal is output to each motor 526Z forming the first display unit, and each rotating body 525Z starts operating. In a succeeding step S1905, a light emission control process of the sidelight 528 of the first display unit is executed. As a result, if power is already supplied to the sidelights 528, the power supply is continued, and if part or all of the power is not supplied to the sidelights 528, the sidelights 528 are not supplied. The power supply to the

Returning to the description of step S1902, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, that is, if the game operation related to the upper operation port 83a is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not it is the time to finalize and display the symbol combination in the game time associated with the upper operation opening 83a. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1906, the operation proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1907, stop control processing of the first display unit is executed. As a result, all the rotating bodies 525Z that form the first display unit are stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, the flow advances to step S1908 to execute the light emission/drive control process for the changing of the first display unit. As a result, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed, and the reach display is moved to, or the middle symbol row is specially changed. The specific flow of the display effect in this case is the same as that in the first embodiment.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if the affirmative judgment is made in the step S1901, that is, if it is the timing to confirm and display the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the lower working opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S1909. move on. In step S1909, a turn-off control process is executed to turn off all the side lights 528Z for the first display unit. That is, when the game times related to the lower working opening 83b progress during the first normal game state and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the second display unit, the symbol on the first display unit Is hidden, and it is configured not to interfere with the visual recognition of the symbol combination displayed by the second display unit behind.

Then, in step S1910, a forced stop control process is executed to stop and display each rotating body 525Z of the first display unit. When forcibly stopping each of the rotating bodies 525Z, the combination of the light emitting portions 553Z corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped in the variable display area, but the supply of light from the sidelight 528Z is stopped in step S1909. Therefore, these light emitting portions 553Z do not emit light.

(Special control processing for upper working port)
Next, the special control process for the upper working port executed when the game is in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the lower working port 83b will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special control process for the upper working opening, first, in step S2001, at the timing of finalizing (final stop display) the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the lower working opening 83b. Determine if there is. If a negative decision is made in step S2001, the operation proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the game is being played for the upper operating opening 83a. If a negative decision is made in step S2002, the operation proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game game related to the upper operation opening 83a. When a negative determination is made in step S2003, the main working port special control processing is ended as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the drive control start processing of the first display unit is executed in step S2004, and then the main working port special control processing is ended. By the drive control start processing of the first display unit, the output of the drive signal to each motor 526Z for the first display unit is started, and each rotator 525Z starts operating. However, since the sidelight 528 for the first display unit is maintained in the off state, the symbols on the first display unit remain undisplayed. That is, each rotating body 525Z will idle.

Returning to the description of step S2002, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the fixed display of the symbol combination is being performed at the game times related to the upper operation opening 83a. If a negative decision is made in step S2005, the operation proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to finalize the display (final stop display) of the symbol combination in the game game related to the upper operation opening 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2006, drive control processing for the changing of the first display unit is executed in step S2010. As a result, the rotation/stop of each rotating body 525 is controlled. However, also in this case, since the sidelight 528 for the first display unit is turned off, the symbols are not displayed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2006, the operation proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, stop control processing of the first display unit is executed. When the current game time corresponds to the big hit result, the light emitting portion 553Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result is stopped at any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the current game time becomes the miss result. When they correspond, the light emitting portion 553Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5.

In a succeeding step S2008, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time corresponds to the jackpot result. When a negative determination is made in step S2008, the main working port special control process is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2008, the operation proceeds to step S2009, in which a light emission control process for the sidelight 528Z for the first display unit is executed. As a result, light is supplied from the side light 528Z only to the light emitting portion 553Z on the line where the big hit symbol combination is formed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result suddenly appears on the first display unit.

Returning to the description of step S2005, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, that is, if the confirmation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether it is time to end the confirmed display after the confirmed display period has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S2011, the main working port special control processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2011, the operation proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, it is determined whether or not the game result this time is a jackpot result. If it is a big hit result, the process proceeds to step S2013, and the light emission extension control process is executed to extend the light emission of the side light 528 of the first display unit until the special gaming state ends.

As described above in detail, when the jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the upper operating port 83a during the second normal game state and the third normal game state, only the result is displayed on the first display unit. Then, the display will be continued until the end of the special game state. On the other hand, in the case where the game result relating to the upper operating opening 83a results in disengagement during the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the rotating body 525Z is also stopped in accordance with the result. However, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result remains hidden.

(Display processing for lower working port)
Next, the lower operation port control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. As shown in FIG. 60, in the control process for the lower operation port, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state is being performed. When a positive determination is made in step S2101, the lower working port main control process is executed in step S2102, and when a negative determination is made in step S2101, the lower working port special control process is executed in step S2103. To do.

(Main control process for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 61, in the lower control opening main control processing, first, at step S2201, at the timing of finalizing the final combination display of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the upper operation opening 83a. Determine if there is. If a negative decision is made in step S2201, the operation proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not the game is being played for the lower operating opening 83b. If a negative decision is made in step S2202, the operation proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game game for the lower operating port 83b. When a negative determination is made in step S2203, the main processing for the lower working port is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2203, the operation proceeds to step S2204.

In step S2204, drive control start processing for the second display unit is executed. As a result, a drive signal is output to each motor 726Z forming the second display unit, and each rotating body 725Z starts operating. As described above, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the sidelight 728Z of the second display unit is basically maintained in the lighting state, so that the rotating body 725Z starts operating, 2 The display unit will start the variable display of symbols.

Returning to the description of step S2202, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, that is, if the game is being played for the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not it is the time to finalize the display (final stop display) of the symbol combination in the game times associated with the lower working opening 83b. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2205, the operation proceeds to step S2206.

In step S2206, stop control processing of the second display unit is executed. As a result, all the rotating bodies 725Z forming the second display unit are stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2205, the flow advances to step S2207 to execute light emission/drive control processing for the second display unit during change. As a result, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed, and the reach display is moved to, or the middle symbol row is specially changed. The specific flow of the display effect in this case is the same as that in the first embodiment.

Returning to the explanation of step S2201, if the affirmative judgment is made in the step S2201, that is, if it is the timing to confirm and display the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the upper operating opening 83a, the step S2208 is performed. move on. In step S2208, a turn-off control process is executed to turn off all the side lights 728Z for the second display unit. That is, when the game times related to the upper operation opening 83a progress during the second normal game state or the third normal game state, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the first display unit, The symbols on the second display unit are hidden, and the information provided to the player is prevented from being overwhelmed by the information.

After that, in step S2209, a forced stop control process is executed to stop and display each rotating body 725Z of the second display unit. When forcibly stopping each of the rotating bodies 725Z, the combination of the light emitting portions 753Z corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped in the variable display area, but the supply of light from the sidelight 728Z is stopped in step S2208. Therefore, these light emitting portions 753Z do not emit light.

(Special control processing for lower working port)
Next, the special control process for the lower working port executed when the game is in the first normal game state where it progresses based on the ball entering the upper working port 83a will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the special control process for the lower working opening, first, in step S2301, at the timing of finalizing the final combination display of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the upper working opening 83a. Determine if there is. If a negative decision is made in step S2301, the operation proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the game operation related to the lower operation port 83b is being performed. If a negative decision is made in step S2302, the operation proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not it is the game start timing for the lower operating opening 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the special control processing for the lower working port is ended as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2303, the operation proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, special control processing of the sidelight of the second display unit is executed, and in subsequent step S2305, drive control processing of the second display unit is executed. As a result, the output of the drive signal to each motor 726Z for the second display unit is started, and each rotator 725Z starts operating. In this case, the light emitting portion 753Z for the background and the light emitting portion 753Z for the pattern pass through the variable display area in a predetermined cycle, but the period when the light emitting portion 753Z for the pattern passes through the variable display area. Supply of light from the sidelight 728Z is temporarily stopped. As a result, the background is displayed as if it were blinking when viewed from the player.

Returning to the description of step S2302, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2302, the operation proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the fixed display of the symbol combination is being performed in the game game relating to the lower operation opening 83b. If a negative decision is made in step S2306, the operation proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to finalize the display (final stop display) of the symbol combination in the game game associated with the lower operation opening 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2307, the light emission/drive control process for the second display unit during change is executed in step S2311. As a result, the sidelight 728Z is switched on/off according to the rotation position of each rotating body 725Z, and the background is displayed in blinking, while the symbols on the second display unit are not displayed. In addition, in the first normal game state, when the game operation related to the lower operation opening 83b is executed, each rotating body 725Z is stopped at the time of the finalized display without going through the reach display described above. It will be.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2307, the operation proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, stop control processing of the second display unit is executed. When the current game time corresponds to the big hit result, the light emitting portion 753Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result is stopped at any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the current game time becomes the miss result. If they correspond, the light emitting portion 753Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5.

In a succeeding step S2309, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time corresponds to the jackpot result. When a negative determination is made in step S2309, the special control processing for the lower working port is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2309, the operation proceeds to step S2310, and light emission control processing for the sidelight 728Z for the second display unit is executed. As a result, light is supplied from the side light 728Z only to the light emitting portions 753Z on the line where the jackpot symbol combination is formed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result suddenly appears on the second display unit.

Returning to the description of step S2306, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, that is, if the confirmation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2312. In step S2312, it is determined whether it is time to end the confirmed display after the confirmed display period has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S2312, the main working port special control process is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2011, the operation proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, it is determined whether or not the game result this time is a jackpot result. If the result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2313, and the light emission extension control process is executed to extend the light emission of the sidelight 728Z of the second display unit until the special gaming state ends.

Returning to the description of step S2301, if a positive determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2315. In step S2315, forced stop control processing of the second display unit is executed. That is, in the first normal game state, when a symbol combination that results in a big hit in the game times related to the upper operation opening 83a is stopped and displayed, each rotating body 725Z is forcibly stopped in the second display unit as well. .. In this case, the second display unit is adjusted so that the combination of the light emitting portions 753Z corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop on any of the effective lines L1 to L5.

As described above in detail, when the jackpot result is obtained in the game operation relating to the lower operation opening 83b during the first normal game state, only the result is displayed on the second display unit, and the display is special. It will be continued until the end of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the game result related to the lower operation opening 83b results in disengagement during the first normal game state, the rotating body 525Z is also stopped according to the result, but corresponds to the disengagement result. The symbol combination that was done remains hidden.

When comparing the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode with the second normal game state and the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the latter is more frequent than the former into the working opening. Becomes higher. In consideration of such circumstances, the variable display time set in the second normal game state and the third normal game state is shortened to facilitate the progress of the game. When comparing the arrangement of the light emitting portions 553Z (symbols) in the first display unit with the arrangement of the light emitting portions 753Z (symbols) in the second display unit, each symbol is one in a symbol row in the former case. Whereas, in the latter, a plurality of each symbol are arranged in one symbol row in the latter case. This is a device for shortening the required time until the set symbols are stopped and displayed as much as possible to enhance the responsiveness of the symbol display when the game is proceeding.

The result of the lottery based on the entry into the upper working opening 83a is displayed on the first display unit, and the result of the lottery based on the entry into the lower working opening 83b is displayed on the second display unit. In this way, by separately providing the display portion for the upper working opening 83a and the display portion for the lower working opening 83b, it is possible for the player to determine which working opening the game is progressing based on. It can be grasped promptly. However, in the case where the display unit is provided for each operation opening in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and that the lottery result will be overlooked due to the scattering of notable points. In this respect, as shown in this embodiment, since the other display portion can be viewed through the one display portion, the amount of movement of the line of sight between the display portions can be reduced. .. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences caused by the individual display portions provided for the respective operation ports to enhance the originality. Thereby, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably strengthened.

The display section of the first display unit and the display section of the second display unit are parallel to each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a large difference in visibility between the symbol display on the first display unit and the symbol display on the second display unit.

The variable display area for symbols on the first display part and the variable display area for symbols on the second display part overlap each other in the front and rear. With such a configuration, when the player is paying attention to one display unit and performing variable display of symbols on the other display unit, the effect is flashy or unnecessary accents are given. It is possible to preferably reduce the chance that the variable display is overlooked. It should be noted that even if the position (effective line) where the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed is overlapped on the front and back of the first display unit and the second display unit, a large number of symbols are stopped and displayed. It is possible to easily identify whether the symbol combination corresponds to the current lottery result.

As described above, in the configuration in which the stop display position (effective line) and the variable display area are overlapped with each other in the front and rear, by making the appearance of the symbol groups displayed on each display unit, the symbol is displayed on which display unit. It is possible to improve the discriminating power as to whether it is displayed. In particular, in the configuration in which the effective lines are aligned before and after, the symbols on the first display portion and the symbols on the second display portion are mixed, so that, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed on each display portion. Despite that, it is possible to preferably avoid that it looks as if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed.

In the variable display mode in the first normal game state, the symbols on the second display section are basically hidden, and in the variable display mode in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, basically in the first display section. The design is hidden. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent confusion between the display on the first display unit and the display on the second display unit.

In the configuration in which the lottery by each lottery means is carried out in parallel, the jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the lower working opening 83b during the first normal game state, the second normal game state and the third normal game state. There is a possibility that the jackpot result may be obtained in the lottery based on the winning in the upper operation opening 83a. In such a case, it is possible to substitute a display unit other than the display unit on the winning side for notifying the winning result, but this can be a cause for the player's confusion. On the other hand, when the variable display of the symbols is performed in the process of displaying the lottery result, the variable display of the symbols is duplicated on both display parts, and the information provided to the player becomes excessive. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, when the jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 83a during the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the first display If the symbols corresponding to the winning results are displayed in a stopped state in the club, and the jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the lower working opening 83b during the first normal gaming state, the second display portion is displayed. With the configuration in which the symbols corresponding to the winning result are displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment described above, the background display function is added to the second display unit, but it is sufficient as long as it has the function of executing the game display symbol display related to at least the lower operation opening 83b, the background. The display function can be omitted.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the sidelight 728 of the second display unit is turned on during the first normal game state, but the sidelight 728 is turned off during the first normal game state. May be

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, when one of the first display unit and the second display unit is performing variable display of symbols, the other is not performing variable display of symbols (specifically, the rotating body No light is supplied even if the lens is rotating), but the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which variable display of symbols in each display unit is performed in parallel.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability mode by a lottery based on a ball entering the operation openings 83a and 83b, but in the present embodiment, the operation is performed. A configuration that shifts to the high probability mode when a ball enters the advantageous ball portion provided in the variable winning device 82 during the special game state that is shifted by the lottery based on the ball entering the mouths 83a and 83b The configuration is different from that of the first embodiment in that, and the feature is that the configuration of the right route of the game area PE is partially devised in accordance with such difference in playability. I have one. Specifically, the distribution unit 810 built in the variable winning device 82 arranged on the right route, and the stage unit 830 arranged at the upstream position (obliquely above) of the variable winning device 82 on the right route. The configuration is different from that of the first embodiment in that a game mechanism 800 composed of is provided. The game mechanism 800 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. 63 is a schematic view showing the game mechanism 800, FIG. 64 is a schematic view of the stage portion of the distribution unit 810 seen from above, FIG. 65 is a schematic view showing various states of the distribution unit, and FIG. 66 is a stage unit 830. It is a schematic diagram. Note that, in FIG. 63, the distribution unit 810 and the stage unit 830 are illustrated as being arranged side by side for convenience of description.

(Distribution unit 810)
First, the distribution unit 810 shown on the right side of FIG. 63 will be described. The distribution unit has a stage portion 811 formed so that the game ball can roll. The stage portion 811 is provided with a first entrance 812, a second entrance 813, and a third entrance 814 as entrances through which game balls can pass (see FIG. 64). Each of the ball entrances 812 to 814 is open upward and is slightly larger than the game ball. The first entrance 812 is connected to the first branch passage 818, which is the disadvantageous path, through the first communication passage 815, and the second entrance 813 is also the first branch passage 818 through the second communication passage 816. Connected to. On the other hand, the third ball entrance 814 is connected to the second branch passage portion 819 (the above-mentioned advantageous ball portion) which is the advantageous side passage through the third communication passage 817.

When a game ball enters the first branch passage portion 818 during the special game state, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. On the other hand, when a ball enters the second branch passage portion 819 during the special game state, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player and the normal game state shifts after the special game state ends. At, the lottery mode becomes high probability mode. In this way, the second branch passage portion 819 is preferentially treated so as to be advantageous to the player over the first branch passage portion 818, so that the player receives the third game ball that has flown into the variable winning device 82. It is assumed that a game is performed in the expectation that the player will enter the entrance 814.

The stage portion 811 is inclined downward toward each of the ball entrances 812 to 814, and enters the ball entrance 812 to 814 in the process of rolling on the stage part 811 along the tilt. .. The stage portion 811 is surrounded by the wall surface of the housing of the variable winning device 82. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the stage portion 811 from leaving the stage portion 811 through other than the ball entrances 812 to 814.

The distribution unit 810 is provided with a movable body 821 as a regulation unit that regulates a ball entering the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813. The movable body 821 has a base portion 822 located below the stage portion 811, and a first columnar portion 823 and a second columnar portion 824 that stand upright from the base portion 822.

The tip portion of the first columnar portion 823 is inserted into the first communication passage 815 from below, and the upper surface 823a of the first columnar portion 823 forms a part of the bottom surface of the first communication passage 815. Further, the tip of the second columnar section 824 is also inserted into the second communication passage 816 from below, and the upper surface 824a of the second columnar section 824 forms a part of the bottom surface of the second communication passage 816. ing.

The movable body 821 is held by the housing of the variable winning device 82 so as to be able to move up and down. In the state where the movable body 821 is on standby at the lower limit position shown in FIG. 65(a), it is possible to enter the game ball into the first entrance 812 and the second entrance 813, and the stage unit. The probability that a game ball that has reached 811 will enter the third entrance slot 814 on the advantageous side is approximately 1/3.

On the other hand, in the state where the movable body 821 is on standby at the upper limit position shown in FIG. 65(b), entry into the first entry port 812 and the second entry port 813 is restricted. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage portion 811 is complemented by the upper surfaces 823a and 824a of the columnar portions 823 and 824, and the game ball rolling toward the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813 is They pass through the first entrance 812 and the second entrance 813. As a result, the probability that the game ball that has reached the stage portion 811 will enter the third entrance opening 814 on the advantageous side is about 1/1.

One of the features of the present embodiment is that the standby unit that waits at the upper limit position when the movable body 821 moves to the upper limit position is diversified by using the stage unit 830. Hereinafter, the stage unit 830 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63, the stage unit 830 has a stage portion 831 on which a game ball rolls similarly to the sorting unit 810, and a part of the game ball flowing down the right route, specifically, the right route. The game ball that has flowed into the special ball entrance 88 provided is guided to the stage portion 831.

The stage portion 831 has a mortar shape that gently inclines downward toward the center portion thereof, and a central opening 832 that is open upward is formed in the center portion (see FIG. 56(b)). .. The game ball guided to the stage portion 831 approaches the central opening 832 while rotating around the central opening 832, and flows into the central opening 832.

The central opening 832 constitutes an inlet portion of the discharge passage 833 of the game ball in the stage portion 831. The discharge passage 833 extends in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has passed through the discharge passage 833 flows into the guide passage 836 provided below the discharge passage 833, and the variable winning device via the guide passage 836. You will be guided to a position directly above 82. In other words, among the game balls that have been launched to the right route, those that have passed through the stage unit 830 have room for entering the variable winning device 82.

The stage unit 830 is held so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction like the movable body 821, and an upper limit position and a lower limit position are defined by a stopper 834 attached to the stage unit 830. Although illustration is omitted, the stage unit 830 is urged to the upper limit position by the urging means (more specifically, a spring member), and stands by at the upper limit position when the game ball is not placed on the stage portion 831. It is composed. However, when at least one game ball is placed on the stage portion 831, the stage unit 830 descends due to the weight of the game ball against the biasing force of the biasing means. It should be noted that the movement exceeding the lower limit position is blocked by the stopper 834.

The movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 shown in the present embodiment and the stage unit 830 are connected via a link member 840. The link member 840 is rotatably pivotally supported at an intermediate position between the movable body 821 and the stage unit 830, and pivots around this pivotally supported location (center axis CL2). In addition, the pivotally supported portion is set to be offset toward the movable body 821. This is a device for reducing the force required to move the movable body 821 up and down.

When the stage unit 830 located on the one end side of the link member 840 descends, the movable body 821 located on the other end side of the link member 840 rises in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the stage unit 830 moves up, the movable body 821 moves down in conjunction with it. Here, with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the flow of the game in the special game state is illustrated.

When shifting to the special game state, the variable winning device 82 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the right route flows into the special winning opening. The game balls flowing into the special winning opening are guided to the stage portion 811 of the sorting unit 810.

As shown in FIG. 67, in a situation where the game ball is not placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 (a situation where the game ball is not stopped), the first entrance 812 and the second entrance 813 of the distribution unit 810. Are open, and the probability of entering the third entrance opening 814 on the advantageous side is about 1/3.

When a game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830, the game ball pushes the stage unit 830 to the lower limit position, and in conjunction with this, the movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 moves to the upper limit position. Moving. In this state, as shown in FIG. 68, it is impossible to enter the first entrance 812 and the second entrance 813, and the entrance destination is substantially narrowed to the third entrance 814. Become. In other words, the probability of entering the third entrance 814, which is the advantageous side, is temporarily 1/1.

As shown in FIG. 68→FIG. 67, when the game ball located on the stage portion 831 is separated from the stage unit 830 through the central opening 832, the urging force causes the stage unit 830 to return to the upper limit position. In conjunction with this, the movable body 821 returns to the lower limit position, and the support for the entrance of the movable body 821 into the third entrance 814 is completed.

Here, although the game ball rolling on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 is finally discharged from the stage portion 831 through the central opening 832, the stay period in the stage portion 831 varies. That is, the length of stay varies depending on subtle differences such as the moving speed and the landing position when reaching the stage portion 831. Therefore, the period during which the movable body 821 supports the ball entering the third ball inlet 814 varies in length.

The stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 shown in the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of game balls can roll (stay) at the same time, and a plurality of game balls pass through the central opening 832 at the same time. The size is impossible. As a result, a plurality of game balls are placed on the stage portion 831, so that the period of the ball support is extended. Therefore, in the special game state, the game is played in the expectation that as many game balls as possible are guided to the stage portion 831.

In the distribution unit 810 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball is placed on the upper surfaces 823a and 824a, the movable body 821 tries to descend due to the weight of the game ball, so that the support period is reduced. May be shortened. However, the area of the stage portion 831 is larger than the total area of the upper surfaces 823a and 824a of the columnar portions 823 and 824 of the movable body 821. This suppresses the frequent occurrence of the above-mentioned events.

When the game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830, the movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 is displaced from the lower limit position to the upper limit position, and when the game ball is separated from the stage portion 831, the movable body 821 is moved from the upper limit position. Return to the lower limit position. Here, a difference occurs in the stay period of staying in the stage portion 831 according to the rolling mode of the game ball in the stage portion 831 (for example, the rolling direction or rolling speed of the gaming ball). That is, the period in which the movable body 821 is located at the upper limit position depends on the stay period. By suppressing the movement of the game mechanism 800 from becoming monotonous in this way, it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

The movable body 821 is displaced to the lower limit position/upper limit position in conjunction with the raising/lowering operation of the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830. Here, by setting the operation direction of the stage portion 831 to be up and down, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the game ball from changing due to the movement of the stage portion 831. This is preferable for alleviating the bias of the waiting period in which the game ball waits on the stage portion 831.

In the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to raise and lower the stage unit 830, the driving force depends on the weight of the game ball. As shown in the present embodiment, the stage unit 830 is disposed on one end side of the link member 840 that is rotatably held, and the movable body 821 is disposed on the other end side thereof so that the stage unit 830 and the movable unit 830 are movable. By forming the body 821 so that the movement of the body 821 alternates up and down, it is possible to reduce output transmission loss. This is preferable in order to increase the certainty of the operation of the game mechanism 800 on the assumption that the driving force is small.

The stage portion 831 is formed so that a plurality of game balls can roll at the same time. In the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used as power for displacing the movable body 821 as described above, the displacement speed (responsiveness) can be changed depending on the number of game balls that can be located on the stage portion 831. If the responsiveness is changed according to the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of the period in which the movable body 821 is maintained at the upper limit position.

The discharge passage 833 formed in the stage unit 830 extends vertically from the central opening 832 and serves as a vertical passage. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid delaying the return of the stage unit 830 to the standby position due to being pushed by the game ball passing through the discharge passage 833 or the like. This can contribute to improvement in responsiveness when the movable body 821 is displaced to the lower limit position/upper limit position.

The central opening 832 has a size such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through at the same time. For this reason, when a plurality of game balls roll on the stage portion 831, those game balls are sequentially separated from the stage portion 831, and it is possible to avoid the separation at once. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the period (for example, the action period) in which the movable body 821 waits at the upper limit position according to the number of game balls located on the stage portion 831.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the movable body 821 is arranged at the upper limit position, the upper surfaces 823a and 824a of the columnar parts 823 and 824 complement the rolling surface of the game ball in the stage part 811. , But is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 69, when the movable body 821A is arranged at the upper limit position, the columnar portions 823A and 824A are configured to project above the rolling surface of the game ball in the stage portion 811. It is also possible. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the game ball is placed on the upper surfaces 823aA and 824aA of the columnar portions 823A and 824A while restricting the balls entering the ball entrances 812A and 813A.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 821 of the sorting unit 810 is aligned with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the stage unit 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 70, a shutter 825B that opens and closes the ball entrance 812B and a biasing unit that biases the shutter 825B to the closed position are added, and the shutter 825B raises the movable body 821B. Accordingly, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it slides from the closed position to the open position against the biasing force of the biasing means. With such a configuration, even if the game ball is placed on the shutter 825B, it is possible to prevent the movable body 821B from being pushed down due to its weight.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the game ball that has entered the special ball inlet 88 provided on the right route is guided to the stage unit 830 (stage portion 831). In order to increase the variation in the moving speed of the game balls guided to the stage portion 831, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 71, it is preferable to incline the communication passage 88bC that connects the special ball entrance 88C and the stage portion 831. .. There is a difference in behavior between the case where the game ball flows in from the same side as the inclination direction with respect to the opening 88aC of the special ball entrance 88C and the case where the game ball flows in from the side opposite to the inclination direction. Since the former is less likely to reduce the momentum of inflow of the game balls than the latter, the difference in the moving speed when reaching the stage portion 831 can be made remarkable. This is preferable for increasing the width of the support period of the movable body 821.

In addition, in order to provide a difference in moving speed, the communication passage 88bC can be changed as follows. That is, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 72(a), the communication passage 88bD is branched into the first branch passage 88cD and the second branch passage 88dD at an intermediate position, and the game ball is placed at the branch position in the first branch passage. The distribution means 88gD for distributing to 88cD and the second branch passage 88dD is arranged. And the deceleration parts 88eD and 88fD which decelerate a game ball are each arrange|positioned in the 1st branch passage 88cD and the 2nd branch passage 88dD, and the difference in the moving speed of the game ball at the time of passing each branch passage 88cD and 88dD. It should be raised.

It should be noted that this concept may be applied to the stage portion 831 to cause a difference according to the flow path in the stay period of the game ball on the stage portion 831.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 has a mortar shape to diversify the stay period of the game balls, but a specific configuration for providing a difference in the stay period is arbitrary. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 72(b1), the stage unit 830E is provided with a first flow passage 88cE having a relatively short required passage time and a second flow passage 88dE having a relatively long passage time, and the flow passing through the stage unit 830E is increased. It is also possible to adopt a structure in which the length of stay varies depending on the road. In this case, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of the stay period by allowing the game sphere to move from one of the first flow passage 88cE and the second flow passage 88dE to the other. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 72(b2), the first flow passage 88cE is offset above the second flow passage 88dE, and the rolling surface of the game ball in the first flow passage 88cE is set to the second side. It is preferable to incline downward to the flow path 88dE side.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, one game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 to start the descent of the stage unit 830, but the game ball that triggers the descent starts. The number of is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that two game balls are placed to start the descent, or three or more game balls are placed to start the descent.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration in which the mode shifts to the high-probability mode based on the entrance into the third entrance 814 is illustrated, but at least the entrances 812 to 814 are provided with a difference in degree of advantage. If there is enough, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the round game in the special game state is continued by entering the third entrance 814. Further, the distribution unit does not have to be applied to the variable winning device 82, and may be provided separately from the variable winning device 82. In this case, the big hit lottery is executed when the first entrance 812 and the second entrance 813 are entered, and the big hit is determined when the third entrance 814 is entered. It is also possible.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a difference in the degree of advantage is provided so that the third entrance 814 is more advantageous to the player than the first entrance 812 and the second entrance 813, but this relationship It is also possible to reverse. That is, a difference in the degree of advantage may be provided so that the third ball entrance 814 is more disadvantageous to the player than the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813.

<Modification 8>
It suffices if the movable body is configured to be in the operating state over the period in which the game ball is staying on the stage unit 830, and its action is not necessarily "game ball distribution". There is no. For example, a configuration corresponding to the stage unit 830 may be applied for the operation of the movable decorative object for performance.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the back block (specifically, the variable display unit) of the game board unit is different from that of the first embodiment. The variable display unit 900F according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 73 is a perspective view of the back block 80bF of the game board unit seen from the front of the game machine, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the back block 80bF disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 75 is a variable display unit 900F from the front of the game machine. 76 is a front view of the variable display unit 900F.

As shown in FIG. 73, the rear block 80bF has a mounting base 851F that covers the front block (game board) from the rear side, and the variable display unit 900F is mounted on the mounting base 851F from the front side. A game board unit is constructed by fixing the mounting base 851F to the front block. In addition to the variable display unit 900F, other game components such as a collecting mechanism for collecting the game balls discharged from the game area PE are mounted on the back block 80bF, but in FIGS. Illustration of game parts is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, with respect to the variable display unit 900F shown in the present embodiment, a drum device 920F (corresponding to a “pattern display device”) as a symbol display device and an effect linked with the drum device 920F (described later). A production device 950F (corresponding to a "movable production device" or a "light production device") for performing the second special production), and a housing 901F for accommodating the drum device 920F and the production device 950F are provided. When the variable display unit 900F is fixed to the front block (game board), the drum device 920F and the effect device 950F are visible from the front of the game machine through the central opening of the game board.

In the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the variable display unit 900F faces the glass panel 23 (corresponding to the "panel portion") of the front door frame 14 and the variable display unit 900F is protected by the glass panel 23. However, a transparent cover or the like for the variable display unit 900F may be provided between the variable display unit 900F and the glass panel 23, and the variable display unit 900F may be protected by the transparent cover.

As shown in FIG. 75, the drum device 920F includes a plurality of (specifically, three) drum units 923F arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a drum unit 923F that changes the arrangement (positional relationship) of the drum units 923F. A variable mechanism 931F (corresponding to "moving means") capable of changing the display form of the device 920F is included. For each drum unit 923F, a drum 925F in which an annular sheet material 941F in which a plurality of symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction are fixed to a frame 942F, and a holder 924F as a holding unit that holds the drum 925F are combined. It is common in that it is done.

Regarding the frame 942F, a tubular annular portion 943F that faces the sheet material 941F from the inside of the drum unit 923F, a rotation center portion of the drum unit 923F, and a plurality of spoke portions that connect the annular portion 943F and the rotation center portion. The sheet material 941F is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 943F. Note that the frame 942F in the present embodiment is made of a transparent resin having a light-transmitting property, and the annular portion 943F functions as a light guide portion that guides light from a side light described later to the sheet material 941F.

The holder 924F includes a stepping motor that is a driving unit for the drum 925F, a position detection sensor that detects the rotational position of the drum 925F, and a sidelight 928F that is a light supply unit that supplies light to the end surface of the frame 942F (annular portion 943F). Is installed. Although details will be described later, light emission that emits light in the radial direction of the rotation center axis of the drum 925F (front of the gaming machine) in the portion of the annular portion 943F of the frame 942F facing the sheet material 941F from the inside. The sheet material 941F is irradiated with the light supplied from the sidelight 928F by being emitted from the light emitting portion.

The sheet material 941F has a light-transmitting property, and the pattern attached to the sheet material 941F is brightly emitted (lighted and displayed) by the light from the sidelight 928F. More specifically, the sheet material 941F has an opaque and light-transmitting base portion, and the design is printed on the outer surface portion of the base portion. For these symbols, although the discriminating property is lowered, the symbols can be discriminated even when the sheet material 941F is viewed from the side opposite to the printing surface side (inner surface side).

The types and arrangements of the symbols given to the sheet material 941F are the same as the types and arrangements of the symbols displayed on the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Therefore, the description will be omitted. Further, the valid line in which each symbol is stopped and displayed is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the left drum unit (hereinafter, left drum unit 923LF) and the right drum unit (hereinafter, right drum unit 923RF) have the same basic configuration, but the central drum unit (hereinafter, middle drum unit 923MF). 2) is partially different in configuration from the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF. Hereinafter, each drum unit 923LF, 923MF, 923RF will be described.

The holders 924LF and 924RF that form the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF have planar side surface portions 945LF and 945RF that face the drums 925LF and 925RF from the side, and have a box shape opened to the front of the gaming machine. I am doing it. The holders 924LF and 924RF have a light-shielding property, and various structures such as the built-in stepping motor are hidden so that they cannot be visually recognized from the outside.

Regarding the holder 924MF of the middle drum unit 923MF, one of the left and right side surface portions 946MF is omitted. Specifically, the frame 942MF is arranged so that the spokes are biased toward the left side end with the sheet material 941F facing the front side, and the side surface on the same side (left side) as the spokes. Is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the variable mechanism 931F is provided as means for changing the display form of the drum device 920F by changing the arrangement (positional relationship) of the left drum unit 923LF, the middle drum unit 923MF, and the right drum unit 923RF. It is one of the features. The variable mechanism 931F will be described below with reference to the schematic view of FIG.

(Variable mechanism 931F)
The variable mechanism 931F has a pair of slide rails 933F and 934F arranged above and below the drum unit 923F, and the respective drum units 923LF, 923MF and 923RF are slidably held by these slide rails 933F and 934F. .. More specifically, the slide rails 933F and 934F hold the left drum unit 923LF so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) and the right drum unit 923RF so as to be slidably moved in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). The right rail section and the middle rail section that holds the middle drum unit 923MF so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction).

The left rail portion is provided with a stopper that defines the sliding range of the left drum unit 923LF. Specifically, the left rail portion is provided with a stopper that defines the left limit position of the left drum unit 923LF and a stopper that defines the center position. Further, the right rail portion is provided with a stopper that defines the sliding range of the right drum unit 923RF. Specifically, the right rail portion is provided with a stopper that defines the right limit position of the right drum unit 923RF and a stopper that defines the center position.

The middle rail portion is provided with a stopper that defines the sliding range of the middle drum unit 923MF. Specifically, the middle rail portion is provided with a stopper that defines a front position of the middle drum unit 923MF and a stopper that defines a rear position of the middle drum unit 923MF. When the middle drum unit 923MF moves along the middle rail portion, the direction (posture) of the middle drum unit 923MF changes in the process. Specifically, the rotation center axis line CL2 of the middle drum unit 923MF faces the left-right direction in the front position, and the rotation center axis line CL2 of the middle drum unit 923MF faces the front-rear direction in the rear position position. The direction changes like.

The variable mechanism 931F has a unit drive unit 932F (more specifically, a motor) and a link unit that transmits the power of the unit drive unit 932F to the left drum unit 923LF, the middle drum unit 923MF, and the right drum unit 923RF. The unit drive unit 932F is connected to the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140, and the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 controls the drive of the unit drive unit 932F. By this drive control, the display form of the drum device 920F is switched between the first form (corresponding to the "first display form") and the second form (corresponding to the "second display form"). Here, each display mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77(a) shows the drum device 920F in the first form, and FIGS. 77(b) and 78 show the drum device 920F in the second form.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, as one of the variable display patterns of the symbols in the drum device 920F, a special effect accompanied by switching the display form of the drum device 920F is provided. The display mode of the drum device 920F is switched from the first mode to the second mode when this special effect is executed, and is switched from the second mode to the first mode when the special effect is finished. In the present embodiment, the scroll display of symbols in the first embodiment corresponds to the “high identification display mode”, and the scroll display of symbols in the second mode corresponds to the “low identification display mode”.

In the first embodiment shown in FIG. 77(a), the drum units 923F are arranged laterally side by side, and the rotation center axis lines CL1 to CL3 of the drum units 923F are located on the axis line extending in the left-right direction. .. In the first embodiment, the display position of the symbol on each drum unit 923F faces the front of the gaming machine. In the following description, the orientation of the drum unit 923F when the rotation center axis lines CL1 to CL3 are oriented in the left-right direction is also referred to as “vertical orientation”.

At the start of the special effect, the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 outputs a drive signal for starting the special effect to the unit drive unit 932F, so that the unit drive unit 932F rotates in the forward direction. As a result, the left drum unit 923LF slides from the center position to the left limit position, the right drum unit 923RF slides from the center position to the right limit position, and the middle drum unit 923MF slides from the front position to the rear position. These movements are synchronized, and by making all of them proceed at the same time, the extension of the time required for switching the display form is suppressed. This is preferable in order to enhance the impact of switching the display form.

In particular, the direction of the middle drum unit 923MF is also changed with the slide movement in the first half portion of the movement range from the front position to the rear position. Specifically, when viewed from above, it rotates 90° counterclockwise, and the display position of the symbol faces the side of the gaming machine or the like. In the following description, the direction of the middle drum unit 923MF when the rotation center axis line CL2 faces the front-rear direction in this way is referred to as “sideways”.

When the orientation of the middle drum unit 923MF is changed from “vertical orientation” to “horizontal orientation”, the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF move toward the side away from the middle drum unit 923MF, and thus the middle drum unit 923MF and the left and right drum units 923LF. , 923RF interference is avoided. In either case of the first form and the second form, the postures of the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF are different from the middle drum unit 923MF in that the postures are maintained in the “vertical direction”.

In the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 77(b) and 78, the distance between the left and right drum units 923LF, 923RF is larger than that in the first embodiment, and the left and right drum units 923LF, 923RF are laterally oriented. An arrangement area for the drum unit 923MF is secured. Since the middle drum unit 923MF is turned sideways, the above-mentioned spokes face the front side of the gaming machine, and the sheet material 941MF can be visually recognized through the gap formed between the spokes.

As described above, the sheet material 941MF shown in the present embodiment has a light-transmitting property, and although the visibility is lower than that in the first embodiment, the pattern given to the sheet material 941MF is the same as the sheet material 941MF. It can be visually confirmed from the inner surface side of the 941MF. That is, as described above, the holder 924MF of the middle drum unit 923MF is not provided with the side surface on the spoke side and the frame 942MF is of the spoke type, so that the visibility of the symbol given to the sheet material 941MF can be improved even in the second embodiment. It is a device to secure it.

The range visible from the front of the game machine in the symbol row of each drum unit 923F is partitioned by a pair of upper and lower partition parts such as decorations (see FIG. 77, etc.). As a result, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of symbols that can be seen at one time is limited to 3 to 4 for any symbol row. However, in the second mode, the partition section attached to the middle drum unit 923MF moves following the posture change (“longitudinal direction”→“horizontal direction”) of the middle drum unit 923MF, and thus in the second mode. It is also possible to visually recognize symbols located outside the range partitioned by the parts. In other words, in the second mode, the restriction function of the partition section is substantially invalidated, and the distinguishability of each symbol is reduced, but the maximum number of symbols that can be seen at once in the middle symbol row is larger than that in the first mode. It is configured to increase.

Here, each of the drum units 923F is configured such that the lateral width (size in the direction of the rotation center axis) is smaller than the front-rear width (diameter about the rotation center axis). When the middle drum unit 923MF changes direction and retracts by switching from the first form to the second form, a space is formed in front of the middle drum unit 923MF and between the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF. ..

Each of the drum units 923F is configured such that the lateral width (size in the direction of the rotation center axis) is smaller than the front-rear width (diameter about the rotation center axis). By switching from the first form to the second form, the middle drum unit 923MF changes its posture from "vertical" to "horizontal". This is a device for reducing the sliding amount (moving amount) of the middle drum unit 923MF when forming the above-described gap.

At the front end portions of the side surface portions 945LF, 945RF of the left and right drum units 923LF, 923RF, there are cover portions 946LF, 946RF for covering the boundary portion (gap) between the left and right drum units 923LF, 923RF and the central drum unit 923MF from the front of the gaming machine. Are formed (see, for example, FIG. 76 ). The left and right drum units 923LF and 923RL can be slid to the left and right so that the clearance between the left and right drum units 923LF and 923MF becomes large. By preliminarily ensuring a gap between the drum unit 923F and the central drum unit 923F, the appearance of the drum device 920F is suppressed from being deteriorated while smoothing the switching from the first form to the second form.

When the special effect ends, the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 outputs a drive signal for ending the special effect to the unit drive unit 932F, whereby the unit drive unit 932F rotates in the opposite direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77(b)→FIG. 77(a), the left drum unit 923LF moves from the left limit position to the center position, the right drum unit 923RF moves from the right limit position to the center position, and the middle drum unit 923MF moves from the rear position. Slide each to the previous position. By synchronizing these movements (simultaneous progress), the time required for switching the display form is shortened. This is preferable in order to enhance the impact of switching the display form.

In particular, the direction of the middle drum unit 923M is changed along with the slide movement in the latter half of the movement range from the rear position to the front position. Specifically, when viewed from above, it rotates 90° in the clockwise direction, and the display portion of the symbol faces the front of the gaming machine. In this way, by completing the switching from the second form to the first form, the voids formed in the second form disappear.

As the special effects shown in the present embodiment, a first special effect and a second special effect having a higher jackpot expectation than the first special effect are provided. The variable display unit 900F is equipped with a movable effect device 950F that operates according to the switching of the display form of the drum device 920F when the second special effect is executed. The production device 950F and the configuration related thereto will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75, 76, and 79. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the rendering device 950F.

(Direction device 950F)
As shown in FIG. 75, the upper slide rail 933F fixed to the upper portion of the housing 901F is located above the rear portion of the drum unit 923F. The effect device 950F is arranged so as to cover at least a part of the upper slide rail 933F from the front side of the gaming machine. The rendering device 950F is fixed to a support arm formed in the housing 901, is aligned with the upper slide rail 933F in the front-rear direction, and faces the drum unit 923F from above. With such an arrangement, when the drum device 920F and the rendering device 950F are used together, the occupied area of the variable display unit 900F is suppressed from increasing.

The rendering device 950F includes a frame 953F that is an object to be attached to the housing 901F (the support arm), a movable block 951F that is vertically movable with respect to the frame 953F, and an elevating device 952F that elevates the movable block 951F. I have it.

The frame 953F is provided with a stopper that defines the moving range of the movable block 951F, and in the state of being arranged at the upper limit position (hereinafter referred to as the retracted position) defined by the stopper, the drum unit 923F and the drum unit 923F when viewed from the front of the game machine. In the state in which the overlap is avoided and the game machine is arranged at the lower limit position (hereinafter referred to as the effect position), the drum unit 923F and the drum unit 923F are overlapped from the front side of the gaming machine in a front view (see a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 76). ..

The effect device 950F is provided with a height position detection sensor for detecting a height position for the movable block 951F, and a lock device for restricting movement (descent) of the movable block 951F from the retracted position. However, illustration of these various configurations is omitted.

The elevating device 952F has an elevating drive unit 961F (motor) that generates an elevating drive force, and the elevating drive unit 961F is connected to the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140. The MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 outputs a drive signal to the lift drive unit 961F in accordance with the progress of the game times related to the second special effect.

As shown in FIG. 79(a)→FIG. 79(b), when moving the movable block 951F from the retracted position to the effect position, after the restriction by the lock device is released, a drive signal is sent to the lifting drive unit 961F. Is output. This causes the movable block 951F to move to the effect position.

As shown in FIG. 76, the movable block 951F has a base body 955F and a rotating body 956F rotatably held by the base body 955F. The base body 955F has a built-in rotation drive unit that generates a drive force for rotation of the rotating body 956F, and this rotation drive unit is connected to the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140. The MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 outputs a drive signal to the rotation drive unit in accordance with the progress of the game times related to the second special effect.

The rotating body 956F has an arm portion 959F extending from the rotation center portion 958F to the left and right, and a light emitting substrate in which a large number of light emitting bodies 971F (LEDs) are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 956F is housed therein. There is. A large number of pores are formed on the front surface of the rotating body 956F in accordance with each light emitting body 971F, and the light from the light emitting body 971F is emitted to the front of the game machine through these pores.

The light emitting substrate is connected to the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140, and the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 controls the turning on/off of each light emitting body 971F according to the rotational position of the rotating body. That is, the rendering device 950F functions as a display device for displaying characters and patterns in the air.

Hereinafter, the movements of the drum device 920F and the effect device 950F when the second special effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81.

When the second special effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the display form of the drum device 920F is the first form, and the movable block 951F of the effect device 950F is arranged at the retracted position. When the second special effect is executed, the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form, as shown in FIG. 80(b). After that, the movable block 951F of the rendering device 950F descends from the retracted position to the rendering position, and characters and patterns are displayed in front of the middle drum unit 923MF by the rotation operation and light emission of the rotating body 956F (hereinafter, referred to as special light emission display. ).

It should be noted that there are three types of characters and patterns displayed by the rendering device 950F: "girl's face", "fish school", and "V", and "girl's face" <"fish school" <The letters “V” are differentiated in order of increasing jackpot expectation.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the state where the movable block 951F is arranged at the effect position, most of the middle drum unit 923MF (specifically, the drum 925F) is covered by the movable block 951F, but one of the drum units 923F is covered. The part is visible. Then, when the special light emission display is executed by the rendering device 950F, the visibility of the middle drum unit 923MF through the gap of the rotating body 956F is ensured. Although details will be described later, the rotation of the middle drum unit 923MF is continued even during the special light emission display. The player can understand that the rotation of the middle drum unit 923MF is continued from the movement of the spoke portion and the movement of the pattern of the sheet material 941MF. That is, although the visibility of the middle symbol row is lower than that in the first display mode, the middle symbols can be visually recognized even in the second display mode.

At the end of the second special effect, the rotating body 956F stops at the standby position (sideways posture), and the movable block 951F moves from the effect position to the retracted position. After that, the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the second form to the first form.

When performing special light emission display by the light emitting type production device 950F, the movable block 951F (rotating body 956F) is illuminated with light such as illumination of a game hall, or light from a lamp portion or the like in a game machine. Is not preferable because it becomes a factor that reduces the visibility of the special light emission display. One of the features of the present embodiment is that measures are taken to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. The device will be described below with reference to FIG. 82.

As shown in FIG. 82A, in the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF, holders 924LF and 924RF are provided for the frames 942LF and 942RF (specifically, annular portions 943LF and 943RF) through which light from the sidelights 928LF and 928RF passes. It is sandwiched between the side surface portions 945LF and 945RF, and light leakage to the side of the middle drum unit 923MF is avoided. Regarding the middle drum unit 923MF, in order to expose the spoke portion in the second embodiment, one side surface portion is not provided, but the light from the sidelight 928MF is blocked by the side surface portion 945LF of the left drum unit 923LF. The influence of the light is avoided and the visibility of the left symbol row is avoided.

As shown in FIG. 82(a)→FIG. 82(b), when the display form of the drum device 920F is changed from the first form to the second form, the side light 928M of the middle drum unit 923MF faces the front of the gaming machine. It will be. In this situation, the sidelight 928MF is turned off. As a result, the recess formed by the three drum units 923F, that is, the void surrounded by the three drum units 923F on three sides becomes a dark place where light hardly reaches.
By utilizing this dark place as an operation area (display area for special light emission display) of the rendering device 950F, the visibility of the special light emission display can be improved.

When using a plurality of drum units 923F together, making the visibility of each drum unit 923F (each symbol row) to the same degree is to prevent misidentification of symbol combinations (game results) and to reduce the burden on the eyes of the player. preferable. It is also preferable to bring the drum unit 923F closer to the glass panel 23 in order to improve the visibility of the symbol row. However, in such a configuration, the gap between the drum unit 923F and the glass panel 23 is small, and therefore, the configuration-related restrictions are large in performing display effects and the like between them. In addition, when trying to secure the operation area of the effect device around the drum device 920F, it is difficult to keep the display effect and the symbol in the same field of view due to the fact that the distance from the player to the drum device 920F becomes short. Is supposed to be. In this respect, as described in the present embodiment, by partially retracting the drum unit 923 to form the operation area for the rendering device 950F, the above-described various problems can be suitably solved.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display effect (game time effect) by the variable display unit 900F will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. 83.

(Electrical structure related to display effect)
The notification/effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the display lamps 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the speaker 29, and the variable display provided on the game board unit 80F. It controls the unit 900F. In particular, in the notification and effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, an effect mode in each game time, for example, an outline of a variable display mode of symbols in the variable display unit 900F (for example, whether or not reach is generated and It has a function of determining the content of the reach effect) and the stop display mode of the symbol (the kind of the combination of symbols finally displayed for stop (confirmed display) at the end of the variable display).

The unit position detection sensor 913F and the rotational position detection sensor 927F of the drum device 920F are connected to the input side of the notification/effect control device 140. The MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 grasps the position of each drum unit 923F based on the detection information (detection signal) from the unit position detection sensor 913F, and based on the detection information (detection signal) from the rotational position detection sensor 927F. It is possible to grasp the rotational position (designation position) of each drum 925F.

The unit drive unit 912F, the stepping motor 926F, and the sidelight 928F of the drum device 920F are connected to the output side of the notification/effect control device 140. In the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140, the display form of the drum device 920F is switched to the first form/second form by the drive control of the unit drive unit 912F, and each drum 925F is rotated/stopped by the drive control of the stepping motor 926F. Then, the visibility of the design is changed by controlling the light emission of the side light 928F.

Further, the height position detection sensor 964F and the rotational position detection sensor 965F of the production device 950F are connected to the input side of the notification/production control device 140. The MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 grasps the height position (production position/retraction position) of the movable block 951F based on the detection information (detection signal) from the height position detection sensor 964F, and detects the rotation position detection sensor 965F. It is possible to grasp the rotational position (orientation) of the rotating body 956F based on the detection information (detection signal) from.

The raising/lowering drive unit 961F, the rotation drive unit 962F, and the light emitting substrate 963F of the effect device 950F are connected to the output side of the notification/effect control device 140. In the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140, the height position of the movable block 951F is switched to the retracted position/production position by the drive control of the lifting drive unit 961F, the drive control of the rotation drive unit 962F and the light emission control of the light emitting substrate 963F. Special light emission display is performed by.

Next, the variable display control process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described. The basic flow of the variable display control process in the present embodiment is the same as that of the variable display control process (see FIG. 31) shown in the first embodiment, but it is different from the configuration of the variable display unit. The processes of the parts (process during change and process for ending change) are different. First, the mid-change processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 87.

(Processing during fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 84, the changing process includes a control process for the drum device 920F (step S2401) and a control process for the effect device 950F (step S2402).

(Processing for drum device)
As shown in FIG. 85, in the drum device process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the left symbol. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2501, left drum stop processing is executed in step S2502, and processing for this drum device is terminated. In the left drum stop processing, the stepping motor 926LF for the left drum unit 923LF is drive-controlled so that the symbol determined in the fluctuation start processing stops on the effective line.

If a negative decision is made in step S2501, the operation proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether it is time to stop and display the right symbol. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, right drum stop processing is executed in step S2504, and processing for this drum device ends. In the right drum stop process, the stepping motor 926RF for the right drum unit 923RF is drive-controlled so that the symbol determined in the variation start process stops on the effective line.

If a negative decision is made in step S2503, the operation proceeds to step S2505. In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time related to special effects. Whether or not to execute the special effect is determined in the effect determination process in the variation start process. When a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process for the drum device is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2505, the display form switching process is executed in step S2506, and then the present drum device process is terminated. The display form switching process will be described below with reference to FIG. 86.

(Display mode switching process)
In the display form switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether the display form of the drum device 920F is the second form. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second form flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. When a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether it is the switching timing to the second mode. The switching timing is determined when it is determined that the special effect is performed in the effect determination process. When a negative determination is made in step S2602, the display mode switching process is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2602, the operation proceeds to step S2603 and the switching process to the second mode is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the unit drive unit 932F to rotate the unit drive unit 932F forward.

In the present embodiment, in a situation where the reach line is formed by the left and right symbols, at the timing when the symbol (middle symbol) that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result together with the symbols crosses the reach line. Switching from the first form to the second form is performed. In this way, by switching to the second mode under the situation where the player's attention is increasing, it is possible to prevent the movement from being overlooked.

The output of the drive signal started in step S2603 is stopped when it is determined that the switching to the second display mode is completed based on the detection information from the unit position detection sensor 913F. In a succeeding step S2604, the second form flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and the display form switching process is ended.

Returning to the description of step S2601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if the display form of the drum device 920F is the second display form, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, it is determined whether the return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 or the first special effect. The return flag is a flag stored when the movable block 951F of the rendering device 950F returns to the retracted position.

If the special effect this time is the second special effect and the return flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S2605, and the present display form switching process ends. If the special effect this time is the first special effect, or if it is the second special effect and the return flag is stored, an affirmative decision is made in step S2605 and the operation proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop the middle drum unit 923MF (middle pattern) in advance. When a negative determination is made in step S2606, the display mode switching process is ended as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the preceding stop processing of the middle drum unit 923MF (middle pattern) is executed in step S2607, and then this display form switching processing processing is ended. In the preceding stop process of the middle symbol, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing slightly before the timing at which the game result is clearly displayed on the operation port display section of the main display unit. However, at this point, the middle drum unit 923MF is in the horizontal direction, and it is difficult to specify which symbol is the symbol that moves to the effective position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the effect device processing in step S2402 will be described.

(Processing for production device)
In the effect device process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time related to the second special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the present production device processing is directly terminated. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2701, the operation proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the second form flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. When a negative determination is made in step S2702, the present production device processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2702, the operation proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, based on the detection information from the height position detection sensor 964F, it is determined whether or not the movable block 951F of the rendering device 950F is arranged at the rendering position. If a negative decision is made in step S2703, the operation proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether it is the descent timing to the effect position. This descent timing is determined when it is determined that the special effect is performed in the effect determination process.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the present production device processing is ended as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, the process for lowering to the effect position is executed in step S2705, and then the process for the present effect device is ended. In the descent processing to the effect position, first, the movement restriction of the movable block 951F by the lock device is released, and the output of the descent drive signal to the elevating drive unit 961F is started. As a result, the movable block 951F descends from the retracted position to the descended position.

Returning to the description of step S2703, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, that is, if the movable block 951F is located at the effect position, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the special light emission display. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2706, the operation proceeds to step S2707. In step S2707, rotation start processing is executed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the rotation drive unit 962F is started. In subsequent step S2708, light emission control start processing is executed. As a result, the light emitting body 971F mounted on the light emitting substrate 962 is turned on/off in a preset pattern.

If a negative decision is made in step S2706, the operation proceeds to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special light emission display. If a positive determination is made in step S2709, rotation stop and attitude control processing is executed in step S2701. By this processing, the rotator 956F is returned to the standby position (the lateral position). After that, the light emission control ending process is executed in step S2711, and the present production device process is ended. By turning off all the light emitters 971F in the light emission control ending process, the display of the characters and the patterns is ended.

If a negative decision is made in step S2709, the operation proceeds to step S2712. In step S2712, it is determined whether it is the return timing to the retracted position. If a negative determination is made in step S2712, the present production device processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2701, the operation proceeds to step S2713. In step S2713, return processing to the retracted position is executed. Specifically, output of a drive signal for raising to the ascending/descending drive unit 961F is started. After that, in step S2714, the return flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and the process for the present rendering device ends.

By outputting a drive signal to the lifting drive unit 961F, the movable block 951F rises from the effect position to the retracted position. When it is determined that the movable block 951F has returned to the retracted position based on the detection information from the height position detection sensor 964, the movement restriction by the lock device is restarted, and the drive signal to the lifting drive unit 961F is transmitted. Stop output.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 88, the fluctuation ending processing that constitutes the fluctuation display control processing will be described.

(Variation end processing)
In the fluctuation ending process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether the current game time is a game time related to special effects. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the middle drum stop processing is executed in step S2802, and then the present fluctuation ending processing is ended. In the middle drum stop processing, the stepping motor 926MF of the middle drum unit 923MF is stopped and controlled so that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2801, the operation proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, it is determined whether the special effect this time is the first special effect, or if the special effect is not the first special effect, the return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. When a negative determination is made in step S2803, this fluctuation ending process is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2803, the operation proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, a return process to the first mode is performed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the unit drive unit 932F to rotate the unit drive unit 932F in the reverse direction.

After that, in step S2805, after the various flags related to the special effect are erased, the variation ending process is ended.

Here, the flow of special effects will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the flow of special effects, (a) group of FIGS. 90 to 92 is a schematic view of the variable display unit 900F seen from above the gaming machine, and (b) groups of FIGS. 90 to 92 are variably displayed. It is the schematic which looked at unit 900F from the game machine front. In addition, in the group (a) of FIGS. 90 to 92, the glass panel 23 of the front door frame 14 is indicated by a two-dot chain line for convenience of description.

(First special effect)
First, the first special effect in which the drum device 920F and the effect device 950F are not linked will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, at the timing of tc1 when the game ball shot into the game area PE wins the operating ports 83a and 83b, variable display of the pattern is started on the operating port display portion of the main display unit 87. At the same time, all the left, middle and right drums 925F start to rotate accordingly. As a result, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each variably displayed (scroll display) (see group (1) in FIG. 90).

At the timing of tc2 after the start of the game game, the left symbol is stopped (the left drum 925LF is stopped), and at the timing of the subsequent tc3, the right symbol is stopped (the right drum 925RF is stopped). Since the first special effect corresponds to the reach display, at the timing of tc3, the reach line is formed on any of the activated lines by the left symbol and the right symbol which are stopped and displayed.

Reach line A symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result together with the left and right symbols that are formed, for example, if the left and right symbols are "7" symbols, the "7" symbol in the middle symbol sequence will pass the reach line. The display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form at the timing (timing of tc4) (see group (90) of FIG. 90, group (3) of FIG. 91). That is, the left and right drums 925LF and 925RF are slid to the side away from each other (the same direction as the effective line in the middle stage) while the rotation positions are fixed, and the middle drum 925MF is slid backward while changing the direction.

In this way, even when the display form is switched from the first form to the second form, the fluctuation of the middle symbol (the rotation of the middle drum 925MF) is continued. More specifically, the fluctuation speed is also kept constant. However, in the first embodiment, the display position of the symbol that was facing the front of the gaming machine on the middle drum 925MF is facing the side of the gaming machine, so the visibility of the symbol on the middle drum 925MF is reduced. Even in the second mode, although it is possible to confirm the middle symbols through the spokes of the frame 942MF, etc., it is difficult to identify each symbol as compared with the first mode.

At the timing of tc5 after switching to the second mode, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed (the middle drum 925MF is stopped). At the timing tc6 immediately after that, the variable display of the picture on the display portion for the operation port of the main display unit 87 is finished and the game result is clarified, and the drum device 920F is kept as it is while the rotating position of the middle drum 925MF is fixed. By switching the display form from the second form to the first form, the middle symbol which is being stopped and displayed is horizontally moved onto the reach line. Since this game time corresponds to the deviation result, the effective line (reach line) is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result (see group (6) in FIG. 92). ..

(Second special effect)
Next, the second special effect in which the drum device 920F and the effect device 950F are interlocked will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, at the timing of td1 when the game ball shot into the game area PE wins the operating openings 83a and 83b, variable display of the pattern is started on the operating opening display section of the main display unit 87. At the same time, all the left, middle and right drums 925F start to rotate accordingly. As a result, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each variably displayed (scroll display) (see group (1) in FIG. 90).

At the timing of td2 after the start of the game game, the left symbol is stopped and displayed (the left drum 925LF is stopped), and at the timing of the subsequent td3, the right symbol is stopped and displayed (the right drum 925RF is stopped). Since the reach display is supported for the first special effect, the reach line is formed on any of the activated lines by the left symbol and the right symbol which are stopped and displayed at the timing of td3. The flow of the effect up to this point is the same as that of the first special effect.

Reach line A symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result together with the left and right symbols that are formed, for example, if the left and right symbols are "7" symbols, the "7" symbol in the middle symbol sequence will pass the reach line. The display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form at the timing (timing of td4) (see group (90) of FIG. 90, group (3) of FIG. 91). That is, the left and right drums 925LF and 925RF are slid to the side away from each other (the same direction as the effective line in the middle stage) while the rotation positions are fixed, and the middle drum 925MF is slid backward while changing the direction.

In this way, even when the display form is switched from the first form to the second form, the fluctuation of the middle symbol (the rotation of the middle drum 925MF) is continued. More specifically, the fluctuation speed is also kept constant. However, in the first embodiment, the display position of the symbol that was facing the front of the gaming machine on the middle drum 925MF is facing the side of the gaming machine, so the visibility of the symbol on the middle drum 925MF is reduced. Even in the second mode, although it is possible to confirm the middle symbols through the spokes of the frame 942MF, etc., it is difficult to identify each symbol as compared with the first mode.

At the timing of td5 after switching to the second mode, the sidelight 928MF for the middle drum 925MF is turned off, the movable block 951F of the rendering device 950F descends from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the rotating body 956F rotates and emits light. By doing so, the special light emission display is started. As a result, any of the characters "girl's face", "fish school", and "V" is displayed in front of the middle drum unit 923MF (see group (4) in FIG. 91).

At the subsequent timing of td6, the special light emission display ends and the rotating body 956F returns to the standby position. Then, at the timing of td7, the middle symbol is stopped (the middle drum 925MF is stopped) and the sidelight 928MF for the middle drum is turned on (see the group (5) in FIG. 92).

Immediately after the middle symbol stops, the movable block 951F returns to the retracted position. Then, at the timing of td8 after the completion of the return of the movable block 951F to the retracted position, the variable display of the pattern on the operation port display portion of the main display unit 87 ends and the game result is displayed, and the middle drum 925MF is displayed. While the rotation position is fixed, the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the second form to the first form, so that the middle symbol stopped and displayed on the reach line moves horizontally. Since this game time corresponds to the deviation result, the effective line (reach line) is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result (see group (6) in FIG. 92). ..

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

According to the variable display unit 900F shown in the fifth embodiment, when the movable block 951F (corresponding to the “movable body”) of the effect device 950F is moved from the retracted position to the effect position to perform special light emission display. Is movable by moving the middle drum unit 923MF (corresponding to the "predetermined display portion") configuring the drum device 920F from the front position (corresponding to the "first position") to the rear position (corresponding to the "second position"). The operation area of the block 951F is secured. With such a configuration, the drum device 920F is brought closer to the glass panel 23 (corresponding to the "panel portion") to improve the visibility of the symbol, and the special light emission display by the effect device 950F is provided at a position close to the player. By doing so, the impact of the special light emission display can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

When comparing the drum unit 923F in which the symbols are stopped and displayed and the drum unit 923F in which the variable display of the symbols is continued, it is assumed that the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the latter than the former. Therefore, while the symbols are stopped and displayed on the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF and the variable display of the symbols is continued on the middle drum unit 923MF (reach display state), the middle drum unit 923MF is retracted to the rear position. By forming the operation region of the movable block 951F, it is possible to prevent the initial movement of the movable block 951F from being overlooked. In the reach display state, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the middle drum unit 923MF in which the variable display of symbols is continued. Therefore, by retreating the middle drum unit 923MF, the above-mentioned overlooking suppression effect can be suitably exerted.

When the display mode of the drum device 920F is switched from the first mode to the second mode to form the operation area of the movable block 951F, the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF are adjusted in accordance with the rearward movement of the middle drum unit 923MF. Move away from each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to favorably allow the production device 950F to be upsized. At this time, by synchronizing the movements of the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF (specifically, the movements of the drum units 923LF, 923RF, and 923MF), it is possible to suppress the increase in the time required to form the operation area of the movable block 951F. This is preferable in order to improve the responsiveness when performing the special light emission display.

When the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form, the reach line is formed on any of the horizontal effective lines L1 to L3. Here, the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF move in the same direction (parallel) as the effective line on which the reach line is formed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the reach line becomes difficult to be recognized after switching while forming the operation area of the movable block 951F by switching the display mode.

In the configuration in which the middle drum unit 923MF retracts, the middle drum unit 923MF is disposed in a recessed position, which may make it difficult to visually recognize the symbol of the middle drum unit 923MF by the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF and the movable block 951F. It This can be a factor that gives the player who wants to pay attention to the symbol to the impression that the backward function of the middle drum unit 923MF is troublesome. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the display area can be visually confirmed through the operation area of the movable block 951F (specifically, the rotating body 956F), the visibility of the symbol can be improved even during the special light emission display by the rotating body 956F. This can be ensured and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In the rendering device 950F shown in the present embodiment, the movable block 951F and the rotating body 956F operate in parallel to the glass panel 23. With such a configuration, the operation gap between the movable block 951F (rotating body 956F) and the glass panel 23 can be reduced. This can suppress an increase in the operation area (that is, an increase in the moving distance of the middle drum unit 923MF) for the purpose of ensuring an operation gap.

It is advantageous to perform special light emission display (corresponding to “light production”) using the production device 950F which is a movable light production device in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. However, it is assumed that if the light of the rendering device 950F is mixed with the light from other gaming machines, the illumination of the game hall, etc., the impact of the light rendering will decrease, and it will be a hindrance in achieving the above-described attention level improvement effect. To be done. For example, although the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed by setting the light emission level of the effect device 950F to be high, excessively strong light can cause a player to feel uncomfortable. Here, in the present embodiment, the front area of the middle drum unit 923MF is darkened by switching the display form of the drum device 920F from the first form to the second form. By performing the light effect in such a darkened area (dark place), it is possible to suppress the decrease in impact while suppressing the light emission level. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited by the effect device 950F.

In the present embodiment, the sidelight 928MF (corresponding to the “illumination unit”) of the middle drum unit 923MF is turned off by shifting from the first form to the second form. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the medium drum unit 923MF from being mixed with the light from the effect device 950F, and to suitably exhibit the above effect. Particularly, the side light 928MF is turned off for the middle drum unit 923MF located behind the effect device 950F, and the side lights 928LF, 928RF are turned on for the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF, so that a difference in light and shade is generated in the drum device 920F. .. By performing the light effect by the effect device 950F after making such a difference, the light effect becomes easy to stand out. The light from the sidelights 928LF and 928RF attached to the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF is restricted from being irradiated to the front area by the side surface portions 945LF and 945RF of the frames 942LF and 942RF. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the light from the side lights 928LF and 928RF from interfering with the light effect.

By switching the display form of the drum device 920F from the first form to the second form, a region (concave portion) surrounded by three drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF on three sides is formed, and the region is movable by the effect device 950F. The block 951F functions as an operation area. In this way, if the configuration is such that it surrounds the operation region, it is possible to prevent light from other game machines, illumination of the game hall, etc. (hereinafter referred to as external light) from irradiating the movable block 951F. By making the drum units 923LF, 923MF, and 923RF function as walls for dimming or shielding in this way, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the impact of light production while suppressing the light emission level of the production device 950F. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited by the effect device 950F. Since the projection of the effect device 950F (movable block 951F) toward the front of the gaming machine from the enclosed area is restricted, it is possible to prevent the above-described external light from being applied to the movable block 951F.

When the display form of the drum device 920 is the first form, the middle drum unit 923MF is oriented vertically (the rotation center axis line CL2 is oriented in the left-right direction), and when it is the second form, the middle drum unit 923MF is formed. Is in the lateral direction (the rotation center axis line CL2 faces the front-rear direction). In the first form in which the middle drum unit 923MF is oriented vertically, the middle symbols are relatively easy to identify because the middle symbols face the front of the gaming machine (corresponding to the "high identification display mode"), and the middle drum unit 923MF is oriented horizontally. In the two forms, the middle symbol faces toward the gaming machine side, so that it is relatively difficult to identify the middle symbol (corresponding to the "low identification display mode").

When the middle symbol is stopped and displayed in the low identification display mode, the visibility of the middle symbol remains low. In such a situation, it is assumed that the player who wants to identify the middle symbol pays attention to the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed. By switching from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode after the middle symbols are stopped and displayed, it becomes easy to identify the middle symbols that are stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, the player's attention can be increased by the change in the display mode even after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

According to the configuration in which the difference in distinctiveness is caused by making the directions of the symbols different, it is possible to standardize the symbols used in the respective display modes even when the difference in distinctiveness is secured. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused by an excessively large number of types of symbols.

In the configuration in which the display mode of the middle symbol is switched in the order of high discrimination display mode→low discrimination display mode (stop display generation)→high discrimination display mode, the scroll speed of the middle symbol in the high discrimination display mode and low discrimination display mode (variable display If the speeds are the same, it is possible to infer the symbol from the rhythm of the variable display of the medium symbol even if it is difficult to identify the medium symbol from the appearance in the low discrimination display mode. As a result, the difference between the low identification display mode and the high identification display mode can be clarified to enhance the sharpness, and at the same time, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the attention degree in the low identification display mode.

In particular, in this embodiment, the spokes of the frame 942MF are displaced in synchronization with the scroll display of symbols. By observing the movement of the spokes, it is possible to guess which position the desired symbol is moving without directly following the middle symbol even if the distinctiveness is deteriorated. .. Incidentally, if the spokes of the middle drum unit 923MF in the horizontal direction are shown, the player is informed that the rotation of the middle drum unit 923MF (scrolling of the pattern) is being continued even in the second mode. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game has ended due to the shift to the two forms.

When the middle symbol row is formed by a plurality of types of symbols, the symbols that are easily noticed may differ depending on the player's preference. Further, when the symbols are arranged in a predetermined order, it is possible to infer the symbols that cross the effective line or the like from the noticeable symbols. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, in the low identification display mode, if the number of symbols in the field of view (the number of display objects) is increased, the display is stopped on the effective line or the like in the low identification display mode. Even if the symbol itself is difficult to identify, it is possible to infer the symbol from other symbols. As a result, even in the low identification display mode, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the symbol.

During the reach display, the player's attention is directed to the last symbol (middle symbol row) that is scroll-displayed. It is not possible for the player to make it difficult to identify the symbols by switching from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode for the symbol in such a situation where the points to be noticed are narrowed down. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that gives a pleasant sensation.

The symbols (left symbol, right symbol) that have already been stopped and displayed during the transition to the reach display are configured to be maintained in the high identification display mode, so that the left and right symbols in the stop display are scroll-displayed (low identification display mode) It can be used as a stepping stone in identifying the middle pattern. In this way, it is technically significant to display the left and right symbols that can be compared in the high identification display mode.

The symbols stopped and displayed in the middle drum unit 923MF are returned to the reach line with the switching from the second form (low identification display form) to the first form (high identification display form), and the game result (lottery result) is obtained. Corresponding symbol combinations are formed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably switch the display mode itself as a part of the display effect.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, when the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form, the rotation speed of the middle drum 925MF (the scroll speed of the middle pattern) is maintained to be constant. However, it is also possible to change the rotation speed before and after switching. For example, the rotation speed may be increased after switching, or the rotation speed may be decreased after switching.

<Modification 2>
In the special effect shown in the fifth embodiment, after the middle symbols are stopped and displayed (preceding stop) in the second form, the structure is switched to the first form while maintaining the stop display state, In the second mode, it is possible to continue the variable display of the middle symbols and stop and display the middle symbols after switching to the first mode.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the operation area for the effect device 950F is formed in front of the middle drum unit 923MF by changing the direction of the middle drum unit 923MF and retracting it, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. By changing the direction of the middle drum unit 923MF, an operation area for the rendering device may be formed in front of the middle drum unit 923MF, or by changing the position of the middle drum unit 923MF, the rendering device in front of the middle drum unit 923MF. An operating region for the may be formed.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form under the condition where the left and right drums 925LF and 925RF are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display form of the drum device 920F is switched from the first form to the second form under the condition that both or one of the left and right drums 925LF and 925RF are rotating.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, the left drum unit 923LF, the middle drum unit 923MF, and the right drum unit 923RF are configured to be driven by one unit drive unit 932F, but a drive unit is provided for each drum unit 923LF, 923MF, 923RF. It is also possible to individually change the positions of the drum units 923LF, 923MF, and 923RF.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the light from the sidelights 928LF and 928RF is prevented from being emitted to the operation area for the rendering device 950F by the side surface portions 945LF and 945RF of the holders 924LF and 924RF of the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The side surfaces 945LF and 945RF may be omitted, and the side lights 928LF and 928RF may be turned off when the effect device 950F is operating.

<Modification 7>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when the direction of the middle drum unit 923MF is changed by switching from the second form to the first form, the stopped middle drum 925MF does not rotate again. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the middle drum 925MF fluctuates again and the middle symbols are replaced when returning to the one form or after returning.

<Modification 8>
In the fifth embodiment, the middle drum unit 923MF is retracted to form the operation area for the rendering device 950F in front of the middle drum unit 923MF. However, the drum unit to be retracted is limited to the middle drum unit 923MF. Not a thing. Instead of the middle drum unit 923MF, for example, either the left drum unit 923LF or the right drum unit 923RF may be retracted to form the operation area for the rendering device 950F, or in addition to the middle drum unit 923MF, the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF may be formed. The configuration may be such that at least one of 923RF is moved backward to form the operation area for effect device 950F.

However, in order to create a dark place by surrounding the operation area for the rendering device 950F with the three drum units 923F, it is technically significant to make the middle drum unit 923MF of the three drum units 923F retract.

<Modification 9>
In the fifth embodiment, each drum unit 923F has the side light 928F as the illumination means for symbols, but the illumination means is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the side light 928F, a backlight is arranged at a position facing the sheet material 941F provided with a pattern from the inner surface side, and light from the backlight passes through the sheet material 941. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the gaming machine is ejected to the front.

<Modification 10>
In the fifth embodiment, the rotation center axis line CL2 of the middle drum unit 923MF (middle drum 925MF) is oriented in the front-rear direction in the second embodiment. The direction of the rotation center axis line CL2 in the second mode is arbitrary as long as it can be lowered. For example, the rotation center axis line CL2 may be configured to face diagonally forward.

<Modification 11>
Although the side surfaces 945LF and 945RF of the frames 942LF and 942RF shown in the fifth embodiment are configured to have a light-shielding function, the light from the illumination of another gaming machine or a gaming hall is in the operation area of the rendering device 950F. In order to make it difficult to irradiate the light, the light may not be completely blocked but may be dimmed.

Further, although it is regulated that the side areas 945LF and 945RF irradiate the operation area with the light from the sidelights 928LF and 928RF, the light shielding for blocking the light from the sidelights 928LF and 928RF to the end surfaces of the annular portions 943LF and 943RF is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a seal or the like is provided.

<Modification 12>
In the fifth embodiment, in the second display mode, the spoke portion of the frame 942MF faces the front of the gaming machine, and the middle drum 925MF is rotating the spoke portion (the game is in progress). However, the specific configuration for suggesting that the middle drum 925MF is rotating in the second display mode is arbitrary. For example, in place of or in addition to the spokes, it is possible to identify that the middle drum 925MF is rotating on a side portion (a portion facing the front of the gaming machine due to the second display form) of the middle drum 925MF. Etc. may be provided.

<Modification 13>
In the case of the second form in the middle drum unit 923MF of the drum device 920F, a pattern corresponding to the pattern given to the sheet material 941MF may be arranged in the portion facing the front of the gaming machine (for example, the frame 942MF). Hereinafter, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93(a) is a schematic view of the middle drum unit 923MG in the first form as seen from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 93(b) is a schematic view of the middle drum unit 923MG in the second form as seen from the front of the gaming machine. FIG. 93(c) is a partial perspective view of the middle drum 925MG showing the positional relationship between the first symbol and the second symbol. 93(a) and 93(b), the rotation position of the middle drum 925MG is the same, and in FIG. 93(a), the visible portion when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is shown by a solid line. And the part which is not visible is indicated by a broken line.

A second symbol, which is a reduction of the first symbol, is given to a portion (nearby) that is laterally aligned with the symbol (hereinafter referred to as the first symbol) given to the sheet material 941MG at the side portion of the frame 942MG. When the drum device is in the first form, the first design of the sheet material 941MG is visible and the second design is invisible, and the second design is visible because the drum device is in the second form. ..

An arrow IP facing the middle drum unit 923MG side is provided on the front surface portion (for example, the cover portion 946LG) of the left drum unit 923LG. When the middle drum unit 923MG is in the lateral direction, the symbol located at the tip of the arrow IP moves to the activated line along with the switching from the first form to the second form. That is, the arrow IP has a function of suggesting a stop symbol in the middle symbol sequence.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the variable display unit 900H shown in the present embodiment, the effect device 950H that performs the second special effect in cooperation with the drum device 920H and the configuration related thereto are different from those in the fifth embodiment. The variable display unit 900H according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 94, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94(a) is a schematic view of the variable display unit 900H in which the drum device 920H is in the first form as seen from above, and FIG. 94(b) is a variable display unit 900H in which the drum device 920H is in the second form. It is the schematic which looked at from above.

Rendering device 950H shown in the present embodiment is similar to rendering device 950F shown in the fifth embodiment in that movable block 951H having rotating body 956H is arranged so as to be movable up and down. .. However, while the rotating body 956F of the movable block 951F shown in the fifth embodiment has a light emitting display function, the rotating body 956H shown in this embodiment has a light emitting means such as a light emitting substrate. Does not have.

The surface portion of the rotator 956H has both a function as a light-reflecting portion that is mirror-finished and a function as a three-dimensional decoration portion having a large number of irregularities. The light emitted to the rotator 956H is reflected on the surface of the rotator 956H, so that the rotator 956H can appear to be emitting light. By simplifying the structure of the rotating body 956H in this manner, weight reduction of the rotating body 956H is realized. This is advantageous in improving the responsiveness while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance during the special effect.

Light transmission parts 947LH, 947RH for diffusing light from the sidelights 928LH, 928RH into the holders 924LH, 924RH (specifically, the side wall parts 945LH, 945RH) of the left and right drum units 923LH, 923RH. Is provided.

When the drum device 920H is in the second form, the middle drum unit 923MH is out of the irradiation range of the light diffused by the light transmitting portions 947LH and 947RH. This light irradiation range overlaps with the operation range of the movable block 951H (particularly the rotating body 956H) of the rendering device 950H. When the movable block 951H descends from the retracted position to the effect position and the rotating body 956H rotates, part of the light from the side lights 928LH, 928RH of the left and right drum units 923LH, 923RH is supplied to the movable block 951H. It will be.

When the movable block 951H moves to the space (effect position) formed by the movement of the middle drum unit 923MH, the left and right drum units 923LH and RH located next to the middle drum unit 923MH move to the movable block 951H (rotating body 956H). When the light is emitted and reflected, the rotating body 956H looks as if it is emitting light. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in weight and thickness of the rotating body 956H as compared with a configuration in which the light emitting substrate or the like is mounted on the rotating body 956H itself, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the operation region. As a result, it is possible to reduce the movement amount of the middle drum unit 923MH while ensuring the performance function, and it can be expected that the responsiveness at the time of performance is improved.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, part of the light from the side lights 928LH and 928RH provided on the left and right drum units 923LH and 923RH is irradiated to the operation area of the effect device 950H (movable block 951H). In addition to the side lights 928LH and 928RH that function as lighting means for causing the symbols to emit light, the left and right drum units 923LH and 923RH can be equipped with lighting means for the rendering device 950H.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, the movable block 951H has the rotating body 956H as in the fifth embodiment. However, the movable block 951H is provided with a decoration having a light reflecting portion and the rotating body is provided. It is also possible to omit the configuration corresponding to 956H.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the variable display unit is different from that of each of the first to fifth embodiments. The variable display unit 1000K in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. 95 is a perspective view of the variable display unit 1000K seen from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 96 is a front view of the variable display unit 1000K.

As shown in FIG. 95, the variable display unit 1000K includes a orbiting device 1020K (corresponding to a "pattern display device") capable of displaying a symbol in a variable manner, and a display range OP of the symbol in the orbiting device 1020K (corresponding to a "viewing range"). ) Is defined, a partition 1010K and a housing 1001K on which the orbiting device 1020K and the partition 1010K are mounted are provided. When the variable display unit 1000K is fixed to the front block (game board), the orbiting device 1020K and the partition 1010K can be seen from the front of the game machine through the center opening of the game board.

In the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the variable display unit 1000K faces the glass panel 23 (corresponding to the "panel portion") of the front door frame 14, and the variable display unit 1000K is protected by the glass panel 23. However, a transparent cover or the like for the variable display unit 1000K may be disposed between the variable display unit 1000K and the glass panel 23, and the variable display unit 1000K may be protected by the transparent cover.

The orbiting device 1020K includes a plurality of (specifically, three) orbiting units 1021K arranged so as to be laterally arranged side by side. The basic configuration is common to these circulation units 1021K. Specifically, for each orbiting unit 1021K, a drive roller 1025K that is rotatably supported by a lower portion of the housing 1001K and a driven roller 1026K that is rotatably supported by an upper portion of the housing 1001K. And a belt-shaped sheet material 1022K that is wound around the drive roller 1025K and the driven roller 1026K.

Each of the driving roller 1025K and the driven roller 1026K is arranged so that the central axis of rotation thereof faces the left and right. The sheet material 1022K is formed by arranging a plurality of symbols in the circumferential direction, and the sheet surface faces forward and backward in a state of being stretched over the driving roller 1025K and the driven roller 1026K. A large number of engagement holes are arranged in the sheet material 1022K along the left and right ends of the sheet material 1022K. A plurality of outer teeth are formed on the peripheral surfaces of the drive roller 1025K and the driven roller 1026K at equal intervals, and these outer teeth engage with the engaging holes of the sheet material 1022K. As a result, the sheet material 1022K is configured to interlock with the driving roller 1025K and the driven roller 1026K.

The drive roller 1025K is connected to a motor 1024K (stepping motor). The motor 1024K is connected to the notification/production control device 140 and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/production control device 140. When the drive roller 1025K is rotated by the operation of the motor 1024K, the sheet material 1022K is rotated following the rotation of the drive roller 1025K. As a result, the symbols are vertically scroll-displayed in the front view of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 96, the partition 1010K is arranged in front of the sheet material 1022K, and is composed of a pair of frame members vertically separated from each other. The upper frame member defines the upper limit of the symbol display range, and the lower frame member defines the lower limit of the symbol display range. In the display range sandwiched by the upper and lower frame members, three symbols (a total of nine symbols) are stopped and displayed for each of the left symbol column, the middle symbol column, and the right symbol column. Hereinafter, the part partitioned by the partition 1010K will be referred to as "display range OP".

The types and arrangements of the symbols given to the sheet material 1022K are the same as the types and arrangements of the symbols displayed on the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Therefore, the description is omitted. Further, the valid line in which each symbol is stopped and displayed is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 96, a front cover 1002K that covers the orbiting device 1020K from the front of the gaming machine is attached to the variable display unit 1000K. The front cover 1002K is made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin, and has an opening 1003K formed to match the display range OP. The symbols located in the display range OP are visible through the opening 1003K, while the symbols located outside the display range OP are shielded from the front of the gaming machine so as to be invisible or difficult.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the variable display unit 1000K shown in the present embodiment, the guide block is arranged at a position intermediate between the driving roller 1025K and the driven roller 1026K, more specifically at a position behind the display range OP. Has 1027K. The guide block 1027K has a curved sheet receiving portion 1041K that is convex toward the front of the gaming machine, and the sheet receiving portion 1041K is in contact with the sheet material 1022K from the rear side. Thereby, at least in the display range OP, the sheet material 1022K is curved so as to be convex toward the front of the gaming machine.

A backlight 1042K is mounted on a portion on the opposite side (rear side) of the sheet material 1022K with the sheet receiving portion 1041K interposed therebetween. The backlight 1042K is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the notification/effect control device 140 controls light emission. The sheet receiving portion 1041K has a light-transmitting property, and light from the backlight 1042K is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the sheet receiving portion 1041K→sheet material 1022K. This light causes the pattern given to the sheet material 1022K to emit bright light. Hereinafter, the portion of the guide block 1027K and the sheet material 1022K that is in contact with the guide block 1027K will be referred to as the “display portion DP” of the orbiting device 1020K.

The lower end of the sheet receiving portion 1041K extends below the display range OP (lower frame member). This extended portion corresponds to a symbol located outside the display range OP, more specifically, to a symbol located one frame below the symbol located in the display range OP, and for symbols outside this display range OP. Also has a configuration in which light from the backlight 1042K is supplied. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of symbols to which light is supplied is configured to be larger than the number of symbols that can be located in the display range OP.

Here, the holding structure of the guide block 1027K will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 97(1). FIG. 97(a1) is a schematic view showing a state in which the guide block 1027K is arranged at the lower limit position "first position", and FIG. 97(b1) is arranged the guide block 1027K at the upper limit position "second position". It is the schematic which shows the state which was done. The guide block 1027K shown in this embodiment basically waits at the first position and moves to the second position when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The variable display unit 1000K is equipped with a variable mechanism 1031K that moves the guide block 1027K to a first position which is a lower limit position and a second position which is an upper limit position. The variable mechanism 1031K includes a link mechanism 1033K attached to the housing 1001K in a state where the guide block 1027K can be moved up and down, and a drive unit 0132K as a drive unit that moves the guide block 1027K up and down.

The link mechanism 1033K has a pair of upper and lower support arms 1034K and 1035K. One end of each of the support arms 1034K and 1035K is fixed to the housing 1001K and the other end of the support arm 1034K is fixed to the guide block 1027K. The support arms 1034K and 1035K rotate around a fixing portion on the housing 1001K side to guide the guide arms. The block 1027K moves up and down while maintaining the orientation of the display portion DP.

As shown in FIG. 97(a1)→FIG. 97(b1), when the guide block 1027K (display unit DP) moves (rises) from the first position to the second position, the guide block 1027K is accompanied by the movement. Will retreat slightly. As shown in FIG. 97(b1)→FIG. 97(a1), when the guide block 1027K (display portion DP) moves (falls) from the second position to the first position, the guide block 1027K is accompanied by the movement. Moves slightly forward. That is, the guide block 1027K has a configuration in which the front-rear position is changed by the lifting operation.

The link mechanism 1033K has a restriction portion that restricts a change in the relative position between the guide block 1027K and each sheet material 1022K. When the guide block 1027K is moved up and down, the change of the relative position is restricted by the restriction part, so that it is possible to move up and down the symbols of each symbol row in accordance with the up and down movement of the guide block 1027K. For example, in the special effect described later, the change in the relative position between the guide block 1027K and the left side sheet material 1022LK and the right side sheet material 1022RK is restricted, while the relative position between the guide block 1027K and the central sheet material 1022MK is controlled. Changes remain tolerated. Incidentally, in order to realize a configuration in which the design is moved by following the movement of the guide block 1027K, the above-mentioned restriction portion is not essential. For example, it is possible to move the symbol by driving the motor 1024K according to the movement of the guide block 1027K.

When the front-back position of the guide block 1027K changes, the total length of the orbit of the sheet material 1022K may change. This may be a factor causing slack in the sheet material 1022K. The driven roller 1026K shown in this embodiment is configured to move up and down in conjunction with the movement of the guide block 1027K, and functions as a tension roller that maintains the tension of the sheet material 1022K. This avoids a decrease in tension (occurrence of slack) of the sheet material 1022K.

The variable mechanism 1031K has pressing rollers 1036K and 1037K that come into contact with the sheet material 1022K from the front of the gaming machine (see FIG. 95). The press rollers 1036K and 1037K are arranged above and below the guide block 1027K, and are configured to move up and down following the movement of the guide block 1027K. The pressing rollers 1036K and 1037K prevent the sheet material 1022K from rising from the sheet receiving portion 1041K when the guide block 1027K is moved up and down.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the position of the guide block 1027K and the stop display position of the symbol. In the following description, the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulating device 1020K) in which the guide block 1027K is arranged in the first position is the “first display form”, and the variable display unit in which the guide block 1027K is arranged in the second position. The display form of 1000K (orbiting device 1020K) is referred to as a "second display form". FIG. 97(a2) is a schematic view showing the symbols stopped and displayed in the display range OP in the first display mode, and FIG. 97(b2) shows the symbols stopped and displayed in the display range OP in the second display mode. It is a schematic diagram showing.

In the example shown in FIG. 97(a), the sub-symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper line L1 and the lower line L3, and the middle line L2 includes the "3" symbol, the "1" symbol, and the "2" symbol from the left. It is stopped and displayed in order. Although illustration is omitted, the main display unit is in a standby state in which three main symbols are light-emitted and displayed below the display range OP (lower line L3).

When the display form of the orbiting device 1020K is switched from the first display form to the second display form from the state shown in FIG. 97(a), the symbols located in the display range OP are changed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 97(a)→FIG. 97(b), the three sub-symbols stopped and displayed on the upper line L1 move to the outside of the display range OP, and on the middle line L2. For the "3" symbol, the "1" symbol, and the "2" symbol that were stopped and displayed, move in the display range OP and move to the upper line L1, and for the three sub symbols that were stopped and displayed on the lower line L3, Move in the display range OP to move to the middle line L2, and the symbols (from the left, "2" symbol, "9" symbol, "3" symbol) that have been waiting below the display range OP move to the lower line L3. Becomes

When shifting from the second display form illustrated in FIG. 97(b) to the first display form shown in FIG. 97(a), the three main symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the lower line L3 (from the left " 2" symbol, "9" symbol, "3" symbol) moves to outside the display range OP (downward), and moves to lower line L3 for the three sub-symbols stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and upper line L1. For the three main symbols (“3” symbol, “1” symbol, “2” symbol from the left) that were stopped and displayed, move to the middle line L2 and the three sub symbols that were waiting above the display range OP Will move to the upper line L1.

That is, when the display form is switched to the first display form/second display form, the symbols stopped and displayed on the activated lines L1 to L3 are changed to another symbol. In this way, even after the symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop position is changed or the stopped and stopped symbol is replaced with another symbol, so that the monotonous display of the symbol is suppressed.

In the present embodiment as well as in the first embodiment and the like, the player is notified of the game result through the variable display of the symbols on the variable display unit 1000K. The display effect such as the reach display is executed in the process of notifying the game result, and the jackpot expectation degree is also suggested, which is similar to the first embodiment and the like. However, in the present embodiment, the display mode is switched depending on which activated line the symbol corresponding to the reach display is stopped and displayed (that is, whether the reach line is formed). Depending on whether or not there is a difference in the jackpot expectation. Hereinafter, the relationship between the reach line and the jackpot expectation will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99(a). FIG. 98 is a schematic view showing a reach display, and FIG. 99(a) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the reach line and the jackpot expectation.

The reach display is roughly classified into two according to the position where the reach line is formed. That is, a reach display of a single line type in which a reach line is formed by any one of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3 (see FIG. 98(a)), and the left rising line L4 and the right rising line. It is roughly classified into a cross line type reach display in which a reach line is formed by two L5 (see FIG. 98(b)). When the former and the latter are compared, the jackpot expectation is differentiated so that the latter is higher (see FIG. 99). Specifically, it is easier to select the cross line type reach display than the single line type reach display in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, and the cross line type reach display is selected in the game times corresponding to the miss result. The single line type reach display is easier to select than the display.

Regarding the single type reach display, an upper single line type reach display in which a reach line is formed in the upper line L1 and a middle single line type reach display in which a reach line is formed in the middle line L2, It is roughly classified into a lower single line type reach display in which a reach line is formed on the lower line L3. While the jackpot expectation is the same for the upper single-line type reach display and the lower single-line type reach display, the middle single-line type reach display is better than other single-line type reach displays. The expectation for jackpots is high.

Further, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 99(b), the reach display described above is roughly classified according to whether or not the display form of the variable display unit 1000K is switched. Specifically, it is roughly classified into a normal variable display that does not involve switching the display mode of the variable display unit 1000K and a special variable display that involves switching the display mode of the variable display unit 1000K.

Regarding the normal variable display, the normal variable display corresponding to the reach display in which the reach line is formed on any of the activated lines by the left and right symbol rows stopped and displayed (see FIG. 103(b)), and the left and right stopped display A normal variation display (see FIG. 103(a)) corresponding to complete disengagement in which the reach line is not formed by the symbol row is provided.

Although details will be described later, the special variation display is roughly classified into a first special effect, a second special effect that develops after the first special effect, and a third special effect that develops after the second special effect. To be done. The jackpot expectation degree is set to increase in the order of the first special effect <the second special effect <the third special effect.

Next, the variable display control process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The basic flow of the variable display control process in the present embodiment is the same as that of the variable display control process (see FIG. 31) shown in the first embodiment, but part of it is compatible with switching of display forms. The processing of has been changed.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the game is being performed, that is, whether or not the variable display unit 1000K is performing variable display of symbols for one game. When it is determined that the game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S2902, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 is received. If a negative decision is made in step S2902, the present variable display control processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2902, then this fluctuation display control processing is terminated after execution of fluctuation start processing in step S2903. In the fluctuation start process, the fluctuation display mode (whether reach display is performed, reach display type, etc.) is set by referring to the fluctuation time information included in the fluctuation start command and the information corresponding to the lottery result.

Returning to the description of step S2901, if a positive determination is made in step S2901, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from main controller 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the changing display control process is ended after the changing process is executed in step S2905. The changing process is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game time started by the changing start process. Here, the change-in-progress processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 101 and 102.

(Processing during fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 101, in the changing process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (the orbiting device 1020K) is the second display form. When a negative determination is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3002. In step S3002, it is determined whether the reach display is being performed. When a negative determination is made in step S3002, the stop control process for the left symbol and the right symbol is executed in step S3009, and then the present variation process is ended. In the process for this stop control, when it becomes the stop display timing of the left symbol, the process of stopping the preset symbol (left symbol) on the preset effective line is performed, and the stop display timing of the right symbol In the case of, a process of stopping the preset symbol (right symbol) on the preset effective line is performed. When the current game time corresponds to the reach display, the same symbol on the left and right is stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines, and the reach display is made.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3002, the operation proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. If a negative decision is made in step S3003, the operation proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether it is time to change the variable display speed of the middle symbol. If a negative determination is made in step S3004, the present change-in-progress processing ends. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, the process proceeds to step S3005, and a changing process of the variable display speed of the middle symbol is executed. The variable display speed of the middle symbol is reduced at a predetermined timing after the reach display is transferred, so that the visual identification of the symbol is facilitated. Although details will be described later, by lowering the variable display speed of the middle symbol when the display form is switched, even if the user pays attention to the middle symbol, the movement of the middle symbol causes a feeling of strangeness. It is possible to suggest the switching of the display form.

Returning to the description of step S3003, if a positive determination is made in step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time related to a special effect. If it is a game time that does not correspond to the special effect, a negative determination is made in step S3006, and the process for mid-fluctuation is ended. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3006, the operation proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, it is determined whether it is the switching timing to the second display mode. If it is not the timing to switch to the second display form, a negative determination is made in step S3007, and the present variation-in-progress processing ends. If it is the switching timing to the second display form, the process proceeds to step S3008, and the switching process to the second display form is executed. In this switching process, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 1032K, and the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulating device 1020K) is switched from the first display form to the second display form. As a result, the symbol stopped and displayed in the display range OP is changed to another symbol. Although details will be described later, for example, when the display form is changed during the reach display corresponding to the lower single line, the reach line is changed (promoted or stepped up) from the lower line L3 to the middle line L2. ..

The switching from the first display form to the second display form is performed when the motors 1024LK and 1024RK of the left and right circulation units 1021LK and 1021RK are stopped and the motor 1024MK of the middle circulation unit 1021MK is in a steady operation. That is, it means that the middle symbol is executed under the condition of scroll display at a constant speed (low speed). At this time, the switching speed of the left and right symbols (moving speed of the stopped symbol (display portion DP)) during stop display (motors 1024LK and 1024RK are not operating) is different from the scroll velocity of the middle symbol, In detail, it is specified to be lower than the scroll speed of the medium pattern.

Returning to the description of step S3001, if a positive determination is made in step S3001, that is, if the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulating device 1020K) is the second display form, the second display is performed in step S3010. The display form processing is executed. The process for the second display mode will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Processing for the second display form)
In the processing for the second display form, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not it is the switching timing to the first display form. If a negative decision is made in step S3101, the operation proceeds to step S3102. In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol change flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. If a negative decision is made in step S3102, the operation proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the current game time is the game time related to the second special effect or the third special effect. When a negative determination is made in step S3103, the processing for the second display mode is directly ended. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3103, the operation proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether it is time to start changing the stop symbol. When a negative determination is made in step S3104, the processing for the second display form is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3104, the operation proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, all symbol variation display processing is executed. As a result, all the symbol rows including the left and right symbol rows that have been stopped and displayed are again scroll-displayed. After that, in step S3106, the stop symbol change flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and the processing for the second display form is ended.

Returning to the description of step S3102, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, that is, if the stop symbol change flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, the stop symbol change process is executed in step S3107. After that, the process for the second display form is ended. By executing the stop symbol changing process, the symbol which is being stopped and displayed is changed to another symbol. Although details will be described later, when the reach is being displayed, it may be changed to another reach pattern or a pattern not compatible with reach display, but in the latter case it is stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol combination, the possibility of development to the third special effect is increased.

Returning to the description of step S3101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, that is, if it is the switching timing from the second display mode to the first display mode, the process proceeds to step S3108. In step S3108, switching processing to the first display form is executed. In this switching process, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 1032K, and the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulating device 1020K) is switched from the second display form to the first display form. As a result, the symbol stopped and displayed in the display range OP is changed to another symbol. Although details will be described later, for example, when the display form is changed during the reach display corresponding to the lower single line, the reach line is changed from the lower line L3 to the middle line L2. As already explained, the jackpot expectation is higher in the middle single line compared to the lower single line, so the jackpot expectation will increase if the reach line change described above occurs. It will be (promotion or step-up).

The switching from the second display form to the first display form is performed when the motors 1024LK and 1024RK of the left and right circulation units 1021LK and 1021RK are stopped and the motor 1024MK of the middle circulation unit 1021MK is in a steady operation. That is, it means that the middle symbol is executed under the condition of scroll display at a constant speed (low speed). At this time, the switching speed of the left and right symbols (moving speed of the stopped symbol (display portion DP)) during stop display (motors 1024LK and 1024RK are not operating) is different from the scroll velocity of the middle symbol, In detail, it is specified to be lower than the scroll speed of the medium pattern.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process in FIG. 100 again, when a positive determination is made in step S2905, that is, when the fluctuation end command is received from the main control unit 162, the fluctuation end process is executed in step S2907. After that, this variable display control process ends. By executing the variation ending process, the symbols preset for the middle symbol row are stopped and displayed on the preset activated line.

Returning to the description of step S2904, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, that is, if it is determined that the confirmation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2908. In step S2908, it is determined whether it is time to end the confirmation display. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fixed display time (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed after the variable display of the symbols is finished. When a negative determination is made in step S2908, the present variable display control processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2908, the operation proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not the game time this time corresponds to the special effect. When a negative determination is made in step S2909, this variable display control process is ended as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2909, the flow advances to step S2910 to execute the return processing (switching processing) to the first display mode, and thereafter ends this variable display control processing. In this restoration process, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 1032K, and the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulating device 1020K) is switched from the second display form to the first display form. As a result, the symbol stopped and displayed in the display range OP is changed to another symbol. Although details will be described later, for example, when the display form is changed during the reach display corresponding to the lower single line, the reach line is changed (promoted or stepped up) from the lower line L3 to the middle line L2. ..

In the first special effect and the second special effect in which the game times can end in the second display mode, the effective line when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the second display mode is medium. It is limited to the line L2 or the lower line L3. Therefore, even when the second display form is switched to the first display form in the above-described return process, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result remains in the middle line L2 or the upper line L1. This is a device for preventing a phenomenon in which the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result disappears and the player is confused by switching the display mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105, a flow of special effects accompanied by switching of display modes will be described. 104 and 105 are schematic diagrams showing the display range OP of the variable display unit 1000K.

When the game time corresponding to the special effect is started, all the symbol arrays in the stop display start changing display. At this time, the display form of the variable display unit 1000K is maintained in the first display form as in the normal variation display not corresponding to the special effect (see FIG. 104(a)). As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the variable display of the left and right symbol rows is stopped, the "2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower line L3, and the reach display corresponding to the lower single line is displayed. At this point, it is still difficult to identify whether or not this game time corresponds to the special effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(c), the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (the orbiting device 1020K) was switched from the first display form to the second display form, so that the variable display unit 1000K was stopped and displayed on the lower line L3. The "2" symbol moves to the middle line L2. As a result, the sub symbol stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 is changed to the "2" symbol, and the "2" symbol stopped and displayed on the lower line L3 is changed to the sub symbol.

When the game time this time corresponds to the first special effect, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, so that a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result or a symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is formed ( See FIG. 104(e)). On the other hand, if the current game time corresponds to the second special effect or the third special effect, "2" of the middle symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed in the middle line L2. The symbols, that is, the symbols that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result reach the middle line L2, the left and right symbols that are stopped and displayed are variably displayed again (re-flucted) (FIG. 104 ( See f)).

In the case where the current game time corresponds to the second special effect, when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed via the reach display while maintaining the second display form (FIG. 104(g)→FIG. 104(h)), and a case where a stop display is made so as to be completely disengaged without the reach display (see FIG. 104(i)→FIG. 104(j)).

In the present embodiment, when the odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is confirmed that it is the probability variation jackpot result, and when the even-numbered symbol combination is stopped, the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result are confirmed. The configuration has both possibilities. When the symbol combination corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the second special effect, the symbol may be changed from the even symbol combination to the odd symbol combination.

When the game time this time corresponds to the third special effect, different symbols on the left and right are stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 as in the case of a part of the second special effect (final complete deviation). In the example shown in FIG. 105(i), the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 for the left symbol row, and the symbol "3" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 for the right symbol row. At this point in time, it is difficult to distinguish between the second special effect in which the deviation result is clearly indicated and the third special effect in which the special effect is further continued.

In the third special effect, by changing the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulation device 1020K) from the second display form to the first display form, the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the display range OP is changed. For example, in FIG. 105(i)→FIG. 105(k), the “2” symbol in the left symbol column and the “3” symbol in the right symbol column that were stopped and displayed in the middle line L2 are moved to the lower line L3 and displayed. The "3" symbol in the left symbol column and the "2" symbol in the right symbol column that have been stopped above the range OP move to the upper line L1. As a result, the reach line of the "3" symbol is formed on the leftward rising line L4 and the reach line of the "2" symbol is formed on the rightward rising line L5. That is, the reach display corresponding to the cross line is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach display corresponding to the cross line is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the reach display corresponding to the single line, as shown in FIG. 105(k). By becoming a mode, expectations for jackpots will increase dramatically.

Next, the flow of the third special effect will be supplementarily described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 106.

At the timing of te1, the game time corresponding to the result of deviation and the third special effect is started. Specifically, the variable display of the pattern on the actuation opening display unit is started, and the variable display unit 1000K also starts the variable display of each symbol row. The left symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of te2 after the game time is started, and the right symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of subsequent te3. In this state, a reach line is formed on the lower line L3.

At the timing of te4 after the reach line is formed, the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (circulating device 1020K) is switched from the first display form to the second display form. As a result, the symbols stopped and displayed in the display range OP are changed, and the reach line formed on the lower line L3 moves to the middle line L2.

At the timing of te5 after switching to the second display mode, the left symbol row and the right symbol row that are in the stop display restart the variable display. After that, the left symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of te6, and the right symbol is stopped and displayed at the subsequent timing of te7. In this state, the combination (left) of the left symbol and the right symbol which suggests the development to the third special effect is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

At the timing of te8 after the chance is formed, the display form of the variable display unit 1000K (the orbiting device 1020K) returns (switches) from the second display form to the first display form. As a result, the symbols stopped and displayed in the display range OP are changed, and the reach line is formed on the leftward rising line L4 and the rightward rising line L5.

At the timing of te9, the middle symbol row, which has been continuously displayed in a variable state since the start of the game, is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is formed, and the game result is clearly shown to the player.

According to the seventh embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

By switching the display form of the orbiting device 1020K from the first display form to the second display form under the condition that the reach line is formed by the left and right symbols stopped and displayed on the lower line L3 of the display range OP, the display range The symbol group stopped and displayed in OP is changed. At this time, the reach line is formed by the left and right symbols stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. Since the middle line L2 is set to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the lower line L3, the reach line is promoted to a higher expectation degree by changing the symbol group. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the symbols that are still displayed after the reach line is formed.

If some of the symbols (middle symbols) are configured to make the above changes under the condition that scroll display is being performed, that is, if the above configuration is changed before all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, the symbols are still displayed. It is possible to greatly change the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed without significantly changing the symbol. This is preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the configuration relating to the movement of the display portion DP when switching the display form and suppressing the movement amount.

In the configuration in which the symbols stopped and displayed in the display range OP are changed by the movement of the display portion DP, there is a concern that the impact of the change may be reduced because the change is confused with the simple scroll display. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the moving speed of the display portion DP and the scroll speed of the symbol during steady rotation are made different, the above confusion is suppressed and the impact of the symbol change is preferably reduced. Can be suppressed. In particular, it is advantageous to make the scrolling direction of the symbol during steady rotation and the moving direction of the display portion DP opposite to each other in order to strengthen the discriminating power between simple scroll display and symbol change.

When switching the display mode, not only the vertical position of the display portion DP changes, but also the position changes slightly in the front-back direction. Therefore, the visual recognition position of the symbol being displayed also slightly changes in the depth direction. This is preferable in order to differentiate it from mere scroll display and enhance the above-mentioned discrimination power.

The moving direction of the display portion DP is defined to be the same as the scrolling direction of the symbols in the front view of the gaming machine, and the moving range thereof is defined to be a range that does not deviate from the display range OP. ing. Thus, the effective lines L1 to L5 to be used are configured to be common regardless of which position of the upper limit position and the lower limit position the display portion DP is arranged. In this way, if the effective lines L1 to L5 are common before and after the change of the symbol, the display section DP is moved to realize the diversification of the symbol display mode, which causes the player to be confused. Can be suppressed.

When the display form of the orbiting device 1020K is switched from the second display form to the first display form by the movement of the display portion DP, the reach line is suddenly formed by changing the symbols stopped and displayed in the display range OP. There are cases. With such a configuration, even if the reach line is not formed, it can be expected that the reach line will be formed by the movement of the display portion DP, and the player's attention will be increased when the reach line is not formed. It is possible to suppress a rapid decrease.

Even if the first display mode is a disappointing result that corresponds to a complete failure, the second display mode provides an opportunity to develop into a crossline reach. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the relationship between the display form and the outcome, and thus it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game without unduly complicating the outcome.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, the display unit DP (guide block 1027K) of the orbiting device 1020K is movable and the partition 1010K that defines the display range OP is fixed, and the display unit DP is displaced with respect to the partition 1010K. Although the symbols (symbol combinations) displayed in the display range OP are changed by, the configuration may be changed as follows. That is, the display portion DP is fixed and the partition 1010K is movable (for example, a configuration that slides in the direction parallel to the scroll direction of the symbol when viewed from the front of the game machine), and the partition 1010K is displaced to display in the display range OP. You may be the structure which changes a design (design combination).

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the pattern (symbol combination) stopped and displayed in the display range OP is changed by displacing a part of the orbiting device 1020K, but the orbiting device 1020K is entirely displaced (for example, It is also possible to change the symbols (symbol combination) that are stopped and displayed in the display range OP by moving up and down.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the display unit DP (guide block 1027K) of the orbiting device 1020K moves up and down with displacement in the front-rear direction, that is, the front-rear position of the display unit DP differs depending on the display form. However, it is not limited to this. In any of the display modes, the front and rear positions of the display portion DP can be the same.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment, when the symbol (symbol combination) is changed in accordance with the switching (movement of the display portion DP) of the first display form/second display form, the number of frames for one symbol (one frame) ), but is not limited to this. For example, it may be for two symbols (two frames) or three symbols (three frames). Further, the number of frames when the symbol (symbol combination) is changed is set to a number smaller than the maximum number (3) of symbols that can be stopped in each symbol column, but the number of symbols that can be stopped in each symbol column is It is also possible to set the number to be larger than the maximum number (3) (for example, 4 frames), or the same number (for example, 3 frames) as the maximum number (3) of symbols that can be stopped in each symbol row. ..

The number of frames that can be changed is not necessarily limited to one pattern, and a plurality of patterns that can be changed may be provided and the number of frames may be selectively used in each special effect.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which the display form of the orbiting device 1020K is switched between the first display form and the second display form under the condition that the variable display (scroll display) is performed for some symbol rows However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display form of the orbiting device 1020K is switched between the first display form and the second display form under the condition that all the symbol rows are displayed in a paused state.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Regarding the variable display unit 900F shown in the fifth embodiment, when the second special effect is executed using the effect device 950F, the display mode of the drum device 920F is switched from the first mode to the second mode. The configuration is such that the operation area of the effect device 950F (movable block 951F) is secured in front of the middle drum unit 923MF. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the responsiveness when performing the effect by the effect device 950F is improved and a device for further improving the impact of the effect is made. Hereinafter, the above device will be described focusing on the difference from the fifth embodiment. First, the difference in basic operation of the variable display unit 900F (drum device 920F) will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. FIG. 107 is a schematic view of the drum device 920F seen from above, FIG. 107(a) shows a first form, and FIG. 107(b) shows a second form.

In the fifth embodiment, when the display form of the variable display unit 900F is switched from the first form to the second form, the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF are slid in the direction away from the middle drum unit 923MF and the middle drum unit is moved. The 923MF is configured to be slid backward while changing the posture from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. The present embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment in that the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF are slid to the side away from the middle drum unit 923MF and the middle drum unit 923MF is slid to the rear, but in the rear. The configuration is different from that of the fifth embodiment in that the orientation of the middle drum unit 923MF is maintained in the vertical orientation (the orientation is not changed) during the sliding movement to (see FIG. 107(b)). .. That is, the display position of the symbol on the sheet material 941MF of the middle drum unit 923MF is configured to remain facing the front of the gaming machine even when the second special effect is executed (after switching to the second mode). ing.

In the present embodiment, as variable display modes in the variable display unit 900F, a normal variable display (including complete disconnection and reach display) that is incompatible with switching of the display mode of the drum device 920F, and a display mode of the drum device 902F. The special effect A corresponding to the switching of No. 1 and the special effect B interlocking with the effect device 950F are provided (see the schematic diagram in FIG. 108). Regarding the variable display mode in each game time, the outline is determined by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, and the details are determined by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140. It is similar to the embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode in the subsequent game times is specified in advance, and a part of the variable display mode in the current game times is determined according to the specification result, so that the fifth embodiment is performed. The form is different. Hereinafter, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 109 to 111, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration on which the function is based. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the information acquisition processing in the present embodiment, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the confirmation processing for holding notice, and FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the setting processing of the holding command.

(Information acquisition process)
In the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 in this embodiment, the information acquisition process is executed as a part of the regular process (timer interrupt process) as in the other embodiments including the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109, in the information acquisition process, first in step S3201, the number N of starting reserved balls stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, specifically, the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b. Of these, it is determined whether or not the number N of start-up holding balls related to the ball entering portion that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number N of start-up pending storages is the upper limit value, this information acquisition processing is ended as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the number N of start-up pending storages of the corresponding ball entrance is incremented by 1 in step S3202. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as the common number of reservations CRN) stored in the number-of-reservations storage area FE in step S3203 is incremented by one.

In a succeeding step S3204, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the step S103 are set as the first storage area in the free storage area area of the holding area RE. That is, the common hold number CRN that is incremented by 1 in step S3202 is stored in the storage area.

In a succeeding step S3205, a display updating process of the number-of-holdings display section arranged in the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is executed. The hold display section is roughly divided into a hold number display section for the upper working opening and a hold number display section for the lower working opening, and in the display update processing, when the current ball entry destination (prize destination) is the upper working opening 83a. The display of the reserved number display section for the upper working port is updated, and when the destination (prize destination) of this time is the lower working port 83b, the display of the reserved number display section for the lower working port is updated.

The upper working port reserved number display section is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs that are lit and the reserved number related to the upper working port 83a are the same. When the number of holdings related to the upper operation opening 83a is increased by this winning, the process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly. The holding number display section for the lower working port is also composed of four LEDs in the same manner, and the number of lit LEDs and the number of holdings related to the lower working port 83b are the same. When the number of holdings related to the lower operation port 83b is increased by this winning, the process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly.

In a succeeding step S4106, confirmation processing for notice of suspension is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the confirmation process for the reservation notice will be described.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the notice of holding, in step S3301, the starting holding storage number N and the common holding number CRN stored in the holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 632 are read, and the information of the holding number is registered in the MPU 602. Remember. After that, in steps S3302 to S3306, it is confirmed whether or not the pending information acquired by the present winning includes the jackpot winning information. Specifically, first, in step S3302, the jackpot determination information, that is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that has been acquired, of the hold information acquired in step S3204 based on the current winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b. Figure out.

In a succeeding step S3303, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, it is determined whether or not the current winning/missing lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the jackpot determination information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S3302 by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponds to the jackpot winning. Determine if it is in the group. If it is in the high-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S3305, the high-probability mode win/loss table is referred to, and the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S3302 is jackpot win. It is determined whether or not it is included in the information set as.

If the determination results in steps S3304 and S3305 correspond to the jackpot win, an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, the process proceeds to step S3307, and the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. In the process of step S3307, the jackpot type determination information, that is, the value of the already-obtained jackpot type counter C2 of the holding information grasped in step S3302 based on the present winning is grasped, and the distribution table is set. Refer to and determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S3307 includes the information related to the jackpot type.

If the determination results in steps S3304 and S3305 correspond to the deviation result, a negative determination is made in step S3306 and the process proceeds to step S3308. In step S3308, the information for the out-reach determination, that is, the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been acquired, is grasped from the hold information grasped in step S3204 based on the current winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b.

In the following step S3309, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the reach determined in step S3308 is referred to. It is determined whether the determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the confirmation process for this pending notice is ended as it is. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative decision is made in step S3310 and the operation proceeds to step S3311. In step S3311, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602.

After executing the processes of steps S3307 and S3311, the process proceeds to step S3312. In step S3312, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S3204 is grasped, and the fluctuation display time information of the game times related to the corresponding suspension is specified in advance. Then, the specified fluctuation display time information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. When deciding the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S608. For example, the variation display time is 14 seconds for the game times corresponding to the special effect A, and the variation display time is 18 seconds for the game times corresponding to the special effect B (see FIG. 108).

After executing the confirmation process for holding notice in step S3206, the process advances to step S3207 to execute the setting process of the holding command. Next, the process of setting the hold command will be described with reference to FIG.

(Hold command setting process)
In the setting process of the hold command, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the big hit information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. It is determined whether or not the information has been identified as corresponding to the jackpot win. If the big hit information is stored, the process proceeds to step S3402 and a big hit holding command is set. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604. The jackpot handling suspension command includes information on the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3401, that is, when the jackpot information is not stored in the register of the MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S3403, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. By determining, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination has been specified as corresponding to the occurrence of the reach in the confirmation process (Fig. 110) for the previous hold notice. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the detachment hold command is set in step S3404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete detachment hold command is set in step S3405.

When setting the hold command in steps S3402, S3404, and S3405, the information about the variable display time stored in step S3312 is stored in the hold command. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140, and the notification/effect control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the symbols and the like based on the hold command. In addition, as described above, in the case of complete deviation, the variable display time may change according to the number of pieces of hold information stored when the game time relating to the hold information is started. Therefore, when the complete disconnection pending command is set, the variable display time is temporarily set.

After executing the command setting process in any of steps S3402, S3404, and S3405, in step S3406, a process of setting the information on the number of holdings for the holding command is executed. As such processing, specifically, the information of the set hold command described above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the command is a hold command and the hold command. The information of the type is included, and the information of the held number can be set.

In step S3406, first, the information about the number of holdings stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S3301 in the confirmation process (Fig. 110) for the previous holding notice is read, and then the number of holdings in the already set holding command is checked. The information of the number of reserved read-out bits is stored in the information bits by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S3402, step S3404, and step S3405, information for specifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command. Will be included. After executing the process of step S3406 described in detail above, the present hold command setting process is ended.

The hold command including the information on the number of holdings in step S3406 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 by the external output process of step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 28). By receiving such a hold command, the notification/effect control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased, and based on the received hold command, performs a hold display, a hold advance notice process, and the like.

In addition, how to set the hold command, depending on the hold command in the notification and effect control device 140, whether there is a jackpot, the jackpot type at the time of jackpot winning, if there is no jackpot reach, etc., In other words, it is arbitrary as long as the variable display mode of the symbol can be specified. For example, a combination of a jackpot-supported hold command, an out-reach-supported hold command, and a complete disconnection-supported hold command are individually set in correspondence with each of the number of holdings. In the hold command setting process, a confirmation process for a hold notice ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one hold command is selected according to the confirmation result in FIG. 110).

Next, the special effect setting process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described. The special effect setting process is a process that is executed as a part of the variation start process in the MPU 652, specifically, the jackpot effect setting process (step S803) and the reach generating effect setting process (step S805), and is started. It is executed when the game time corresponds to the special effect (special effect A or special effect B). The special effect setting process will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 112 and 113.

(Setting process for special performance)
As shown in FIG. 112, in the special effect setting process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the special effect A. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3502, after the special effect A setting process is executed, the special effect setting process is ended. By executing the special effect A setting process, the special effect A is executed in the current game.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, that is, if the current game time corresponds to the special effect B, the process proceeds to step S3503. In step S3503, it is determined whether or not this game time corresponds to the jackpot result. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, an affirmative decision is made in step S3503, the operation proceeds to step S3504, and after the special effect B setting processing is executed, the special effect setting processing is ended. By executing the special effect B setting process, the special effect B will be executed in the current game. In this case, the display form of the drum device 920F is returned from the second form to the first form at the end of the variation of the game times related to the special effect B.

If the current game count corresponds to the miss result, a negative determination is made in step S3505, and the flow proceeds to step S3505. In step S3505, special setting processing is executed. Hereinafter, the special setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 113.

(Special setting process)
In the special setting process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the subsequent hold is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not at least one subsequent hold has been secured at the start of the game game. When a negative determination is made in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3605, after which special effect B setting processing is executed, and then this special setting processing is ended. The special effect B setting process is the same as the above-described step S3504, and the special effect B setting process is executed, so that the special effect B is executed in this game time. In this case, the display form of the drum device 920F is returned from the second form to the first form at the end of the variation of the game times related to the special effect B.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3601, the operation proceeds to step S3602. In step S3602, it is determined in the order in which the hold is stored whether or not the subsequent hold includes one corresponding to the special effect B. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3602, the operation proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the hold corresponding to the special effect A is stored before the hold (corresponding hold) that triggered the positive determination in step S3602. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3603, the flow advances to step S3605 to execute special effect B setting processing, and then this special setting processing is ended. In this case, the display form of the drum device 920F is returned from the second form to the first form at the end of the variation of the game times related to the special effect B.

If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the flow advances to step S3604 to store the second form maintenance flag in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. By storing the second form maintaining flag, it is possible to prevent the display form of the drum device 902F from returning from the second form to the first form at the end of the variation in the current game time, and to maintain the second form. It will be. After that, the special effect B setting process is executed in step S3605, and the special setting process is ended.

As described above, in the variable display unit 900F according to the present embodiment, at the start of the game time when the special effect B is executed, the subsequent hold includes the hold corresponding to the special effect B, and the corresponding hold When the hold corresponding to the special effect A is not stored before, the display form of the drum device 920F does not return to the first form at the end of the special effect B, and remains the second form. As a result, the second mode is maintained at least until the variation display in the corresponding game time ends.
Returning to the description of step S3602, if a negative determination is made in step S3602, that is, if the subsequent hold is secured but the hold corresponding to the special effect B is not included, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, it is determined in the order in which the hold is stored whether or not the subsequent hold includes a reach display compatible one. When a negative determination is made in step S3606, after the special effect B setting process is executed in step S3605, the special setting process is ended. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3606, the operation proceeds to step S3607.

In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the hold corresponding to the special effect A is stored before the hold (corresponding hold) that triggered the positive determination in step S3606. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3607, the flow advances to step S3605 to execute special effect B setting processing, and then this special setting processing is ended. In this case, the display form of the drum device 920F is returned from the second form to the first form at the end of the variation of the game times related to the special effect B.

If a negative decision is made in step S3607, the operation proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, the second form maintenance lottery process is executed. In the second form maintenance lottery processing, refer to the second form maintenance lottery table stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 653 and the values of the second form maintenance lottery counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 654. Then, it is determined by lottery whether or not to maintain the second form. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the special effect B is not executed again within the hold after the special effect B is executed, the return to the first mode may be delayed in a part thereof.

If the result is out of the lottery process in step S3608, a negative determination is made in step S3609, the process proceeds to step S3605, the special effect B setting process is executed, and then the special setting process is ended. If the lottery process in step S3608 is successful, the process advances to step S3604, the second form maintenance flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and the special effect B setting process is executed in subsequent step S3605. This special setting process ends.

Next, the variation ending process (step S706) constituting the variation display control process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be supplementarily described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114.

(Processing for end of fluctuation)
In the fluctuation ending process, first, in step S3701, the middle drum stop process is executed. In the middle drum stop processing, the stepping motor 926MF of the middle drum unit 923MF is stopped and controlled so that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

In a succeeding step S3702, it is determined whether or not the second form maintenance flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. When a negative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703, and it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3703, the processing for ending this fluctuation ends as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3703, then the first form restoration process is executed in step S3704 and then this fluctuation ending process is terminated.

In the first mode return processing, a drive signal is output to the unit drive unit 932F to rotate the unit drive unit 932F in the reverse direction. As a result, the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF slide and move toward each other, and the middle drum unit 923MF slides and moves from the rear position to the front position.

Returning to the description of step S3702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, that is, if the second form maintenance flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether or not the current game time is the corresponding game time that triggered the second form maintenance. When a negative determination is made in step S3705, it is determined in step S3706 whether or not the current game time is the game time at which switching to the second mode has occurred. When a negative determination is made in step S3706, the processing for ending this fluctuation is ended as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3706, then the flow proceeds to step S3707, after which special display start processing is executed and then this fluctuation ending processing is ended. Here, the special display in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second form may be maintained over a plurality of game times without returning from the second form to the first form in one game time. In this way, if the second form is maintained after the game is over, there is a high possibility that the special effect B using the movable block 951F of the effect device 950F will occur. In accordance with this, the emission color of the sidelight 928F of the drum unit 923F is switched from “white” to “red”, and the special effect B is used for the portion of the glass panel 23 facing the variable display unit 900F. As a message indicating the occurrence of B, the character "Great chance in action of accessory" is displayed (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 115). That is, it is suggested that the movable block 951B is in a high motion probability state in which the motion probability is high.

Regarding the special display, the first special display in which both the display in which the design is changed to red and the display of the message suggesting the occurrence of the special effect B are executed, and the second special display in which only the former is executed The first special display and the second special display are used according to the progress of the production.

Returning to the description of step S3705, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, that is, if it is the corresponding game time, the process proceeds to step S3708, and the second form maintenance flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 is set. to erase. After that, after the special display end processing is executed in step S3709, this fluctuation end processing is ended. In the special display end process, the emission color of the sidelight 928F of the drum unit 923F is switched from “red” to “white”, and the message displayed on the portion of the glass panel 23 facing the variable display unit 900F is not displayed. Display

Here, with reference to FIG. 116, a supplementary description will be given of the flow of the game in the case where the special effect B continues through the special display. FIG. 116 is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the special display is executed.

At the timing of tf1, the game time corresponding to the deviation result and the special effect B is started. With this start, the number of reservations is decreased by 1, and the number of remaining reservations at the start of the game is “2”. Since the game time started this time corresponds to the special effect B, the display mode of the drum device 920F is switched from the first mode to the second mode at the timing tf2 after the game time is started, and the effect device 950F (movable block 951F). ) Operation area is secured. At the timing of tf3 immediately after the display form is switched, the movable block 951F descends from the retracted position to the effect position, and the special light emission display is started in front of the middle drum unit 923MF.

At the timing of tf4, the special light emission display ends, and the movable block 951F returns from the effect position to the retracted position. However, the display form of the drum device 920F does not return from the second form to the first form following the movement of the movable block 951F, and is maintained as the first form.

At the timing of tf5 immediately after the movable block 951F returns to the retracted position, more specifically, at the timing when the display form of the drum device 920F normally switches to the first form, the emission color of the side light 928F is “white”→“red”. The message indicating that the special effect B is generated is displayed on the glass panel 23. At the timing of tf5, the variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit is finished, and the game result (disconnection result) is clearly shown.

At the timing of tf6, the design of the working port display unit, which has been stopped and displayed, is changed and displayed again, and the next game time is started. In the example shown in FIG. 116, the special display is executed with the later hold as a trigger, out of the two hold stored at the timing when the first game time is started. That is, the game time started at the timing of tf6 is not the game time (corresponding game time) that triggered the start of the special display. Therefore, the special display is continued so as to extend beyond the game number and to the next game number.

At the timing of tf7, the picture corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed on the working opening display section, and at the timing of tf8, the variable display of the picture is started on the working opening display section at the start of the third game time. It At the timing of tf9 after the start of the variable display, the movable block 951F suddenly descends from the retracted position to the effect position. In this way, the impact during the descent is strengthened by the configuration in which the preliminary movement for the descent to the effect position is not performed immediately before. At the timing of tf9, the special display is switched from the first special display to the second special display, and the message displayed on the glass panel 23 is hidden. This prevents the message from becoming a factor that hinders the movable block 951 from visually recognizing the special light emission display.

At the timing of tf10, the movable block 951F returns from the effect position to the retracted position, and immediately after the timing of tf11, the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit and the display form of the drum device 920F. Is switched from the second form to the first form, and the special display is also ended.

According to the eighth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If the space formed by the middle drum unit 923MF of the drum device 920F moving from the front position to the rear position is used as the operation area of the movable block 951F, the drum device 920F and the rendering device 950F are suitable in a limited space. Can coexist with. However, the necessity of the preliminary operation (preliminary operation) in the drum device 920F when executing the special effect B can be a factor that deteriorates the response at the start of the special effect B. In addition, the presence of the preliminary motion in the player's view expected for the special effect B may be a factor that reduces the impact on the movement of the movable block 951F. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the middle drum unit 923MF moves to the rear position and can be stopped at the rear position in the previous game time, it is a reserve when operating the movable block 951F during the stop. The operation becomes unnecessary, and the above-mentioned prior detection becomes difficult. Therefore, when the drum device 920F and the effect device 950F are used together, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the impact of the special effect, and to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Further, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the middle drum unit 923MF that has moved to the rear position with the special effect B as a trigger starts to be stopped at the rear position. For this reason, the unnaturalness of the movement is alleviated as compared with the configuration in which the movement to the rear position is performed (alone) regardless of the special effect.

After the end of the special effect B, the case where the middle drum unit 923MF stays at the rear position and the case where it returns to the front position are divided. With such a configuration, the flow of the production can be diversified by utilizing the branch of the stop at the rear position and the return to the front position as a part of the production. This is preferable in order to appropriately exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

In the case where a special result B is passed and the result is disengaged, the next game time is started immediately after the end of the previous game time, so that the special effect B may frequently occur in a short period. The movement of the middle drum unit 923MF to the front position/rear position each time the special effect B is given is a factor giving an impression that the player is annoying. It is feared that this will be an obstacle to exerting the effect of improving the degree of attention described above. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, when the special effect B→displacement result, the configuration in which the middle drum unit 923MF is held at the rear position can preferably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

If the symbol display and the special effect B are executed in the same area as described above, both of them can be executed in an ideal position in consideration of the player's field of view and the like. This is preferable in reducing the burden on the eyes of the player. Here, according to the present embodiment, one of the conditions for stopping the middle drum unit 923MF at the rear position is that another game time is reserved after the game time corresponding to the special effect B. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dwell function from being exhibited indiscriminately, and to prevent the visibility of the symbols displayed on the middle drum unit 923MF from decreasing. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned reduction effect.

<Modification 1>
In the above eighth embodiment, even if the display form of the drum device 920F is maintained in the second form through the special effect B, the occurrence probability of the special effect B itself does not change. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the occurrence probability itself is changed (for example, becomes higher). For example, when the second mode is maintained, the special effect A that is not linked with the movable block 951F may be replaced with the special effect B that is linked with the movable block 951F.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described eighth embodiment, the second mode can be maintained when the display mode of the drum device 920F is switched to the second mode during execution of the special effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the second form may be maintained when the display form of the drum device 920F is switched to the second form during execution of the special effect A.

<Modification 3>
In the above eighth embodiment, the drum device 920F is configured to be able to be maintained in the second form when the subsequent hold information is secured, but the drum device 920F is set to the first form regardless of the presence or absence of the subsequent hold information. It does not deny the structure maintained in two forms. For example, when the special effect A or the special effect B is executed, even after the end of the special effect, a preset end condition (for example, digestion of a preset number of game times or execution of each game time) is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the display form is maintained in the second form until the result that the result of the continuous lottery in the second form is out of order).

<Modification 4>
In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the special effect B is executed under the condition that the display form of the drum device 920F is maintained in the second form, the display form is triggered by the special effect B as a trigger. It is configured to return to the first form. It is also possible to re-extend the second form when the subsequent hold information when the second special effect B is executed includes the hold information corresponding to the special effect B. In this case, the condition for determining whether or not to maintain the second form may be different between the first determination and the second and subsequent times (during extension). It is preferable that the second and subsequent determination conditions are configured to be more difficult to satisfy than the first determination condition.

<Modification 5>
In the above eighth embodiment, the special display is executed when the display form of the drum device 920F is maintained in the second form, but the present invention is not limited to this. The specific configuration for suggesting that the movable block 951F is likely to fall is arbitrary. For example, instead of or in addition to the special display, the movable block 951F can be vertically vibrated (swing) at the standby position, and the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF can be horizontally vibrated (swing). is there.

It should be noted that the special display may not be performed even when the second mode is maintained.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable to ensure the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the light guides 532 and 732 are of the rotatable type, but the invention is not limited to this. The operation mode of the light guide unit is arbitrary, and may be, for example, a slide type. The sliding direction in the case of the slide type is also preferably the same direction as the arrangement direction of the light emitting portions 553 and 753 (arrangement direction of symbols).

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the scrolling direction (vertical direction) of the symbols in the first display unit and the scrolling direction (vertical direction) of the symbols in the second display unit are aligned, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, the scrolling direction of the symbols in the first display unit and the scrolling direction of the symbols in the second display unit may be configured to intersect.

(3) The processing directions of the light emitting portions 553 and 753 shown in the above embodiments are arbitrary. For example, the unevenness as the “light emitting portion” may be formed by edging processing, may be formed by laser processing or molding, or may be formed by printing.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the light emitting portions 553 and 753 are configured by forming fine irregularities on the surfaces of the light guiding portions 532 and 732, but a specific configuration for light emitting in the light guiding portion. Is optional. For example, a medium having a different refractive index from the base portion of the light guide portion may be included in the light guide portion, and light reaching the medium may be emitted from the light guide portion.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the display surface of the first display unit and the display surface of the second display unit are parallel to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display surface of the first display unit and the display surface of the second display unit may face different directions as long as the operation gap is secured for the operation of each display unit.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the movement of the light guide section 532 is performed by operating the light guide section 532 under the situation where the light supply from the side light 528 to the light guide section 532 is stopped. However, in order to embody such a technical idea, at least a part of the period during which the light supply is stopped is used as the operation period of the light guide section 532. It is not always necessary to use the entire period when the supply is stopped as the operation period.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557 extends in the same direction as the rotation center axis line CL of the rotating body 525, but the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration that extends in a direction intersecting the direction of the rotation center axis line CL.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is displayed by three drums has been illustrated, but the number of drums is arbitrary. For example, the number may be one, two, or four or more.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the main control device 162 performs the lottery based on the hold information, at the same time as the lottery (specifically, immediately after the lottery), the fluctuation of the pattern on the working port display unit of the main display unit. Although the variable display of the symbols in the variable display area of the display and variable display unit 500 is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery, it is also possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the operating port display section and the variable display of the symbol on the variable display area of the variable display unit 500.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the lottery related to the upper working opening 83a and the lottery related to the lower working opening 83b. May be. For example, the lottery related to the lower working opening 83b may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the upper working opening 83a.

(12) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, by moving the middle drum unit 923MF backward, an operation area for the rendering device 950F (movable block 951F) is formed between the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF. It is also possible to change this as follows. In order to secure an operation area for the effect device 950F (movable block 951F) disposed above between the left and right drum units 923LF and 923RF, it is possible to set the moving direction of the middle drum unit downward. Further, the arrangement of the effect device may be changed below the drum device 920F, and the operation area of the effect device (movable block) may be formed by moving the middle drum unit upward.

(13) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the drum device 920F as the symbol display device is configured by using the three drum units 923F. It is also possible to change this and replace each drum unit with a display unit having a display screen (for example, a liquid crystal display device). That is, a left display unit is provided in place of the left drum unit 923LF, a middle display unit is provided in place of the middle drum unit 923MF, a right display unit is provided in place of the right drum unit 923RF, and the positional relationship of these display units can be changed. You may comprise. It should be noted that instead of configuring one symbol display device by a plurality of display units provided for each symbol row, a display area for the left symbol row, a display area for the middle symbol row, a right symbol row for the display screen. It is also possible to configure the symbol display device by using one display section having the display area.

(14) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the sidelight 928MF of the middle drum unit 923MF is turned off in the second special effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the second special effect, the sidelight 928MF of the middle drum unit 923MF may be maintained in a lighted state.

(15) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and a big hit, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, the reel is started to rotate by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. Therefore, the present invention is also applied to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visually recognizable from a display window after the reels are stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage portion and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reel starts to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
The following characteristic group A is that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Features A1. The variable display of the pattern is started based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition (the winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b), and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (the lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is displayed. A gaming machine provided with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/effect control device 140) for stopping display,
The pattern display means includes a light guide body (light guide section 532) having a plurality of light emission sections (light emission sections 553) and a light emitting section (side section) that supplies light to an end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide body. A light 528), and when the light is being supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide, the light is emitted from the light emitting unit to display the pattern. A gaming machine characterized by.

In the pattern display means having the characteristic A1, the pattern is displayed by the light from the light emitting section being emitted from the light emitting section formed in the light guide. The pattern can be switched between display/non-display by turning on/off the light emitting unit, and the color of the pattern can be changed by changing the emission color. As described above, it is preferable to construct the picture display means by using the light guide and the light emitting portion together, in order to diversify the display mode of the picture and improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the following features A2 to A14 to this feature.

Feature A2. The variable display of the pattern is started based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition (the winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b), and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (the lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is displayed. A gaming machine provided with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/effect control device 140) for stopping display,
The pattern display means,
A light emitting part (side light 528),
A light emitting part (light emitting part 553) is formed, and the light supplied from the light emitting part is emitted from the light emitting part so that the pattern is displayed (a light guide (light guiding part). 532),
Changing means for changing the pattern displayed on the light guide by operating at least one of the light guide and the light emitting part to change the irradiation location of the light from the light emitting part to the light guide. A game machine having (notification/effect control device 140).

In the pattern display means having the feature A2, the pattern is displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting section being emitted from the light emitting section formed in the light guide. Then, the pattern displayed on the light guide is changed by operating at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit to change the light irradiation position in the light guide. With such a configuration, the display of the pattern can be made novel, which can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to the game.

Features A3. The light emitting unit is arranged so as to face the end face (end face 554) of the light guide,
The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the changing unit is configured to change a position where the light emitted from the light emitting unit is applied to the end face.

With the configuration in which the light from the light emitting portion is irradiated to the end surface of the light guide, it is possible to suppress the light source from being noticeable when visually confirming the pattern.

Features A4. The pattern displayed on the light guide is not visible or is not visible from the light emitter when the light is not supplied from the light emitter to the light guide (in a non-supply state). The gaming machine according to the feature A2 or the feature A3, which is more difficult to visually recognize than the supply state (lighting state) in which light is being supplied to the light guide body.

According to the characteristic A4, the pattern becomes invisible or difficult to visually recognize (hereinafter, also referred to as non-display) by changing from the supply state to the non-supply state. As described above, by enabling the display/non-display of the pattern, the information provided to the player by the pattern display means can be limited according to the game situation. In addition, it is possible to contribute to diversification of the display mode when the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Features A5. The changing unit is configured to operate at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit in the supply state to change an irradiation position of the light on the light guide. A game machine described in A4.

At the time of changing the design, if at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit is operated in a supply state of supplying light, the design can appear to be moving in the direction of the operation.

Features A6. The pattern display means has a holding portion (base body 524) that operably holds the light guide body,
The change means is configured to operate the light guide body to change the irradiation position of the light in the light guide body, wherein the change is made to any one of the characteristics A2 to A5. Machine.

If the light guide itself is moved instead of the light emitting section (light source), it is possible to preferably avoid the limitation of the pattern change mode due to the length of the wiring or the like. In addition, since the position of the light emitting unit can be fixed, it is possible to replace the pattern displayed at the same position, and even when the pattern is variably displayed, the points to be noticed by the player are unified. be able to. This is a preferable configuration in order to prevent overlooking of the pattern display and to reduce the fatigue of the player.

Features A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein an operation direction of the light guide body is set to be a direction intersecting a light irradiation direction of the light emitting unit.

It is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the light irradiation target (end face) and the light emitting unit in the light guide body due to the operation of the light guide body. This is preferable in order to prevent insufficient supply of light to the light emitting portion due to the fact that the light from the light emitting portion is diffused before the end face is irradiated.

Feature A8. The light emitting portions are arranged side by side in the operating direction of the light guide,
As the light emitting unit, a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit arranged side by side in the operation direction of the light guide are provided,
In the feature A6 or the feature A7, the pattern display unit can change the number of patterns to be displayed by individually controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. The game machine described.

It is possible to increase or decrease the number of patterns displayed by using the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit that can be individually controlled for light emission in accordance with the game situation, etc. Can be improved.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the light emitting units are arranged in the operation direction of the light guide, and the first light emitting unit and the light emission unit are arranged side by side in the operation direction of the light guide. The number of patterns displayed on the predetermined display position in the operation direction is controlled by controlling the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit to emit light individually. Can be changed, and the gaming machine according to the characteristic A6 or the characteristic A7."

Feature A9. The game according to any one of features A4 to A8, characterized in that the pattern display means has means for stopping the supply of light from the light emitting unit during the operation of the light guide. Machine.

Even in the conventional game machine, it is possible to make the pattern substantially indistinguishable by, for example, variably displaying the pattern at high speed. However, such movement hinders improvement in durability of the pattern display means. In particular, since the light guide body is heavier than paper or the like, it is feared that such inconvenience will be remarkable.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the pattern displayed on the light guide can be suddenly erased by stopping the supply of light from the light emitting unit. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the appearance is greatly changed (the distinguishability is changed) by controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit, it is possible to diversify the display mode and preferably suppress the deterioration of the durability caused by it.

For example, it is advisable to use a display mode in which the process of changing the pattern is specified and a display mode in which the process of changing the pattern is unspecified. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably diversify the manner of variable display of the pattern.

Feature A10. The light emitting unit is a first light emitting unit, and the light from the first light emitting unit is emitted from the light emitting unit located at a predetermined display position to display the pattern at the predetermined display position. It is configured,
The light emitting portion has an uneven shape,
The pattern display means has a second light emitting unit (a backlight 582 of the background display device 529) capable of irradiating a portion of the light guide located at the predetermined display position with light from behind the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8.

When the light emitting part is composed of minute unevenness, environmental light such as illumination of the game hall is diffused by the light emitting part, so it is not possible to completely identify the position and shape of the light emitting part by visual inspection. It will be difficult to make it possible. That is, there is a possibility that the shape and position of the light emitting portion can be grasped by carefully focusing. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the light is emitted from the second light emitting unit to the light guide, ambient light or the like is diverted by the light from the second light emitting unit, and the shape and position of the light emitting unit are changed. It can be difficult to grasp. This is preferable in order to strengthen the impact in the case where the picture suddenly appears by switching the supply state/non-supply state of the first light emitting unit.

Features A11. The changing means controls the light guide body under the condition that the light supply to the light guide body is stopped by the first light emitting section and the light guide body is irradiated with light by the second light emitting section. The gaming machine according to feature A10, which has a means for operating.

When operating the light guide body, it is undeniable that the light guide body may be specified to be operating by using the light emitting portion as a mark by carefully focusing on the eyes. This is a factor that reduces the impact when the light guide is operated and the patterns are suddenly replaced while the first light emitting unit is in the non-supply state. Therefore, when the patterns are replaced, as shown in this feature, the light supply to the light guide body by the first light emitting unit is stopped and the light is emitted to the light guide body by the second light emitting unit. If the light guide is operated below, ambient light or the like can be scattered by the light from the second light emitting unit. This makes it difficult to understand that the light guide is in operation, and suppresses the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature A12. The second light emitting portion is provided with a portion where the light emitting portion is formed in the light guide and the light emitting portion when the light emitting portion is located at the predetermined display position. The gaming machine according to the characteristic A10 or the characteristic A11, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate light to both of the non-existing portions.

According to the characteristic A12, since the light from the second light emitting unit is applied to the light emitting unit located at a predetermined display position and the peripheral region thereof, the shape of the light emitting unit, the operating condition of the light guide, etc. are specified. The effect of making it difficult to understand can be suitably exerted.

Feature A13. The light guide has transparency, and is configured such that the gaming device (background display device 529) located on the back side can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through a portion where the pattern is displayed,
The pattern is not visible when the light is not being supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide body (light-off state) or the light is being supplied from the light emitting unit (lighting state). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A12, which is configured to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state).

According to the characteristic A13, the pattern becomes invisible or difficult to be visible due to the change from the supply state to the non-supply state. Thereby, the visibility of the gaming device located on the back side can be changed through the light guide. For example, in the case of advancing the game mainly with the effect in the game device, it is preferable to prevent the pattern from interfering with the visibility of the game device by switching to the non-supply state to make the pattern invisible or difficult. it can.

Features A14. The pattern display means,
A display device (second display unit) visible from the front of the gaming machine through the light guide;
A display control unit that performs variable display of the pattern on the display device (a function of executing light emission/drive control of the second display unit by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140);
As the pattern, a first pattern displayed on the light guide and a second pattern displayed on the display device are provided.
The first pattern displayed on the light guide is not visible when the light is not being supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide (unlit state) or from the light emitting unit. Compared with the supply state (lighting state) where light is being supplied to the light guide, it becomes difficult to visually recognize,
The display control means is configured to perform variable display of the second pattern on the display device in the non-supply state, while not performing variable display of the second pattern on the display device in the supply state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A13 characterized by being present.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to prevent the other from becoming a factor that reduces the visibility under the situation where one of the variable display of the pattern by the light guide and the variable display of the pattern by the display device is focused.

<Feature B group>
The following characteristic group B is that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A gaming machine provided with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/effect control device 140) for variably displaying a pattern as the game progresses,
The pattern display means,
An annular shape or a substantially annular shape centered on a predetermined center axis (rotation center axis CL) is provided so as to be rotatable around the predetermined center axis, and a part of the outer peripheral surface (outer surface portion 551) is a gaming machine. A light guide section (light guide section 532) arranged so as to face forward,
A light emitting unit (sidelight 528) that supplies light to an end face (end face 554) facing the same direction as the predetermined central axis in the light guide unit;
A plurality of light emitting portions (light emitting portions 553) are provided on the outer peripheral surface side by side in the rotation direction of the light guide portion,
The light guide unit is configured to display the pattern by emitting light supplied from the light emitting unit to the outside of the light guide unit from the light emitting unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide section is rotated about the predetermined central axis line to change a supply point to which light is supplied from the light emitting section on the end face of the light guide section.

According to the feature B1, the light supply portion in the light guide portion (end surface) is changed by rotating the light guide portion having an annular shape or a substantially annular shape. As a result, the pattern is variably displayed on the light guide section. Since the light guide portion has a ring shape or a substantially ring shape, variable display of the pattern can be continued without reversing the rotating direction of the light guide section. That is, it is possible to prevent the light guide section from becoming excessively large in order to enhance the expressive power by performing dynamic display using the light guide section. This is a preferable structure in order to improve the attention of the player.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is held by the information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that acquires the special information (holding information) when “a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to the operation openings 83a, 83) is satisfied. (A function for acquiring information), a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the information acquired by the information acquiring means (a lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and an informing means for notifying a lottery result by the lottery means A game machine provided with a main display unit 87) and a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/production control device 140) for variably displaying a pattern according to the progress of the game, wherein the pattern display means is , A ring centered around a predetermined center axis (rotation center axis CL) or substantially ring-shaped, is provided rotatably around the predetermined center axis, and a part of the outer peripheral surface (outer surface portion 551) is a game. A light guide section (light guide section 532) arranged so as to face the front of the machine, and a light emitting section (sidelight 528) that supplies light to an end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide section that faces the central axis direction. And a plurality of light emitting portions (light emitting portions 553) are provided on the outer peripheral surface side by side in the rotation direction of the light guiding portion, and the light guiding portion is supplied from the light emitting portion. The light is emitted from the light emitting portion to display the pattern, and the light guide portion is rotated about the predetermined central axis line, whereby the end surface of the light guide portion is rotated. In the gaming machine, the supply location where the light is supplied from the light emitting unit is changed."

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the light emitting portion to which light is emitted among the plurality of light emitting portions is switched by changing the supply location.

By adopting a configuration in which the light emitting units that emit light are switched as shown in this feature, it is possible to change (replace) the pattern displayed at a predetermined display position. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the patterns to be displayed are interchanged, it is possible to greatly change the appearance of the display by the pattern display means.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the light guide portion has a circular ring shape, and the end surface is located on a plane orthogonal to the predetermined central axis.

According to the feature B3, the distance from the light emitting portion to the end surface of the light guide portion is constant at any rotation position. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the position and direction of the light emitting unit according to the change of the light supply position. Therefore, the structure relating to the light supply in the picture display means can be simplified.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the light emitting unit is configured such that the irradiation direction of light is the same direction as the predetermined central axis.

In the configuration shown in Feature B4, the light irradiation direction and the arrangement direction of the light emitting portions intersect. That is, when a plurality of light emitting portions are used together, the light emitting portions are prevented from being arranged in the light irradiation direction. Therefore, when switching the pattern to be displayed according to the rotation position, it is possible to prevent light from being supplied to a pattern that is not a display target, and a pattern that should not be originally displayed emits lightly. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of inconvenience.

Feature B5. The light guide portion is formed such that the arrangement area and the non-arrangement area of the light emitting portion alternate in the rotation direction of the light guide portion,
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein a restriction portion that restricts passage of light is provided in a portion of the end surface of the light guide portion that corresponds to the non-arrangement region.

As shown in Feature B5, by disposing the disposition regions and the non-disposition regions alternately, and by providing the restriction portion at the portion corresponding to the non-disposition region, the light supply path can be set to the non-disposition region. It is possible to suppress straddling. As a result, the effect shown in the feature B4 can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature B6. A rotating body (rotating body 525) is configured by the light guide section and a frame (frame 531) to which the light guide section is fixed,
The end portion on the side where the end face is formed in the light guide portion extends laterally from the frame,
An insertion portion (insertion portion 561) through which the end portion of the light guide portion is inserted,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5, wherein the light emitting portion is disposed in a portion of the insertion portion facing the end surface.

As shown in the feature B3 and the like, in the configuration in which the light guide portion has an annular shape, an insertion portion through which a portion (end portion) extending from the frame in the light guide portion is inserted is provided, and the insertion portion is inserted. The following effects can be expected by arranging the light emitting section in the section. That is, even if the movement of the light guide unit becomes unstable, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light guide unit at a location (insertion portion) close to the light irradiation position. Thereby, the light supply function can be stably exhibited.

It should be noted that the appearance of the pattern display means can be favorably improved by making the insertion part colored and opaque to hide the light emitting part.

Feature B7. The game according to feature B6, wherein the pattern display means has a base body (base body 524) that rotatably holds the rotating body, and the insertion portion is provided in the base body. Machine.

According to the configuration described in this feature, by providing the insertion portion in the base body that holds the rotating body, the gap between the light guide portion can be minimized. This is preferable in terms of suppressing strong interference between the insertion portion and the light guide portion and suppressing light leakage from the insertion portion.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B6 or feature B7, wherein the insertion portion faces the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the light guide portion with a gap.

In a configuration in which the positional relationship between the light emitting section and the light guide section is changed, when the light guide section and the insertion section are in contact with each other and the light guide section is damaged, light leakage or the like is likely to occur at that section. To be done. This becomes a factor that reduces the efficiency of light supply to the light emitting portion. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming a gap between the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the light guide section to avoid contact between the insertion section and the light guide section, such an inconvenience occurs. It can be suppressed appropriately.

Feature B9. The insertion portion is opened to the original side in the rotation direction of the light guide portion, and is expanded so that the gap becomes larger toward the open portion. The game according to feature B8. Machine.

The above-described light guide section can be contributed to facilitation of manufacturing and reduction of manufacturing cost by, for example, being divided into a plurality of pieces in the rotating direction. However, in such a configuration, if the boundary (edge) of each piece is caught in the open part (entrance) of the insertion part, it is assumed that the behavior of the light guide part is disturbed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the gap is formed so as to increase toward the open portion and the catching between the edge and the insertion portion is suppressed, whereby the occurrence of the inconvenience can be preferably suppressed.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the open portion of the insertion portion has a component that faces the rear of the gaming machine.

In the configuration in which the open portion (entrance portion) is expanded as shown in the feature B9, light easily leaks from this portion. Therefore, by directing the open portion toward the rear side of the gaming machine, even if light leaks, it can be made inconspicuous.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature group A to the features B1 to B10 described in detail above.

<Characteristic C group>
The following characteristic group C is "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A gaming machine provided with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500) for variably displaying a pattern as the game progresses,
The pattern display means,
Having a light transmitting property, a first light emitting portion (for example, a light emitting portion 553 corresponding to a “6” symbol) and a second light emitting portion (for example, a light emitting portion 553 corresponding to a “7” symbol) are formed, and The light guide section (light guide section) capable of switching between a first state in which the first light emission section is located at a predetermined display position (effective line) and a second state in which the second light emission section is located at the predetermined display position. 532),
A drive unit (motor 526) for driving the light guide unit,
Drive control means (drive control function in MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140) for switching the light guide portion to the first state and the second state by performing drive control of the drive portion;
A light emitting section (sidelight 528) for supplying light to the end surface of the light guide section;
A light emission control unit (light emission control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) for performing light emission control of the light emitting unit,
As the pattern, a first pattern (for example, “6” pattern) displayed by the light supplied from the light emitting unit in the first state being emitted from the first light emitting unit, and the second state And a second pattern (for example, a “7” pattern) displayed by the light supplied from the light emitting unit being emitted from the second light emitting unit,
The light emission control means has a supply stop means for stopping the light supply by the light emitting unit when switching from the first state to the second state,
The drive control unit uses at least a part of a period during which the supply of the light is stopped by the supply stopping unit when switching from the first state to the second state, as a drive period for driving the drive unit. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to.

According to the characteristic C1, when switching from the first state to the second state, the light guide section operates by using the stop period (light-out period) of the light supply by the light emitting section. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the movement of the drive unit and to make it appear as if the pattern displayed at the predetermined display position is suddenly replaced. With such a novel display, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. The supply stopping means stops the supply of light by the light emitting unit before the light guide unit starts operating when switching from the first state to the second state or at the same time when the light guide operation starts. The gaming machine described in the feature C1, which has a means for causing the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic C2, the movement of the light guide portion is less noticeable when the picture displayed at the predetermined display position is replaced. As a result, the effect shown in the feature C1 can be suitably exhibited.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the present characteristic is that "the drive control unit operates the drive unit of the drive unit after the supply of the light is stopped by the supply stop unit when switching from the first state to the second state. The game machine described in the feature C1 characterized by having a means for starting it."

Feature C3. The supply stopping means has means for stopping the supply of light by the light emitting section after the light guide section starts operating when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the characteristic C3, when the moving pattern suddenly disappears and the display of the pattern is resumed, it can be displayed as if it was replaced with another pattern. By providing such a change for the eyes, it is possible to preferably suppress monotonization of the pattern display.

Feature C4. Characteristic C1 characterized in that the light emission control means has means for restarting the supply of the light after the operation of the light guide section is stopped when switching from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine according to any one of to C3.

When the supply of light is started after the replacement of the light emitting portions is completed, a different pattern (replaced pattern) suddenly appears at a predetermined display position, so that the apparent impact can be strengthened.

Feature C5. The waiting period from the stop of the operation of the light guide unit to the restart of the light supply is shorter than the operation period of the light guide unit when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, which is characterized by:

As indicated by the characteristic C4, in the configuration in which the supply of light is restarted after the operation of the light guide unit is stopped, the waiting period until restarting becomes long, and thus the symbol to be displayed next is visually identified by the player. The possibility increases. This is because the outer shape of the light emitting portion can be specified when the light emitting portion is often squinted by illuminating the light emitting portion with ambient light of the game hall or the like. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suppressed by shortening the waiting period when the patterns are replaced.

Feature C6. The light emission control means has means for starting the supply of the light when the light guide section is switched from the first state to the second state, prior to the switching to the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

For example, in the case of performing frame-by-frame display of a picture at a predetermined display position, if the operation speed of the light guide unit (for example, scroll speed or fluctuation speed) becomes faster, the display period of the picture at the predetermined display position becomes shorter. .. It is feared that this makes it difficult to visually identify the design. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such a problem can be suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the light is supplied first. This is preferable in order to increase the operation speed of the light guide section and to enhance the responsiveness such as pattern switching.

Feature C7. The drive control means,
First control means for operating the light guide section at a first speed to switch from the first state to the second state;
A second control unit that operates the light guide unit at a second speed higher than the first speed to switch from the first state to the second state,
The light emission control means includes means for starting the supply of the light prior to the switching to the second state when the switching from the first state to the second state is performed by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3 characterized by having.

For example, in the case of performing frame-by-frame display of a picture at a predetermined display position, if the operation speed of the light guide unit (for example, scroll speed or fluctuation speed) becomes faster, the display period of the picture at the predetermined display position becomes shorter. .. It is feared that this makes it difficult to visually identify the design. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the light guide section operates at the latter of the relatively slow first speed and relatively fast second speed, the light supply is resumed first. It is possible to suppress such an inconvenience.

Feature C8. A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as a stop display period for stopping and displaying a pattern at the predetermined display position,
When switching from the first state to the second state, the light emission control means switches to the second state when the second period is set as the stop display period of the pattern in the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, characterized in that it has means for starting the supply of the light prior to.

If the stop display period of the design at the predetermined display position becomes short, it becomes difficult to visually identify the design. Therefore, in such a case (when a relatively short second period is set), the above-mentioned inconvenience is caused by adopting a configuration in which the light supply is restarted prior to the switching to the second state. It can be suppressed appropriately.

Feature C9. When the drive control unit switches from the first state to the second state and the supply of light by the light emission control unit is stopped, the light guide unit is in the process of switching. The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, which is configured not to be stopped midway.

When the pattern shown in the feature C1 or the like is replaced, the process can be visually identified, which may reduce the impact. In particular, even when the light emitting portion is made hard to see by making the light guiding portion transparent, the light emitting portion can be specified in a state where the light guiding portion is stopped. Therefore, when the first state is switched to the second state, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be preferably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the light guide section is not stopped midway in the process.

Feature C10. Any of the features C1 to C9, wherein the light emission control unit has a supply continuation unit that continues the supply of light by the light emitting unit when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine described in one.

By using the configuration shown in the feature C10 and the configuration shown in the feature C1 in combination, that is, by using the configuration showing the process of switching the pattern and the configuration not showing it, the impact of sudden replacement of the displayed pattern is achieved. Can be strengthened.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to B groups to the features C1 to C10 described in detail above.

<Feature D group>
The following characteristic D group includes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pattern display device for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A gaming machine provided with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500) for variably displaying a pattern based on establishment of a predetermined start condition (winning to the operation openings 83a, 83b),
The pattern display means,
A base body (base body 524) rotatably held;
A plurality of light guide plates (light guide panels 555 to 557) that are transparent and are arranged in parallel in the rotation direction of the base body;
A light emitting portion (sidelight 528) for supplying light to an end surface of the light guide plate, the end surface facing a direction intersecting the rotation direction,
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide plate is mounted on the base body in a state where the light guide plates are not fixed to each other.

By configuring the pattern display means (specifically, the light guide unit) by a plurality of light guide plates arranged in parallel in the rotation direction as shown by the feature D1, the shape of the pattern display means can be made substantially annular, for example. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to facilitation of manufacturing of the pattern display means and reduction of manufacturing cost, as compared with a case where one light guide plate is formed in an annular shape. Here, when a plurality of light guide plates arranged in parallel are coupled to each other, distortion due to manufacturing variations or the like may occur. In a configuration in which light is supplied to the end surface of the light guide plate, there is a concern that the pattern display function may not be performed well because the positional relationship between the light emitting portion and the end surface varies due to the influence of such distortion. In this respect, as shown in this feature, by mounting a plurality of light guides on the base in a state where they are not fixed to each other, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience. This is preferable in order to suppress the deterioration of the appearance when the variable display of the pattern is performed using the light guide plate and to improve the attention of the player.

Feature D2. The light guide plate is fixed to the base body at an intermediate portion of the light guide plate in the rotation direction, and both ends in the rotation direction are free ends. Gaming machine described in.

When a plurality of light guide plates are combined to form one light guide unit as shown in the feature D1, the appearance of the light guide unit deteriorates because the boundary portion between the light guide plates is conspicuous. This is not preferable in order to improve the attention of the player. Further, in the configuration in which the light guide plate is fixed to the base body as shown in the feature D1, the fixed portion of the light guide plate to the base body may be different in appearance from the non-fixed portion. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the ends on both sides in the rotation direction of each light guide are free ends, and the fixed portion is separated from the boundary between the light guides. This suppresses the line of sight from being guided to the boundary portion when a fixed position enters the player's field of view, and deteriorates the appearance due to the configuration of one light guide unit by combining a plurality of light guides. Can be suppressed.

Feature D3. The plurality of light guide plates adjacent to each other in the rotation direction are arranged such that end faces of the light guide plates facing the rotation direction face each other with a gap therebetween. The game machine described in Feature D2.

As shown by the feature D3, by disposing the adjacent light guide plates so that the end faces in the rotation direction face each other with a gap therebetween, it is possible to prevent the light guide plates from contacting each other due to manufacturing errors of the light guide plates. .. This is preferable in suppressing the occurrence of the distortion and the like shown in the characteristic D1.

Further, disposing each light guide plate so as not to be doubled inside and outside is advantageous in suppressing an increase in weight of the unit and suppressing a decrease in responsiveness when operating the pattern display means.

Feature D4. The light emitting unit is configured to emit light in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein end faces on both sides in the rotation direction of the light guide plate extend in the predetermined direction.

When the light guide unit is configured by a plurality of light guide plates as shown in the feature D1 and the like, it is preferable to make the boundary portion of these light guides as inconspicuous as possible. Here, as shown in this feature, by aligning the light irradiation direction and the extending direction of the boundary portion (end face), it is possible to suppress light emission at the boundary portion. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance of the picture display means.

Feature D5. The pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed on the light guide plate, and emits the light in the rotating direction of the base body. The arrangement area and the non-arrangement area of the parts are configured to alternate,
The boundary portion between the light guide plates is located in the non-arranged region,
The light emitting unit is configured to emit light in the direction of the rotation center axis of the base body,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein end faces on both sides in the rotation direction of the light guide plate extend in the rotation center axis direction.

When the light guide unit is configured by a plurality of light guide plates as shown in the feature D1 and the like, it is preferable to make the boundary portion of these light guides as inconspicuous as possible. Here, as shown in this feature, by aligning the light irradiation direction and the extending direction of the boundary portion (end face), it is possible to suppress light emission at the boundary portion. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance of the picture display means.

Further, the boundary portion is located in the non-arrangement area (blank area) of the pattern, but since the boundary portion extends in the direction of the rotation center axis, the non-arrangement area of the pattern is taken into consideration in consideration of the boundary portion. It is possible to suppress excessive growth.

Feature D6. The pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed on the light guide plate, and emits the light in the rotating direction of the base body. The arrangement area and the non-arrangement area of the parts are configured to alternate,
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein a boundary portion between the light guide plates is located in the non-arranged region.

As shown in the feature D6, if the boundary portion between the light guide plates is located in the non-arrangement area (blank area) of the pattern, the boundary portion is conspicuous due to light leakage from the boundary portion, It is possible to suppress a decrease in supply efficiency.

Feature D7. Each of the light guide plates is formed so as to have a curved surface shape with the same thickness, and one outer virtual surface of the light guide body is an annular virtual surface centered on the rotation center axis of the base body. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming machine is formed.

According to the feature D7, it is possible to replace the light guide body to which light is to be supplied according to the rotation position of the light guide unit, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of the structure of the pattern display means.

Feature D8. The end faces of the light guide plate that face the direction of the rotation center of the base body, and the end faces to which the light from the light emitting unit is supplied are located on the same plane. The gaming machine described in any one of the features D7.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to suppress the difference in the distance relationship between the light emitting unit and the end surface (light irradiation position) for each light guide body, and contribute to the improvement of the light supply efficiency.

Feature D9. The pattern display means stops and displays the pattern at a predetermined display position (effective line L1 to L5) based on the lottery result by the lottery means (lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162).
The feature D1 is characterized in that the number of light emitting portions formed on each of the plurality of light guide plates is configured to be larger than the upper limit of the number of patterns displayed at the predetermined display position. A gaming machine according to any one of features D8.

If the number of light guides (the number of divisions) is excessively increased, the opportunity for the boundary portion of the light guides to stop at the predetermined display position increases. It is feared that this will be a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the pattern display means. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the number of divisions is defined so that the number of patterns arranged on each light guide is larger than the upper limit of the number of patterns that stop at a predetermined display position, the boundary portion The chance of stopping at a predetermined display position can be reduced. This can alleviate the harmful effects of using a plurality of light guides together.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to C to the features D1 to D9 described in detail above.

<Feature E group>
The following characteristic E group is that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first special that acquires first special information (for example, hold information related to the upper working opening 83a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entering portion (for example, the upper working opening 83a) provided in the game area Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the upper working opening 83a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (upper working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means for sequentially performing a first lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means (to the upper working opening 83a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Function to execute the lottery process based on the entry of
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the lower working opening 83b) when a ball enters a second starting entrance ball portion (for example, the lower working opening 83b) provided in the game area Acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operation opening 83b in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquired information storage means (lower working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means for sequentially performing a second lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) on the basis of the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means (to the lower operation port 83b by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute the lottery process based on the entry of
It has a first display portion (for example, a rotating body 525Z of the first display unit) and a second display portion (for example, a rotating body 725Z of the second display unit), and a pattern is provided on each of the first display portion and the second display portion. And variable display unit (variable display unit 500Z) capable of variably displaying
When the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery means, first display control means (for example, the main controller 162 of the main controller 162) that displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the first lottery process on the first display unit. A function of executing the game number control process relating to the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602),
When the second lottery processing is performed by the second lottery means, a second display control means (for example, a main controller 162 of the main controller 162) that displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the second lottery processing on the second display unit. The MPU 602 is provided with a function of executing a game time control process relating to the lower operation port 83b),
A game machine characterized in that the first display section is transparent, and the second display section can be viewed through the first display section.

According to the feature E1, the result of the lottery based on the entry into the first starting entry part is displayed on the first display part, and the result of the lottery based on the entry into the second starting entry part is displayed. 2 Displayed on the display. In this way, by separately providing the first display portion for the first start ball entry portion and the second display portion for the second start ball entry portion, the player can enter any of the start ball entry portions. Based on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether the game is progressing. However, in the case where the display unit is provided for each start ball entering unit in this manner, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the lottery results will be overlooked due to the scattering of the points of interest. In this regard, as shown in this feature, since the second display unit is configured to be visible through the first display unit, there are cases where the first display unit is focused and when the second display unit is focused. Can reduce the amount of movement of the line of sight. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-described various inconveniences due to the individual display provided for each starting ball entry portion to enhance the originality. Thereby, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably strengthened.

Feature E2. The first display unit and the second display unit are arranged such that the display surface (outer surface) of the first display unit and the display surface (outer surface) of the second display unit are parallel to each other. The gaming machine described in the characteristic feature E1.

According to the feature E2, it is possible to suppress a large difference in visibility between the picture display on the first display unit and the picture display on the second display unit.

Feature E3. The first display control means has means for variably displaying a picture on the first display unit and then stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to a lottery result by the first lottery means.
The second display control means has means for variably displaying the picture on the second display unit and then stopping and displaying the picture combination corresponding to the lottery result by the second lottery means.
The variable display area when the pattern is variably displayed on the first display section and the variable display area when the pattern is variably displayed on the second display section overlap each other in the front and rear view of the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2, which is characterized in that

As shown in this feature, if the variable display area of the pattern on the first display section and the variable display area of the pattern on the second display section are overlapped in the front and rear, the player pays attention to one display section. When the variable display of the picture is performed on the other display unit under the circumstances, it is possible to suitably reduce the chance that the variable display is overlooked without making the effect flashy or adding unnecessary accents.

Feature E4. The first display control means has means for variably displaying a picture on the first display unit and then stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to a lottery result by the first lottery means on a first effective line.
The second display control means has means for variably displaying a picture on the second display unit and then stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to a lottery result by the second lottery means on a second effective line.
A stop display area when a picture combination is stopped and displayed on the first effective line and a stop display area when a picture combination is stopped and displayed on the second effective line are overlapped front and back in a front view of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3 characterized by being present.

As shown in this feature, by overlapping the stop display area in which the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit, which pattern combination corresponds to the current lottery result. It is possible to easily identify what is being done.

In the configuration in which the lottery result is notified by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line, the activated line on the first display unit and the activated line on the second display unit overlap each other in the front and back when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is also possible to do so.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the design group displayed on the first display unit and the design group displayed on the second display unit are different in appearance.

As shown in the characteristics E3 and E4, in the configuration in which the stop display area and the variable display area are overlapped with each other in front and rear, the groups of patterns displayed on the respective display sections are made different in appearance so that which display section is displayed. It is possible to improve the discriminating power as to whether the pattern is displayed.

In particular, as indicated by the characteristic E4, in the configuration in which the effective lines are aligned in the front and rear, the pattern on the first display section and the pattern on the second display section are mixed, so that, for example, each display section responds to the deviation result. It is possible to preferably avoid that the pattern combination corresponding to the jackpot result appears as if the pattern combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped even though the pattern combination to be stopped is displayed.

Feature E6. As a display control mode of the first display unit and the second display unit by the first display control unit and the second display control unit, while the pattern is variably displayed on the first display unit, the second display unit And a second control mode for restricting the variable display of the pattern on the first display unit while variably displaying the pattern on the second display unit.
In the first control mode and the second control mode, during the period when the variable display is regulated, the pattern on the display section subject to the regulation is hidden. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to the characteristic E6, the design on the second display unit is hidden in the first control mode, and the design on the first display unit is hidden in the second control mode, so that the display on the first display unit is Confusion with the display on the second display unit can be appropriately suppressed.

Feature E7. When the first display control means wins the lottery by the first lottery means during the second control mode, a pattern corresponding to the result of the winning is stopped on the first display portion. A first special display means for displaying,
When the second display control means wins the lottery by the second lottery means during the first control mode, the pattern corresponding to the result of the winning is stopped on the second display part. The gaming machine according to feature E6, which has a second special display means for displaying.

In the configuration in which the lottery by each lottery means is performed in parallel, it is possible to win the lottery by the second lottery means during the first control mode or win the lottery by the first lottery means during the second control mode. There is. In such a case, it is possible to substitute a display unit other than the display unit on the winning side for notifying the winning result, but this can be a cause for the player's confusion. On the other hand, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the process of displaying the lottery result, the variable display of the pattern is duplicated on both display units, and the information provided to the player becomes excessive. In this respect, as shown in this feature, when the lottery by the first lottery means is won in the second control mode, the first display unit displays the pattern corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state, When the lottery by the second lottery means is won during the first control mode, the above-mentioned various inconveniences are caused by displaying the pattern corresponding to the winning result on the second display portion in a stopped state. Can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E8. The first display unit is transparent and has a first light guide unit (light guide unit 532Z) in which a plurality of light emitting units are formed so as to be aligned in a predetermined direction, and light is transmitted to the first light guide unit. A first light emitting unit (sidelight 528Z) for supplying and a first driving unit (motor 526Z) for operating the first light guide unit in the predetermined direction are provided, and light from the first light emitting unit is the first light emitting unit. 1 The above-mentioned pattern is displayed by being emitted from the light emitting portion formed in the light guide portion,
The first display control unit has a drive control unit (drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140) that drives and controls the drive unit, and operates the first light guide unit by the drive control unit. Accordingly, the gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7, which is configured to variably display the design.

As shown in this feature, if the first display unit is composed of the movable first light guide unit, the light emitting unit, and the drive unit, the pattern on the first display unit can be switched between display/non-display as necessary. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to preferably realize coexistence with the second display unit located behind.

Feature E9. The first light emitting unit is configured to emit light in a direction intersecting a direction in which the first display unit and the second display unit are arranged side by side,
The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the light from the first light emitting unit is configured to be supplied to an end surface of the first light guide unit.

According to the feature E9, the light from the first light emitting unit is emitted in a direction intersecting the direction in which the first display unit and the second display unit are arranged side by side, and is supplied to the end surface of the first light guide unit. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pattern display from becoming difficult to understand due to the light from the first light emitting unit being emitted to the second display unit side.

Feature E10. The first display control means has a light emission control means (light emission control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140) for controlling the light emission of the first light emitting portion,
The light emission control means and the drive control means, when the second display control means is displaying a pattern on the second display section, the first light guide section with the first light emitting section turned off. The gaming machine according to feature E8 or feature E9, which has special control means for operating the unit.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even if the first light guide unit is operated while the pattern is displayed on the second display unit, the pattern on the first display unit remains undisplayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the operation of the first light guide section.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to Feature E10, wherein the special control unit is configured to turn on the first light emitting unit after the operation of the first light guide unit is stopped.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even when the pattern display is being performed on the second display unit, the first light emitting unit is turned on after the first light guide unit is operated in the off state. As a result, it is possible to notify the lottery result related to the first start-up entry section. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the pattern display on the second display unit from becoming difficult to understand in the process of notifying the lottery result.

Feature E12. The first light guide portion has an annular shape or a substantially annular shape, and is rotatably held around the central axis of the first light guide portion,
The game machine according to any one of features E8 to E11, wherein the second display unit is disposed inside the first light guide unit.

As shown in this feature, if the first light guide portion is formed in an annular shape or an annular shape and is rotated around the central axis thereof, while ensuring the variable display function of the pattern in the first display portion. The distance between the first display section and the second display section can be reduced.

Feature E13. The second display unit has a second light guide unit (light guide unit 732Z) that is transparent and has a plurality of light emitting units arranged side by side in the predetermined direction, and outputs light to the second light guide unit. And a second drive unit (motor 726Z) for operating the second light guide unit in the predetermined direction. Light from the second light emission unit is supplied to the second light emission unit (sidelight 728Z). The pattern is displayed by being emitted from the light emitting section formed in the second light guide section,
The second light guide portion has an annular shape or a substantially annular shape, and is rotatably held around the central axis of the first light guide portion.
The second display control unit has a drive control unit (drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140) that drives and controls the drive unit, and operates the second light guide unit by the drive control unit. By doing so, it is configured to variably display the design,
The first light emitting unit emits light in the direction of the central axis of the first light guide unit, and the second light emitting unit emits light in the direction of the central axis of the second light guide unit. The gaming machine described in any one of the characteristic features E8 to E12.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the light from the first light emitting unit guides the second light while the first display unit (first light guiding unit) and the second display unit (second light guiding unit) are brought close to each other. It is possible to suppress that the light is supplied to the first light guide section and the light from the second light emitting section is supplied to the first light guide section.

Feature E14. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A first special that acquires first special information (for example, hold information related to the upper working opening 83a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entering portion (for example, the upper working opening 83a) provided in the game area Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the upper working opening 83a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (upper working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means for sequentially performing a first lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means (to the upper working opening 83a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Function to execute the lottery process based on the entry of
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the lower working opening 83b) when a ball enters a second starting entrance ball portion (for example, the lower working opening 83b) provided in the game area Acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operation opening 83b in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquired information storage means (lower working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means for sequentially performing a second lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) on the basis of the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means (to the lower operation port 83b by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute the lottery process based on the entry of
A pattern display that has a first display unit (for example, a first display unit) and a second display unit (for example, a second display unit), and is capable of variably displaying a pattern on each of the first display unit and the second display unit. Means (eg, variable display unit 500Z),
The variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means. Then, the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one game time, and the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is set. First game time control means (for example, MPU 602 of the main controller 162 in the game operation control relating to the upper operating port 83a) capable of controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information. Function to execute processing),
The variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. Then, the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one of the game times, and the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. Second game time control means (for example, MPU 602 of the main control unit 162, which controls the lower operation port 83b to control the game time) so that the pattern display means can be controlled so that the pattern of each game time is variably displayed according to the information. Function to execute processing),
The first display section and the second display section are arranged side by side in the front and rear so that the first display section is on the front side and the second display section is on the back side, and the second display section is the first display section and the second display section. A game machine characterized by being visible from the front of the game machine through one display unit.

According to the characteristic E14, the result of the lottery based on the entry into the first starting entry part is displayed on the first display part, and the result of the lottery based on the entry into the second starting entry part is displayed. 2 Displayed on the display. In this way, by separately providing the first display portion for the first start ball entry portion and the second display portion for the second start ball entry portion, the player can enter any of the start ball entry portions. Based on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether the game is progressing. However, in the case where the display unit is provided for each start ball entering unit in this manner, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the lottery results will be overlooked due to the scattering of the points of interest. In this regard, as shown in this feature, since the second display unit is configured to be visible through the first display unit, there are cases where the first display unit is focused and when the second display unit is focused. Can reduce the amount of movement of the line of sight. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-described various inconveniences due to the individual display provided for each starting ball entry portion to enhance the originality. Thereby, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably strengthened.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features E2 to E13 to the feature E14.

Further, it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to D groups to the features E1 to E14 described in detail above.

<Feature F group>
The following characteristic F group is, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines are equipped with a game board in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed. Based on a player's shooting operation, the game ball is When the game ball is shot toward the game area and the shot game ball enters the ball entering portion provided in the game area, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of the game ball based on the game ball. In game machines where the award is given according to the movement of the game ball, by arranging game parts such as nails and windmills in the game area, the downflow path of the game ball is dispersed and the movement of the game ball is diversified. By doing so, there is one that raises the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball, and thus the degree of attention to the game (for example, see Patent Document 1). There is still room for improvement in the structure in order to raise the degree of attention to.” The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature F1. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine provided with a gaming device (gaming mechanism 800) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming device has a rolling surface (stage portion 831) on which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can roll, and a movable portion (movable body 821) displaceable to a first position and a second position. When the game ball is placed on the rolling surface, the movable portion is displaced from the first position to the second position, and when the game ball is separated from the rolling surface, the movable portion is moved to the second position. From the first to the first position,
A gaming machine characterized in that a period during which a game ball stays on the rolling surface is configured to be different depending on a rolling mode of the game ball.

According to the characteristic F1, the movable part is displaced from the first position to the second position by placing the game ball on the rolling surface, and the movable part is moved from the second position to the first position by separating the game ball from the rolling surface. Return to position. Here, a difference occurs in the stay period staying on the rolling surface according to the rolling mode of the game ball on the rolling surface (for example, the rolling direction and rolling speed of the gaming ball). That is, the period during which the movable portion is located at the second position depends on the stay period. By suppressing the movement of the gaming device from becoming monotonous in this manner, it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is composed of a "gaming board (gaming board unit 80) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a gaming device (gaming mechanism 800) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine comprising: a gaming surface, a rolling surface (stage portion 831) on which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can roll, and a movable surface displaceable to a first position and a second position. With a part (movable body 821), the movable part is displaced from the first position to the second position by placing the game ball on the rolling surface, and the game ball is separated from the rolling surface. In this case, the movable part is configured to be displaced from the second position to the first position."

Feature F2. The stage portion on which the rolling surface is formed is held so as to be able to move up and down,
The movable portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by the stage portion descending from the standby position to the descending position against the biasing force, and the stage portion is moved from the descending position to the standby position by the biasing force. The game machine according to feature F1, wherein the movable portion is displaced from the second position to the first position by returning to.

According to the feature F2, the movable portion is displaced between the first position and the second position in association with the lifting operation of the stage portion having the rolling surface. Here, by setting the operation direction of the stage part up and down, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the game ball from changing due to the movement of the stage part. This is preferable for alleviating the deviation of the waiting period in which the game ball waits on the rolling surface.

Feature F3. The game machine according to feature F2, wherein the stage portion is configured to move from the standby position to the descending position depending on the weight of a game ball placed on the rolling surface.

If it is configured to use the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface as shown in this feature, for example, a sensor that detects the game ball on the rolling surface and the movable portion based on the detection result of the sensor. The electrical structure such as an actuator for displacing becomes unnecessary. Therefore, while increasing the degree of attention to the game, it is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration due to it. This is preferable in order to promote utilization of the configuration shown in the characteristic F1 and the like.

Feature F4. The gaming device has a link portion (link member 840) that connects the stage portion and the movable portion and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the stage portion and the movable portion, and is vertically movable. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the stage unit and the movable unit are configured to be displaced alternately.

In the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to raise and lower the stage unit as shown in the feature F3, the driving force depends on the weight of the game ball. As shown in this feature, the stage part is arranged at one end side of the rotatably held link part, and the movable part is arranged at the other end side thereof, and the movements of the stage part and the movable part are staggered vertically. By forming such a structure, it is possible to reduce output transmission loss. This is preferable in order to increase the certainty of the operation of the gaming device on the assumption that the driving force is small.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the center of rotation of the link portion is disposed so as to be biased toward the movable portion side of the stage portion and the movable portion.

If the center of rotation is located closer to the movable portion as shown in this feature, it is possible to increase the weight of the movable portion that can be allowed when the movable portion is displaced by using the weight of the game ball. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of freedom in designing the game device.

Feature F6. The game machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the stage portion is formed so that a plurality of game balls can roll on the rolling surface at the same time.

In the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used as power for displacing the movable portion as described above, the displacement speed (responsiveness) can be changed depending on the number of game balls that can be located on the rolling surface. If the responsiveness is changed according to the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of the period in which the movable portion is maintained at the second position.

Feature F7. On the rolling surface, an outlet portion (center opening 832) that is opened upward and through which a game ball can pass is formed,
A discharge passage (discharge passage 833) through which the game balls that have passed through the outlet portion pass is formed in the stage portion,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein the discharge passage is a vertical passage extending in the vertical direction from the outlet portion.

In the structure in which the discharge passage is formed in the stage portion, as shown in this feature, by making the discharge passage a vertical passage, the game ball passing through the discharge passage pushes the stage, and the standby position of the stage portion It is possible to avoid delaying the return to. This can contribute to improvement in responsiveness when the movable portion is displaced between the first position and the second position.

Feature F8. On the rolling surface, an outlet portion (center opening 832) that is opened upward and through which a game ball can pass is formed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, wherein the exit portion has a size such that a plurality of gaming balls cannot pass through at the same time.

According to the feature F8, when a plurality of game balls roll on the rolling surface, the game balls are sequentially separated from the rolling surface, and it is possible to avoid the separation at once. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the period (for example, the action period) during which the movable portion waits at the second position according to the number of game balls located on the rolling surface.

Feature F9. Any one of characteristics F1 to F8 characterized in that the movement path of the game ball on the rolling surface includes a plurality of movement paths having different lengths of stay of the game ball on the rolling surface. Gaming machine described in one.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a difference occurs in the stay period of the game ball on the rolling surface depending on which moving path the game ball reaching the rolling surface passes through. With such a configuration, the player can estimate the stay period to some extent by paying attention to the movement route of the game ball. In this way, allowing the player to make a slight guess is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the rolling surface is formed so that the game ball can be moved from one movement route to another movement route of the plurality of movement routes. ..

By allowing the movement of the game balls between the movement routes, further diversification of the stay period can be easily realized.

Feature F11. A guide portion (communication passage 88bD) for guiding the game ball to the rolling surface is provided, and the guide portion has a plurality of flow paths at which moving speeds of the game ball moving to the rolling surface are different. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F10.

As shown in this feature, if the moving speed of the game ball at the time of moving to the rolling surface is made different, the difference in the staying period of the game ball on the rolling surface can be increased.

It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in this feature to the feature F1.

Feature F12. The stage portion on which the rolling surface is formed is a first stage portion,
The gaming device has a second stage part (stage part 811) provided with a plurality of ball entrance parts including predetermined ball entrance parts (ball entrances 812 and 813), and the movable part has the second position. Of the features F2 to F11, it is configured so that it is more difficult to enter the predetermined entry part in the state of being placed in the first position than in the state of being placed in the first position. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

According to the feature F12, it is difficult to enter the predetermined ball entering part because the movable part is arranged in the second position, but for this period, the left and right sides are left and right during the period when the game ball stays on the rolling surface. Will be done. In this way, by diversifying the period during which it is difficult to enter the predetermined ball entry part, it is preferable for the player to pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the first stage part and the second stage part. Can be urged.

Feature F13. The first stage unit is configured to move from the standby position to the descending position by the weight of the game ball placed on the rolling surface,
The gaming device has a link portion (link member 840) that connects the first stage portion and the movable portion and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the first stage portion and the movable portion. In a direction, the first stage portion and the movable portion are configured to be displaced alternately.
The movable portion has a stage surface forming portion (upper surfaces 823a and 824a of the columnar portions 823 and 824) that forms a part of the stage surface of the second stage portion in the state of being arranged at the second position,
The game machine according to feature F12, wherein the stage surface forming portion is formed such that an area of the stage surface forming portion is smaller than an area of the rolling surface in the first stage portion.

In the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to lower the first stage portion and raise the movable portion in conjunction with it, the movable portion is moved by placing the game ball on the movable portion (stage surface forming portion). Will sink below. Although this is preferable in terms of diversifying the movement of the gaming device, it is feared that a player who is paying attention to the gaming device may be more tired if such a movement occurs frequently and the state changes minutely. It Therefore, as shown in this feature, the area of the stage surface forming portion is made smaller than the area of the rolling surface of the first stage portion, and the number of game balls on the stage surface forming portion is equal to the number of game balls on the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the above-mentioned fine state changes and realize a practically preferable configuration by reducing the number of opportunities exceeding the number of.

Feature F14. The first stage unit is configured to move from the standby position to the descending position by the weight of the game ball placed on the rolling surface,
The gaming device has a link portion (link member 840) that connects the first stage portion and the movable portion and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the first stage portion and the movable portion. In a direction, the first stage portion and the movable portion are configured to be displaced alternately.
The movable portion is a passage forming portion (upper surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar portions 823, 824) that forms a bottom portion of the passage through which the game balls that have flowed into the predetermined ball-in portion pass while being arranged at the first position. ), and the passage forming portion is configured to project upward from the predetermined ball entrance portion by arranging the movable portion at the second position. The gaming machine according to F12 or feature F13.

As shown in this feature, the passage forming portion of the movable portion forms a discharge passage (bottom portion) in the second stage portion, and the passage forming portion is configured to project upward from a predetermined ball entry portion. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball heading for the predetermined ball entrance portion from being mounted on the movable portion. As a result, it is possible to preferably avoid shortening the period during which it is difficult for the game ball that has reached the second stage to enter the predetermined entry part.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the groups A to E to the features F1 to F14 described in detail above.

<Feature G group>
The following characteristic group G includes: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include one having a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display unit. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Features G1. A pattern display device (a drum device 920F or the like) that variably displays a pattern based on that a predetermined starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning in the operation openings 83a and 83b);
Movable effect device (movable block 951F, etc.) having a movable body (movable block 951F, etc.) at a standby position (retracted position) and at an effect position where the pattern display device has a larger overlap in the game machine front view than the standby position ( And a rendering device 950F),
The pattern display device is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through a transparent panel portion (glass panel 23),
The pattern display device has a plurality of (for example, three) display portions (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF, etc.) capable of variably displaying patterns.
A moving unit (variable mechanism 931F) for moving at least one of the plurality of display units from the first position (front position) to the second position (rear position),
A game machine characterized in that a gap generated by the movement of the moving means from the first position to the second position becomes an operation area of the movable body.

According to the feature G1, when the movable body is moved to the effect position to perform the display effect or the like, any one of the plurality of display units configuring the pattern display device moves from the first position to the second position. An operation area of the movable body is secured. With such a configuration, while the visibility of the design is improved by bringing the design display device closer to the panel portion, the impact of the production is achieved by performing the production by the movable production device (movable body) at a position close to the player. Can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "a pattern display device (a drum device 920F or the like) that variably displays a pattern based on that a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, winning in the operation openings 83a and 83b), and a standby position ( Movable effect device (effect device 950F) including a movable body (movable block 951F, etc.) that can be moved to the retreat position) and the effect position where the design display device has a larger overlap in the game machine front view than the standby position. Etc.) and is configured such that the pattern display device can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through a transparent panel portion (glass panel 23), and the pattern display device can variably display the pattern. A moving unit (variable mechanism 931F) having a plurality of display portions (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF, etc.) and moving at least one of the display portions from the first position (front position) to the second position (rear position). ), the gap between the pattern display device and the panel portion expanded by the movement from the first position to the second position by the moving means becomes an operation area of the movable body. Machine."

Features G2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b) (function of acquiring holding information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) When,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a plurality of display parts (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means after variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the picture display device;
It has a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) which can be moved to a standby position (retracted position) and a production position (production position) where the overlap with the picture display device in the front view of the gaming machine is larger than the standby position. And a movable production device (production device 950F, etc.),
A moving unit (variable mechanism 931F) for moving at least one of the plurality of display units from the first position (front position) to the second position (rear position),
A game machine characterized in that a gap generated by the movement of the moving means from the first position to the second position becomes an operation area of the movable body.

According to the feature G2, when the movable body is moved to the effect position to perform the display effect or the like, any one of the plurality of display units included in the pattern display device moves from the first position to the second position. An operation area of the movable body is secured. With such a configuration, while the visibility of the design is improved by bringing the pattern display device closer to the player, the impact of the production is achieved by performing the effect by the movable effect device (movable body) at a position close to the player. Can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that acquires special information (holding information) based on "a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, winning in the operation openings 83a and 83b)". A function of acquiring the reservation information in the above), an acquisition information storage unit (a reservation ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and the acquisition Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162); A pattern display device (drum device 920F, etc.) having a plurality of display units (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF, etc.) capable of variably displaying the pattern, and the pattern is variably displayed on each of the plurality of display units. The display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display the picture combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means later, the standby position (retracted position), and the front of the game machine rather than the standby position. A movable effect device (effect device 950F etc.) having a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) which can be moved to an effect position (effect position) which has a large overlap with the pattern display device in view. A moving unit (variable mechanism 931F) for moving at least one of the display units from the first position (front position) to the second position (rear position), the moving unit moving the first position to the second position. A game machine characterized in that a gap generated by the movement of the movable body becomes an operation area of the movable body.

Features G3. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b) (function of acquiring holding information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) When,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a plurality of display parts (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means after variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the picture display device;
It has a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) which can be moved to a standby position (retracted position) and a production position (production position) where the overlap with the picture display device in the front view of the gaming machine is larger than the standby position. And a movable production device (production device 950F, etc.),
The pattern display device is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through a transparent panel portion (glass panel 23),
A moving unit (variable mechanism 931F) for moving at least one of the plurality of display units from a first position (front position) to a second position (rear position) where a gap with the panel unit is larger than the first position. Prepare,
A game machine characterized in that a gap between the pattern display device and the panel portion expanded by the movement of the moving means from the first position to the second position becomes an operation area of the movable body.

According to the feature G3, when the movable body is moved to the effect position to perform the display effect or the like, any one of the plurality of display units configuring the pattern display device moves from the first position to the second position. An operation area of the movable body is secured. With such a configuration, while the visibility of the design is improved by bringing the design display device closer to the panel portion, the impact of the production is achieved by performing the production by the movable production device (movable body) at a position close to the player. Can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that acquires special information (holding information) based on "a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, winning in the operation openings 83a and 83b)". A function of acquiring the reservation information in the above), an acquisition information storage unit (a reservation ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and the acquisition Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162); A pattern display device (drum device 920F, etc.) having a plurality of display units (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF, etc.) capable of variably displaying the pattern, and the pattern is variably displayed on each of the plurality of display units. The display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display the picture combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means later, the standby position (retracted position), and the front of the game machine rather than the standby position. A movable effect device (effect device 950F, etc.) having a movable body (movable block 951F, etc.) that can be moved to an effect position (effect position) that has a large overlap with the picture display device in the visual sense, and is transparent. It is configured such that the pattern display device can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through a panel portion (glass panel 23) having a plurality of display portions, and at least one of the plurality of display portions from the first position (front position) to the first position. A moving means (variable mechanism 931F) for moving to a second position (rear position) having a larger gap with the panel portion than the one position is provided, and expansion is performed by moving from the first position to the second position by the moving means. A game machine characterized in that a gap between the picture display device and the transparent panel is an operating area of the movable body."

Features G4. The moving means moves a predetermined display portion (the middle drum unit 923MF or the like) of the plurality of display portions from the first position to the second position,
The display control means, when the movement of the predetermined display portion to the second position is performed, the pattern is variably displayed on the predetermined display portion, and the display control means selects one of the plurality of display portions. The game according to the feature G3, which has a display state transition means for transitioning to a display state in which a pattern is stopped and displayed on a display unit (left drum unit 923LF and right drum unit 923RF) other than the predetermined display unit. Machine.

When the display unit in which the pattern is stopped and displayed is compared with the display unit in which the variable display of the pattern is continued, it is assumed that the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the latter than the former. Therefore, by moving the display section (predetermined display section) in which the variable display of the pattern is continued to form the operation area of the movable body, it is possible to prevent the initial movement of the movable body from being overlooked.

Features G5. The display state transition means stops the display on a display unit (the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF) other than the predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units, and displays the pattern on the predetermined display unit. The gaming machine according to feature G4, which is a unit that shifts to a reach display state that is variably displayed.

In the reach display state, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the display unit in which the variable display of the pattern is continued. Therefore, by moving this display unit (predetermined display unit) to form the operation region of the movable body, it is possible to suppress the oversight of the initial movement of the movable body.

Features G6. The display state transition means stops the display of a set of display units (the left drum unit 923LF and the right drum unit 923RF) located on both sides of the predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units to stop the reach display state. It is configured to move to
The moving means is a first moving means,
When moving the predetermined display section to the second position by the first moving section, there is provided a second moving section that moves the one set of display sections to a side where the interval between the one set of display sections is enlarged. The gaming machine described in the feature G5.

According to the feature G6, it is possible to favorably allow the movable body to be upsized. In this case, by configuring the display units on both sides to be moved respectively, it is possible to preferably shorten the period for securing the operation area.

Features G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the second moving means is configured to move each of the display units in the same direction as a reach line formed in the reach display state.

By moving the set of display units located on both sides of the predetermined display unit in parallel with the reach line, the reach line is changed after switching while switching the display form of the pattern display device to secure the operation area. It is possible to make it difficult to cause inconvenience such as being difficult to understand.

Features G8. In a state where the predetermined display unit is arranged at the second position and the movable body is arranged at the effect position, a display area in which the pattern is variably displayed on the predetermined display unit and a movable body One of the characteristics G4 to G7, characterized in that the operation area overlaps with the front and rear, and the display area is visible through the operation area during operation of the movable body. Game machine.

In the configuration in which the predetermined display unit is retracted, the predetermined display unit is arranged in a recessed position, so that it is difficult for the other display unit (for example, the left and right display units) and the movable body to visually recognize the pattern on the predetermined display unit. There is concern that it will become. This may cause a player who wants to pay attention to the design to feel that the predetermined backward movement function of the display unit is troublesome. In this respect, if the display area is made visible through the operation area as shown in this feature, it is possible to secure the visibility of the design even during the performance by the movable body and suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Features G9. The moving means moves a predetermined display portion (for example, the middle drum unit 923MH) of the plurality of display portions from the first position to the second position,
The movable body is provided with a light reflecting portion that reflects light,
A display unit arranged next to the predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units has a light irradiation unit (side) for irradiating light to the light reflection unit of the movable body arranged at the first position. The lights 928LH, 928RH) are provided, The gaming machine according to any one of the features G3 to G8.

When the movable body moves to the space (effect position) formed by the movement of the predetermined display unit, light is emitted from the other display unit adjacent to the predetermined display unit to the movable body (light reflecting unit). The reflected light reflects the movable body as if it were emitting light. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in weight and thickness of the movable body as compared with a configuration in which the movable body itself is provided with a light emitting substrate or the like, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the operation region. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the predetermined display unit while ensuring the performance function, and it can be expected that the responsiveness at the time of performance is improved.

Feature G10. The moving means moves a predetermined display portion (for example, a middle drum unit 923MF) of the plurality of display portions from the first position to the second position,
The predetermined display unit is at any position of the first position and the second position with other display units configuring the plurality of display units in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the predetermined display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G9, characterized in that the weight is configured to be maintained.

Even when the predetermined display unit is retracted, the overlap with the other display unit is positioned in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the predetermined display unit. Thus, it is possible to prevent light from other game parts and the like from leaking to the operation region through the boundary between the predetermined display unit and the other display unit.

Feature G11. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G10, wherein the moving direction of the movable body is defined to be parallel to the panel portion.

If the movable body is configured to move in parallel with the panel section as indicated by the feature G11, the operation gap between the movable body and the panel section can be reduced. This can suppress an increase in the operation area (that is, an increase in the moving distance of the display unit) for the purpose of ensuring an operation gap.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the groups A to F to the features G1 to G11 described in detail above.

<Feature H group>
The following characteristic H group is that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display unit. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Features H1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b) (function of acquiring holding information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) When,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a plurality of display parts (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means after variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the picture display device;
It has a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) which can be moved to a standby position (retracted position) and a production position (production position) where the overlap with the picture display device in the front view of the gaming machine is larger than the standby position. With a light production device (production device 950F, etc.),
As a display form of the plurality of display units, a first display form (first form) and a front region of a predetermined display unit (middle drum unit 923MF) that constitutes the plurality of display units is darker than the first display form. And a second display form (second form),
The light production device is configured to execute light production in a front area of the predetermined display unit,
Display form switching means for switching the display form of the plurality of display units from the first display form to the second display form when the light effect is performed by the light effect device (in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140). A function of executing a display form switching process).

It is advantageous to execute the light production using the movable light production device in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. However, it is assumed that if the light of the light production device is mixed with the light from other game machines or the illumination of the game hall, the impact of the light production will be reduced, and it will be an obstacle to exerting the effect of increasing the attention level. To be done. For example, although the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by setting the light emission level of the light production device to a high level, excessively strong light can cause a player to feel uncomfortable. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the front area of the predetermined display unit becomes dark by switching the display form from the first display form to the second display form. By performing the light effect in such a darkened area (dark place), it is possible to suppress the decrease in impact while suppressing the light emission level. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the light effect device.

Features H2. Each of the plurality of display units has an illumination unit (sidelight 928F),
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the display control unit has a unit that turns off the illumination unit of the predetermined display unit in the second display form.

According to the feature H2, the illumination unit is turned off for a predetermined display unit located behind the light production device by shifting from the first display form to the second display form. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light from the predetermined display unit (illumination unit) from being mingled with the light from the light production device arranged in front of the predetermined display unit, and to suitably exhibit the effect shown in the feature H1. You can

Features H3. Each of the plurality of display units has an illumination unit (sidelight 928F),
In the second display mode, the display control means sets the illumination unit of the predetermined display unit to a state of being turned off, and displays the display units located on both sides of the predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units. The gaming machine according to the feature H1, characterized in that the gaming machine has a means for turning on the illumination unit.

According to Feature H3, the illumination unit is turned off for the predetermined display unit located behind the light effect device, and the illumination units are turned on for the display units located on both sides of the predetermined display unit, thereby displaying the pattern. There are light and dark differences in the device. By performing the light effect by the light effect device after generating such a difference, the light effect can be easily made conspicuous.

Features H4. A display unit disposed on both sides of a predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units controls the light emitted from the illumination units of the display units on both sides to be applied to the front area. (945LF, 945RF) are provided, The gaming machine according to the feature H2 or the feature H3.

Irradiation of the light from the illumination unit attached to the display unit arranged on both sides of the predetermined display unit to the front area of the predetermined display unit is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from the illumination units from interfering with the light effect.

Features H5. Among the plurality of display units, the display units disposed on both sides of the predetermined display unit face each other with the movable body sandwiched therebetween in the second display mode (side face units 945LF, 945RF). ) The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the light production is executed, the lights from other game machines and the illumination of the game hall are displayed by the display units (opposite units) located on both sides of the light production device (movable body). (Hereinafter, referred to as outside light) can be weakened or blocked. In this way, by causing a part of the display units to function as a wall for dimming or blocking light, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the impact of the light effect while suppressing the light emission level of the light effect device. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the light effect device.

In addition, in the combination with the feature H4, the "facing part" shown in this feature may be the same as the "regulating part" shown in the feature H4.

Features H6. The pattern display device is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through a transparent panel portion (glass panel 23),
In the second display mode, any one of features H1 to H4 is characterized in that the front region is surrounded by the plurality of display units on the back surface side of the panel unit. The game machine described.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by enclosing the effect position (front area) with a plurality of display units, light (hereinafter, referred to as external light) from the illumination of another gaming machine or a game hall is applied to the effect position. Can be suppressed. In this way, by causing the display unit to function as a wall for dimming or blocking light, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the impact of light production while suppressing the light emission level of the light production device. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the light effect device.

Features H7. As the plurality of display units, the predetermined display unit (middle drum unit 923MF) and a set of display units located on both sides of the predetermined display unit (left drum unit 923LF and right drum unit 923RF),
The display form switching means moves the predetermined display unit in a predetermined direction (for example, rearward) to thereby set an execution area of the light effect by the light effect device including the effect position between the pair of display units. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, which is formed.

According to the characteristic H7, the predetermined display unit moves to form a concave portion (predetermined region) by the predetermined display unit and the other display unit. By setting this concave portion as an operation area for the light production device, it is possible to suitably exhibit various effects shown in the feature H1 and the like.

Further, the visibility of the design is improved by bringing the design display device closer to the panel portion covering the design display device, and the light production is performed by the light production device (movable body) at a position close to the player. The impact of can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Features H8. The light production device is characterized in that, in the second display mode, the display parts of the plurality of display parts located on both sides of the front region are prevented from projecting to the front side with respect to the front end. The gaming machine according to any one of features H7.

By adopting a configuration in which the projection of the light production device (movable body) is restrained as shown in Feature H8, it is possible to preferably suppress the above-mentioned external light from being applied to the movable body.

Features H9. Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning into the operation openings 83a, 83b) ,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a plurality of display parts (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means after variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the picture display device;
It has a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) which can be moved to a standby position (retracted position) and a production position (production position) where the overlap with the picture display device in the front view of the gaming machine is larger than the standby position. With a light production device (production device 950F, etc.),
As the plurality of display units, a predetermined display unit (middle drum unit 923MF) and a set of display units positioned on both sides of the predetermined display unit (left drum unit 923LF and right drum unit 923RF) are provided,
When the light effect is performed by the light effect device, the display mode is switched by moving the predetermined display unit in a predetermined direction that intersects the arrangement direction of the plurality of displays. Equipped with means,
A game machine characterized in that a concave space including the effect position is formed between the set of display units by the movement of the predetermined display unit.

It is advantageous to execute a light effect or the like using the light effect device in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. However, it is assumed that if the light from the light production device is mixed with the light from the surrounding game parts (for example, the lamp part), the impact of the light production will decrease, and it will be an obstacle to exerting the effect of increasing the degree of attention. To be done. For example, although it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience by increasing the light emission level of the light effect device, it is feared that excessively strong light may cause a player to feel uncomfortable. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, by changing the positional relationship between the predetermined display unit and the set of display units located on both sides of the predetermined display unit (by changing the display form), the concave space including the effect position is formed. It is formed. In this way, by enclosing the effect position from the three sides by the display unit, it is possible to suppress the irradiation of light to the effect position from, for example, the illumination of a peripheral game machine or a game hall (a dark place is formed). By performing the light effect in this dark place, it is possible to suppress the decrease in impact while suppressing the light emission level. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the light effect device.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the groups A to G to the features H1 to H9 described in detail above.

<Feature group I>
The following characteristic group I is: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include one having a picture display device that variably displays a picture on the display unit. In this kind of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Feature I1. Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning into the operation openings 83a, 83b) ,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a plurality of display parts (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so as to stop and display a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means after variably displaying a plurality of the patterns on the pattern display device. Prepare,
The plurality of display units include a predetermined display unit (middle drum unit 923MF),
As a display mode of the pattern on the predetermined display unit, a high-identification display mode (first form: forward display of the pattern) and a relatively low-identification display mode (second form) in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by the appearance is relatively high. : Horizontal display of the pattern) and
The display control unit switches the display mode switching unit (the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 switches the display mode to the high identification display mode after stopping and displaying the pattern variably displayed in the low identification display mode). A game machine having a function of executing a process for a game.

When the design is stopped and displayed in the low identification display mode, the visibility of the design remains low. In such a situation, it is assumed that the player who wants to identify the pattern pays attention to the stopped and displayed pattern. By switching the display mode from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode after the stop display of the pattern, the stop displayed pattern can be easily identified. With such a configuration, the player's attention can be increased by the change of the display mode even after the stop display of the pattern.

Feature I2. The display control means has means for switching the display mode of the pattern from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode,
The display mode switching means, after switching from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode, is for switching to the high identification display mode through a stop display of a pattern,
The high-identification display mode and the low-identification display mode are configured such that the variable display speeds (scroll speeds) of the patterns are the same, and the gaming machine according to Feature I1.

In the configuration in which the display mode of the pattern is switched in the order of high identification display mode→low identification display mode (stop display generation)→high identification display mode, the variable display speed of the pattern should be the same between the high identification display mode and the low identification display mode. For example, even if it is difficult to identify the design from the appearance in the low identification display mode, it is possible to infer the design from the rhythm of variable display of the design. As a result, the difference between the low identification display mode and the high identification display mode can be clarified to enhance the sharpness, and at the same time, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the attention degree in the low identification display mode.

Feature I3. The feature I1 or the feature characterized in that in the high identification display mode, the pattern is configured to face the front of the gaming machine, and in the low identification display mode, the pattern is oriented in a direction different from the high identification display mode. The gaming machine described in I2.

If the configuration is such that the orientation of the pattern is different depending on the display mode as indicated by the characteristic I3, the difference in distinctiveness indicated by the characteristic I1 and the like can be generated. With such a configuration, the patterns used in each display mode can be made common even when the difference in distinguishability is secured. This is preferable for avoiding the confusion of the player due to the excessive number of types of patterns.

Feature I4. The pattern display device is configured to variably display the patterns so that some of the plurality of patterns arranged in a predetermined order can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.
In the low identification display mode, the number of patterns visible in the low identification display mode is configured to be larger than the number of patterns visible in the high identification display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3.

When a plurality of patterns are used together, the patterns that are easily noticeable may differ depending on the player's preference and the like. Further, when the patterns are arranged in a predetermined order, it is possible to infer a pattern that crosses the effective line or the like from the noticeable patterns. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the low identification display mode, if the number of patterns in the field of view (the number of display objects) is increased, the pattern itself stopped and displayed on the active line in the low identification display mode Even if it is difficult to identify, it is possible to infer the design from other designs. As a result, even in the low identification display mode, it is possible to suitably attract attention to the design.

Feature I5. The display control unit has a display transition unit that transitions to a reach display state by stopping and displaying a picture on the display units on both sides of the predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units,
The display mode switching means is configured to switch the display mode of the pattern on the predetermined display unit from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode in the reach display state. The game machine according to any one of features I4.

In the reach display state, the player's attention is directed to the last pattern that is variably displayed. In such a situation in which the areas to be noticed are narrowed down, it is difficult to identify the pattern by switching from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode, which is a factor causing the player discomfort. It can be preferably suppressed.

Feature I6. The display mode switching means switches the display mode of the picture on the predetermined display unit from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode in the reach display state, while the other display units of the plurality of display units are displayed. Is configured so that the display mode is the high identification display mode, and the gaming machine according to the feature I5.

As shown in Feature I6, the pattern that has been stopped and displayed at the time of transition to the reach display state is maintained in the high identification display mode, so that the pattern that is being stopped and displayed is variably displayed (low identification display mode). Can be a stepping stone in identifying. Displaying the comparison target in the high identification display mode in this manner has technical significance.

Features I7. The display mode switching means causes the pattern that is variably displayed on the predetermined display unit to be separated from the reach line formed in the reach display state when switching from the high identification display mode to the low identification display mode. In the case of returning from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode, the pattern stopped and displayed on the predetermined display unit is returned to the reach line.
The game according to the feature I5 or the feature I6, characterized in that a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is formed by returning the pattern stopped and displayed on the predetermined display unit to the reach line. Machine.

According to the feature I7, the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display unit is returned to the reach line with the switching from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode, so that the pattern combination is formed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably switch the display mode itself as a part of the display effect.

Feature I8. The design display device is configured to perform the variable display by scrolling the design in a predetermined direction,
Features I1 to CHARACTERISTICS, characterized by being provided with suggestion means (for example, a spoke portion of the frame 942F) that indicates that the design is variably displayed by displacing in the predetermined direction together with the design scrolled in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7.

According to the characteristic I8, by suggesting the variable display by the configuration that is displaced in synchronization with the scroll display of the pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game has ended due to the deterioration of the distinctiveness.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to H groups to the features I1 to I8 described in detail above.

<Feature J group>
The following characteristic J group is that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Features J1. A pattern display means (circulation device 1020K) having a display section (display section DP) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns;
A defining unit arranged in front of the display unit and defining a visible range (display range OP) of the patterns on the display unit so that some of the plurality of patterns can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine ( Partition 1010K),
Display control means (MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) for variably displaying the pattern on the display unit and then stopping the display;
The relative position of the display unit and the defining unit is a first relative position (one of the first display form and the second display form) and a second relative position (first display) different from the first position in a gaming machine front view. A drive unit (guide block drive unit 1032K) for changing the display mode and the second display form),
The display control means is configured such that the relative position of the display unit and the defining unit is the first relative position, and at least one of the plurality of patterns is stopped and displayed in the visible range. By changing the first relative position to the second relative position to change the pattern stopped and displayed in the visible range (by the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140 to the first display form). A game machine having a function of executing switching processing and switching processing to the second display form.

According to the configuration described in this feature, by changing the positional relationship between the display unit and the defining unit from the first relative position to the second relative position under the condition that the pattern is stopped and displayed in the visual range, the visual range is changed. The design that is stopped and displayed will be changed. In this way, even if the pattern whose variable display has been completed can be changed (specially moved) in accordance with the change in the relative position, it is possible to suitably suppress the rapid decrease in attention to the pattern after the stop display.

Features J2. Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning into the operation openings 83a, 83b) ,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display means (circulation device 1020K) having a display section (display section DP) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns;
A defining unit arranged in front of the display unit and defining a visible range (display range OP) of the patterns on the display unit so that some of the plurality of patterns can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine ( Partition 1010K),
Display control means (MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so that a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed in the visible range after variably displaying the pattern on the display unit. )When,
A drive unit (guide block drive unit 1032K) for displacing the display unit to a first position (one of the lower limit position and the upper limit position) and a second position (the other of the lower limit position and the upper limit position),
When the display unit is displaced from the first position to the second position, the positional relationship between the display unit and the defining unit is changed,
The display control means controls the display unit to move from the first position to the first position under a situation where the display unit is arranged at the first position and at least one of the plurality of patterns is stopped and displayed in the visible range. Change means for changing the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the visible range by displacing it to the 2 position (switching process to the first display mode or switching to the second display mode by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140). A gaming machine having a function of executing processing).

According to the configuration described in this feature, the displacement of the display unit from the first position to the second position changes the design stopped and displayed in the visible range to another design. In this way, even if the pattern whose variable display has been completed can be changed (specially moved) in accordance with the displacement of the display unit, it is possible to preferably prevent a rapid decrease in attention to the pattern after the stop display.

Features J3. The changing means moves the display unit from the first position to the first position in a state where a part of the plurality of patterns is stopped and displayed in the visible range and the variable display of other patterns is continued. The game machine according to feature J2, wherein the game machine is configured to change the design that is stopped and displayed in the visible range by displacing it to two positions.

As shown in this feature, if the above-mentioned configuration is changed under the condition that some patterns are variably displayed, that is, the configuration is changed before all the patterns are stopped and displayed, It is possible to greatly change the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, without significantly changing the number (and without providing a difference in the movement amount for each pattern row). This is preferable in terms of simplifying the configuration relating to the displacement of the display unit and suppressing the movement amount.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is that "the changing means is continued such that a part of the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in the visible range and the variable display of the other symbols is kept at a constant speed. In a feature J2, the design which is stopped and displayed in the visible range is changed by displacing the display unit from the first position to the second position under the situation. It is also possible to set it as the described gaming machine."

Features J4. The game machine according to feature J2 or feature J3, wherein the displacement speed of the display unit by the changing unit is different from the speed of the variable display.

As shown in the feature J2 and the like, in the configuration in which the pattern that is stopped and displayed due to the displacement of the display unit is changed, it is feared that the change is confused with the original variable display, which may reduce the impact of the change. It Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the displacement speed of the display section by the changing means different from the speed of the variable display, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Features J5. The display control means is configured to perform the variable display by scrolling the pattern in a predetermined direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
Any one of features J2 to J4 characterized in that a displacement direction of the display unit from the first position to the second position in a front view of the gaming machine is configured to be parallel to the predetermined direction. Gaming machine described in one.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even if the pattern is changed due to the displacement of the display unit, it is possible to preferably use the effective line when the change is not made. Since it is not necessary to newly form or add or delete an effective line in accordance with the displacement of the display unit (change of the pattern), the movable display unit allows the player to diversify the display mode of the pattern, which is a player. Can be suppressed to be a factor to be embarrassed.

Features J6. The display control means is configured to perform the variable display by scrolling the pattern in a predetermined direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
Any one of characteristics J2 to J5, characterized in that a displacement direction of the display section from the first position to the second position in a front view of the gaming machine is opposite to the predetermined direction. The gaming machine described in one.

In the configuration in which the pattern is changed by the displacement of the display unit as shown in the feature J2 and the like, it is feared that the change may be confused with the original variable display to reduce the impact of the change. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the displacement direction of the display unit by the changing means opposite to the direction of the variable display, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Features J7. As a stop mode when a part of the plurality of patterns is stopped and displayed, a first stop mode in which the determination result by the determination unit is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the degree of expectation is relatively low, A relatively high second stop mode is provided,
The changing unit displaces the display unit from the first position to the second position when the stop mode under the situation in which the display unit is arranged at the first position is the first stop mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J6, characterized in that the game machine has means for changing the stop mode to the second stop mode.

According to feature J7, when the display is in the first stop mode in which the degree of expectation is relatively low, the display unit moves from the first position to the second position and the design is changed, so that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Shift to the second high stop mode. By thus changing the position of the display unit so as to increase the degree of expectation of the stop mode, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature J2 or the like can be suitably exerted.

Features J8. After starting the variable display of the patterns, the display control means stops and displays the other patterns except the final stop pattern among the patterns in which the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined determination information may be established. Under the circumstances, the reach display means for stopping and displaying the picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means through the reach display for variably displaying the final stop picture,
The changing means has a means for changing the display portion from the first position to the second position to change the stop display pattern from the non-reach display pattern to the reach display pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J6.

According to the feature J8, the display unit is displaced from the first position to the second position during the variable display that does not correspond to the reach display and the pattern is changed. With the configuration in which the reach display is changed by changing the position of the display unit as described above, the effect of improving the attention degree shown in the feature J2 or the like can be suitably exerted.

Features J9. An effective line is provided to stop and display the pattern combination on the display unit,
A feature J2 to a feature that the design stopped and displayed on the activated line is changed to another design by displacing the display unit from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8.

As shown in the feature J9, even if the displacement from the first position to the second position occurs, if the changed pattern is prevented from shifting from the effective line, it is possible to change the pattern from the stopped display pattern. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship with the effective line from becoming difficult to understand.

Features J10. The game unit according to any one of features J2 to J9, wherein the drive unit is configured such that the front and rear positions of the display unit are different between the first position and the second position. Machine.

According to the feature J10, it is possible to cause a difference in the locus of movement of the pattern between the variable display and the change. Thereby, the confusion between the variable display of the design and the change of the design can be appropriately suppressed.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features J2 to J10 to the feature J1.

Feature J11. Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning into the operation openings 83a, 83b) ,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display means (circulation device 1020K) having a display section (display section DP) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns;
A defining unit arranged in front of the display unit and defining a visible range (display range OP) of the patterns on the display unit so that some of the plurality of patterns can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine ( Partition 1010K),
Display control means (MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) for performing display control so that a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed in the visible range after variably displaying the pattern on the display unit. )When,
A drive unit (guide block drive unit 1032K) for changing the relative position between the display unit and the regulation unit;
The display control means,
A first changing unit (a scrolling display function of symbols in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) for changing the symbols displayed in the visible range by controlling the display unit;
A second changing unit (a display mode switching function in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) that changes the pattern displayed in the visible range by controlling the drive unit. A gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, by combining the configuration that changes the pattern displayed in the visible range by controlling the display unit and the configuration that changes the pattern displayed in the visible range by controlling the drive unit, By diversifying the pattern change mode, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the pattern display and contribute to the improvement of the attention to the pattern display (the pattern display means).

Features J12. The first changing unit changes the pattern displayed in the visible range by scrolling the pattern in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to Feature J11, wherein the second changing unit changes the pattern displayed in the visible range by scrolling the pattern in a direction different from the predetermined direction.

As shown in this characteristic, by making the displacement directions of the patterns different between the first changing means and the second changing means, it is possible to prevent the two types of movements shown in the characteristic J12 from being confused with each other and improve the degree of attention. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the groups A to I to the features J1 to J12 described in detail above.

<Characteristic K group>
The following characteristic K group is that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a game area. When the game ball has passed through the working opening, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state such as a winning state, which is advantageous to the player, is generated, and variable display of the pattern is started. In the case of winning, the specific picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Regarding, “In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in realizing the degree of attention to games in the structure of gaming machines.” The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Features K1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b) (function of acquiring holding information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) When,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a display section (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
The variable display of the design is started on the display unit, and the variable display is ended so that the design corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed, which is one of the game times, and the acquired information is obtained. A game provided with game time control means (notification/effect control device 140) for controlling the pattern display device so that the pattern of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the storage device. Machine,
Position changing means for moving the display unit to a first position (front position) and a second position (rear position) (a function of executing a display form switching process in the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140);
Having a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) that can be moved to the standby position (retracted position) and the production position (production position), the special production (special light emission display) is performed in a state where the movable body is arranged at the production position. And a movable production device (production device 950F, etc.) to be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the movable effect device is configured to use a void formed by moving the display unit from the first position to the second position as an operation area of the movable body. And
The position changing means,
Moving means for moving the display unit from the first position to the second position;
The display unit moved to the second position is stopped at the second position over a plurality of game times including a game time moved to the second position and another game time executed after the game time. And a stopping means to
The movable rendering device is a means for moving the movable body from the standby position to the rendering position in a situation where the display unit is stopped at the second position by the stopping device at the other game time. A gaming machine characterized by having.

As shown by the characteristic K1, if the void formed by the movement of the display unit from the first position to the second position is used as the operation area of the movable body, the pattern display device (display unit) can be used in a limited space. And the movable effect device (movable body) can coexist appropriately. However, the necessity of the preliminary operation (preliminary operation) in the pattern display device when executing the special effect can be a factor that deteriorates the response at the start of the special effect. In addition, the presence of the preliminary movement in the player's visual field, which is expected for special effects, may be a factor that reduces the impact on the movement of the movable body. This is not preferable in order to improve the attention paid to the game. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the display unit is moved to the second position and can be stopped at the second position in the previous game, if the movable unit is operated during the stop, Preliminary operation becomes unnecessary and the above-mentioned prior knowledge becomes difficult. Therefore, when the pattern display device and the movable effect device are used together, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the impact of the special effect, and to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Features K2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b) (function of acquiring holding information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) When,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a display section (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
The variable display of the design is started on the display unit, and the variable display is ended so that the design corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed, which is one of the game times, and the acquired information is obtained. A game provided with game time control means (notification/effect control device 140) for controlling the pattern display device so that the pattern of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the storage device. Machine,
Position changing means for moving the display unit to a first position (front position) and a second position (rear position) (a function of executing a display form switching process in the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140);
Having a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) that can be moved to the standby position (retracted position) and the production position (production position), the special production (special light emission display) is performed in a state where the movable body is arranged at the production position. And a movable production device (production device 950F, etc.) to be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the movable effect device is configured to use a void formed by moving the display unit from the first position to the second position as an operation area of the movable body. And
The position changing means,
Moving means for moving the display unit from the first position to the second position when the special effect is executed by the movable effect device,
The display unit moved to the second position by the moving means is played over a plurality of game times including a game time moved to the second position and another game time executed after the game time. A gaming machine having a stopping means for stopping at the second position.

As indicated by the characteristic K2, if the void formed by the movement of the display unit from the first position to the second position is used as the operation area of the movable body, the pattern display device (display unit) can be used in a limited space. And the movable effect device (movable body) can coexist appropriately. However, the necessity of the preliminary operation (preliminary operation) in the pattern display device when executing the special effect can be a factor that deteriorates the response at the start of the special effect. In addition, the presence of the preliminary movement in the player's visual field, which is expected for special effects, may be a factor that reduces the impact on the movement of the movable body. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the display unit is moved to the second position and can be stopped at the second position in the previous game, if the movable unit is operated during the stop, it is a reserve. The operation becomes unnecessary, and the above-mentioned prior detection becomes difficult. Therefore, when the pattern display device and the movable effect device are used together, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the impact of the special effect, and to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, the display unit is stopped at the second position with the special effect as a trigger. Therefore, the unnaturalness of the movement is alleviated as compared with the configuration in which the movement to the second position is performed independently (independently) regardless of the special effect.

Features K3. The movable rendering device is a means for moving the movable body from the standby position to the rendering position in a situation where the display unit is stopped at the second position by the stopping device at the other game time. A gaming machine according to feature K2, which has:

As shown in the characteristic K3, if the movable body is moved to the effect position in the game time after the start of the stop, the effect shown in the characteristic K2 can be suitably exhibited.

Features K4. Based on the result of the determination by the determining means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is shifted to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state transition means (function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is provided,
When the determination result in the game time in which the special effect is executed is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the stopping means retains the display unit in the second position even after the end of the game time. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3, which is configured to be configured to perform.

If the judgment result (disconnection result) does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information after the special effect, the next game time is started immediately after the end of the previous game time, so the special effect may frequently occur in a short period. Occurs. The movement of the display unit to the first position/the second position each time the special effect is performed becomes a factor giving an impression that the player is annoying. It is feared that this hinders the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature K1. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the display unit is held at the second position in the case of the special effect->off result.

Features K5. When the special effect is executed, a staying condition determination unit that determines whether or not a staying condition for stopping the display unit at the second position is satisfied is provided,
The moving means includes means for returning the display unit from the second position to the first position when the special condition is not satisfied, when the stop condition is not satisfied.
Any one of the characteristics K1 to K3 characterized in that the detention means keeps the display unit detained at the second position even after the special effect is finished when the detention condition is satisfied. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic K5, after the special effect is finished, it is divided into a case where the display unit stays at the second position and a case where the display unit returns to the first position. With such a configuration, the flow of the production can be diversified by utilizing the return to the first position itself as a part of the production. This is preferable in order to appropriately exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

Features K6. The acquisition information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the special information,
The determination means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (big hit information),
The stopping condition determination means is such that, when the special effect is executed, the stopping condition includes that special information corresponding to a game time subsequent to the game time at which the special effect is executed is stored. The gaming machine according to feature K5, which is configured as follows.

As shown in the characteristic K1 and the like, if the pattern display and the special effect are executed in the same area, both can be executed in an ideal position in consideration of the player's field of view and the like. This is preferable in reducing the burden on the eyes of the player. Here, according to this feature, one of the conditions for stopping the display unit at the second position is that another game time is held after the game time corresponding to the special effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the stationary function from being exhibited indiscriminately, and to prevent the visibility of the pattern displayed on the display unit from decreasing. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned reduction effect.

Features K7. The acquisition information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the special information,
The determination means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (big hit information),
The information corresponding to the determination result when the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is the target of the determination by the determination unit is specified at a timing before the special information is the target of the determination. Equipped with a destination specifying means
In the case where the special effect is executed and the special information corresponding to the succeeding game time is stored in the game time in which the special effect is executed, the staying condition determination means is configured to execute the special information regarding the special information. The gaming machine according to the characteristic K5 or the characteristic K6, which determines whether or not the stop condition is satisfied based on the identification result by the destination identification means.

As shown in the characteristic K1 and the like, if the pattern display and the special effect are executed in the same area, both can be executed in an ideal position in view of the player's field of view and the like. This is preferable in reducing the burden on the eyes of the player. Here, according to this feature, one of the conditions for stopping the display unit at the second position is that another game time is held after the game time corresponding to the special effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the stationary function from being exhibited indiscriminately, and to prevent the visibility of the pattern displayed on the display unit from decreasing. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned reduction effect.

In addition, correlation occurs depending on the position of the display unit in the game times before and after. For example, it is possible to suggest that the special effect is likely to be executed again when the display unit is stopped at the second position, and it is possible to add the effect function to the stop itself at the second position. Become.

Features K8. As a display mode of the pattern on the display unit, a first display mode (for example, a display mode in which the pattern is white) and a second display mode (for example, a display mode in which the pattern is red) different from the first display mode are provided. Has been
The display mode is the first display mode when the display unit is arranged at the first position, and the display mode is the second display mode when the display unit is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K7, characterized in that it is provided with a display mode switching means.

According to the characteristic K8, if the display mode of the pattern is switched according to the position of the display unit, it is possible to provide the relationship between the first display mode and the second display mode for the special effect generation.

Especially when the display mode is switched to the second display mode in combination with the feature K5 and the like (setting the stop condition), it is as if the special effect is continuous and the special effect is continuous. I can show you. This can strengthen the sense of unity between the front and rear special effects.

Features K9. The position changing unit is configured to move the display unit to the second position by retracting the display unit from the first position to form the gap in front of the display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K8.

According to the characteristic K9, a space for moving the movable body is formed in front of the display unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player gazing at the display unit misses the movement of the movable body. Further, the amount of movement of the player's line of sight at the first position/second position can be reduced. This is excellent in reducing eye fatigue caused by cooperation with the movable body.

Features K10. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b) (function of acquiring holding information by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) When,
An acquired information storage unit (a reserved ball storage area 632 provided in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Judgment means for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (big hit information) (function of executing big hit lottery in MPU 602 of main controller 162) When,
A pattern display device (drum device 920F etc.) having a display section (drum units 923LF, 923MF, 923RF etc.) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
The variable display of the design is started on the display unit, and the variable display is ended so that the design corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed, which is one of the game times, and the acquired information is obtained. A game provided with game time control means (notification/effect control device 140) for controlling the pattern display device so that the pattern of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the storage device. Machine,
Position changing means for moving the display unit to a first position (front position) and a second position (rear position) (a function of executing a display form switching process in the MPU 652 of the notification/production control device 140);
Having a movable body (movable block 951F etc.) that can be moved to the standby position (retracted position) and the production position (production position), the special production (special light emission display) is performed in a state where the movable body is arranged at the production position. And a movable production device (production device 950F, etc.) to be executed,
When the movable body is moved to the effect position, the movable effect device uses a gap formed by moving the display unit from the first position to the second position as an operation area of the movable object. It is configured to
The position changing means,
First moving means for moving the display unit from the first position to the second position;
Second moving means for moving the display part from the second position to the first position during the game time when the display part is moved to the second position by the first moving means or at the end of the game time;
A gaming machine comprising: a delay unit that delays movement of the second moving unit to the first position when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As shown by the characteristic K10, if the void formed by the movement of the display unit from the first position to the second position is used as the operation area of the movable body, the pattern display device (display unit) is available in a limited space. And the movable effect device (movable body) can coexist appropriately. However, the necessity of the preliminary operation (preliminary operation) in the pattern display device when executing the special effect can be a factor that deteriorates the response at the start of the special effect. In addition, the presence of the preliminary movement in the player's visual field, which is expected for special effects, may be a factor that reduces the impact on the movement of the movable body. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the display unit is moved from the second position to the first position during the game time when the display unit is moved to the second position by the first moving means or at the end of the game time. Although the configuration is premised, the movement to the first position by the second moving means is delayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the preliminary operation becomes unnecessary when operating the movable portion during the delay, The above-mentioned prior knowledge becomes difficult. Therefore, when the pattern display device and the movable effect device are used together, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the impact of the special effect, and to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Features K11. The delay unit is configured such that the display unit stays at the second position over a game time in which the display unit is moved to the second position by the first moving unit and a game time executed after the game time. As described above, the gaming machine described in the feature K10 is configured to delay the movement to the first position by the second moving means.

According to the characteristic K11, since the display unit can stay at the second position over a plurality of game times, it is preferable that the preliminary operation of the display unit is indispensable when the special effect is executed in a later game time. Can be reduced to

Features K12. The delay unit is configured to delay the movement to the first position until at least the game effect corresponding to the special effect is included in the subsequent game effect, until the special effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature K11.

As shown in the characteristics K10 and the like, if the pattern display and the special effect are executed in the same area, both can be executed in an ideal position in view of the player's field of view and the like. This is preferable in reducing the burden on the eyes of the player. Here, according to this feature, one of the conditions for stopping the display unit at the second position is that another game time is held after the game time corresponding to the special effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the delay function from being exhibited indiscriminately, and to prevent the visibility of the pattern displayed on the display unit from decreasing. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned reduction effect.

In addition, correlation occurs depending on the position of the display unit in the game times before and after. For example, it is possible to suggest that the special effect is likely to be executed again when the display unit is stopped at the second position, and to add the effect function to the delay itself of the return from the first position. Is possible.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to J to the features K1 to K12 described in detail above.

Any one of the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features may be applied to other features, or the technical ideas shown in a plurality of features may be combined and applied to other features. It is also possible to extract part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), game ball launching means launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the shot. A ball passage (guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area, and game parts (nails and the like) arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passage portion (general winning opening) of each of the game parts. 81) and the like, a gaming machine that gives a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through.

Rotating type gaming machines such as slot machines: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variable display of the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and the variation of the symbol starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating device for stop or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type gaming machine using a ball: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variably displaying the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and stopped. Due to the operation of the operation means or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the special game state advantageous to the player (bonus) is that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A loading device that is configured to generate a game or the like) and further includes a ball tray to perform a loading process for loading a game ball from the ball tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses the game ball to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective by throwing in a game ball.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80... Gaming board unit, 80a... Gaming board, 83a... Upper working opening, 83b... Lower working opening, 85... Central opening, 140... Notification/production control device, 162... Main control device , 500... Variable display unit, 523... Drum unit, 524... Base body, 525... Rotating body, 526... Motor, 528... Side light, 529... Background display device, 531... Frame, 532... Light guide part, 535... Hub, 536... rim, 542... connecting part, 551... outer surface part, 552... inner surface part, 553... light emitting part, 554... end face, 555-557... light guide panel, 561... insertion part, 571... light emitting substrate, 572... light emission Body, 582... Backlight, 800... Gaming mechanism, 810... Sorting unit, 811... Stage part, 812... First entrance, 813... Second entrance, 814... Third entrance, 821... Movable Body, 823 to 824... Columnar part, 830... Stage unit, 831... Stage part, 834... Stopper, 840... Link, 900F... Variable display unit, 920F... Drum device, 923F... Drum unit, 924F... Holder, 925F... Drum, 928F... Side light, 931F... Variable mechanism, 950F... Rendering device, 951F... Movable block, 952F... Elevating device, 956F... Rotating body, 963F... Light emitting substrate, 971F... LED, 1000K... Variable display unit, 1010K... Partition, 1020K Circulation device, 1021K... Circulation unit, 1027K... Guide block, 1031K... Variable mechanism, 1032K... Guide block drive unit, 1033K... Link mechanism, 1041K... Receiving surface section, 1042K... Backlight, 1045K... Position detection sensor, BP1... Boundary parts, CL1 to CL3... Rotation center axis line, DP... Display area, OP... Opening, PE... Game area.

Claims (5)

An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage unit capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information,
A pattern display device having a display unit capable of variably displaying a pattern,
The variable display of the design is started on the display unit, and the variable display is ended so that the design corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed, which is one of the game times, and the acquired information is obtained. A gaming machine comprising: game time control means for controlling the pattern display device so that a variable display of a pattern for each game time is performed according to special information stored in the storage means,
Position changing means for moving the display unit to a first position and a second position,
A movable effect device that has a movable body that can be moved to a standby position and an effect position, and that executes a special effect in a state in which the movable object is arranged at the effect position;
When the special effect is executed, the movable effect device is configured to use a void formed by moving the display unit from the first position to the second position as an operation area of the movable body. And
The position changing means,
Moving means for moving the display unit from the first position to the second position when the special effect is executed by the movable effect device,
The display unit moved to the second position by the moving means is played over a plurality of game times including a game time moved to the second position and another game time executed after the game time. A gaming machine having a stopping means for stopping at the second position. The movable rendering device is a means for moving the movable body from the standby position to the rendering position in a situation where the display unit is stopped at the second position by the stopping device at the other game time. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine comprises: Based on the result of the determination by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information, a game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Prepare,
When the determination result in the game time in which the special effect is executed is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the stopping means retains the display unit in the second position even after the end of the game time. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is configured to perform. When the special effect is executed, a staying condition determination unit that determines whether or not a staying condition for stopping the display unit at the second position is satisfied is provided,
The moving means includes means for returning the display unit from the second position to the first position when the special effect is finished, when the stop condition is not satisfied.
If the stopping condition is satisfied, the stopping means keeps the display unit stopped at the second position even after the end of the special effect,
The acquisition information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the special information,
The determination means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
The stopping condition determination means is such that, when the special effect is executed, the stopping condition includes that special information corresponding to a game time subsequent to the game time at which the special effect is executed is stored. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows. The information corresponding to the determination result when the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is the target of the determination by the determination unit is specified at a timing before the special information is the target of the determination. Equipped with a destination specifying means
In the case where the special effect is executed and the special information corresponding to the succeeding game time is stored in the game time in which the special effect is executed, the staying condition determination means is configured to execute the special information regarding the special information. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein whether or not the stop condition is satisfied is determined based on the identification result by the destination identification means.

Images